Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Acad Elec 2010 Userguide
Acad Elec 2010 Userguide
Users Guide
January 2008
2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD
Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk
Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch,
AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner,
Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next>
(design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio,
Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF,
Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax,
Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor
LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox,
MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall,
Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ,
Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo),
SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual
Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo).
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries:
Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks.
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA
(design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert.
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Published by:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 Mclnnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
Contents
Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Join the Customer Involvement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ribbon Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Project tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Project Tools panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Other Tools panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Troubleshooting panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Schematic tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Quick Pick panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Insert Components panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Edit Components panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Other Tools panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Power Check Tools panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Panel tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Insert Component Footprints panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Terminal Footprints panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Edit Footprints panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Other Tools panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Conduit Tools panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Reports tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
iii
Schematic panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Panel panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Miscellaneous panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Import/Export Data tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Import panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Export panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Conversion Tools tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Tools panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Schematic panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Panel panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Attributes panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Symbol Builder tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Edit panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Help panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Toolbars to Ribbons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Main Electrical toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Main Electrical 2 toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Panel Layout toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Conversion toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Conduit Marker toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Power Check toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Extra Libraries toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
The Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Overview of the Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Display and Organize the Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Customize the Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
What's New in Previous Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
What's New in 2007 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
What's New in 2008 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
What's New in 2009 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Chapter 2 Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Migration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Chapter 3 Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Overview of projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Use recently opened projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Create a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Add a new drawing to the current project . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Add existing drawings to the current project . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Group drawings within a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Change the order of drawings in the project . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Remove a drawing from the active project . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Assign a description to each drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Preview a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
iv | Contents
About collaborative design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Create a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Change drawing display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Overview of project-related files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Overview of the project file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Archive a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Delete a project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Work with Multiple Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Overview of setup for multiple clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Drawing List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
IEC tag mode update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Task list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Chapter 4 Drawing and Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Overview of project and drawing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Use replaceable parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Save settings to the project file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Settings List Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Create a template drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Updating the WD_M Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Overview of the WD_M block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Using Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Manage layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Use wire layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Change wire types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Chapter 5 Symbol Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Determine symbol block names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Library Symbol Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Overview of symbol naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Split a tag name into two pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Use multiple symbol libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Overview of one-line symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Overview of Hydraulic and P&ID symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Attribute Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Schematic attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Overview of schematic attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Overview of parent and stand-alone component attributes
(TAG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Overview of child component attributes (TAG2) . . . . . . 331
Panel attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Overview of panel attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Attributes for other symbol categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Overview of attributes for other symbol categories . . . . . 335
Copy attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Contents | v
Managing Library Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Substitute symbols in the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Change appearance of existing library symbols . . . . . . . . . . 340
Predefine symbol annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Swap blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Create a library symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Symbol Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Symbol Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Symbol Preview Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Chapter 6 JIC Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Illuminated Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Fuses, Circuit Breakers, Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Fuses and Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Circuit Breakers and Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Relays and Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Relays and Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Latch Relay Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Time Delay Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
OFF-Delay Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Master Test Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Neon Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
PLC I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Terminals and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
In-Line Wire Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Power Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Connectors - No Wirenumber Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Connectors - Wirenumber Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Pressure and Temperature Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Flow and Level Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Miscellaneous Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Miscellaneous Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Single Pole Double Throw Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
vi | Contents
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Cable Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Generic Device Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Stand-alone Cross-reference Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Wire Arrows - Reference Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
One-Line Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Cable Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Bus-tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Chapter 7 IEC Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Illuminated Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
3 Position Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
4 Position Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Breakers, Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
1 Pole Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
2nd+ Pole Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Power Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Fusible Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Disconnect 1 Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Fuses, Transformers, Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Fuse Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
3 Phase Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Relays, Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Relays and Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Relays with Surpression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Current Protection Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Voltage Protection Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Counter Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Miscellaneous Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Time Delay Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Contents | vii
Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
1 Phase Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
3 Phase Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
DC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Pilot Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Standard Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Transformer Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Push to Test Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Beacons - Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Beacons - Rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
PLC I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Terminals, Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
In-Line Wire Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Power Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Connectors - No Wirenumber Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Connectors - Wirenumber Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Pressure and Temperature Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Proximity Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Inductive Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Capacitive Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Magnetic Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Photoelectric Emitter Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Photoelectric Receiver Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Photoelectric Emitter/Receiver Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Ultrasonic Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Miscellaneous Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Instrumentation and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Qualifying Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Operating Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Linear Direction of Force or Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Rotative Direction of Force or Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Propagation Flow or Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Energy Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
viii | Contents
Mechanical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Mechanical Controls, Latching Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Mechanical Controls, Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Cable Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Generic Device Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Stand-alone Cross-reference Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Wire Arrows - Reference Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Splice Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Annunciations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
One-Line Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Cable Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Bus-tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Chapter 8 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Generate PLC layout modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Parametric PLC symbols vs. Full Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Insert PLC modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
Overview of the PLC database file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Single, Stand-alone I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Modify single, stand-alone PLC layout symbols . . . . . . . . . 668
Work with PLC styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Modify a PLC appearance style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
Create a PLC style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Add a new PLC style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Create PLC I/O Drawings from Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
Overview of the PLC spreadsheet/database format . . . . . . . . 674
Create PLC spreadsheets using RSLogix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Create XML files for export to Unity Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Chapter 9 Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Circuit Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Circuit Builder overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
Drawing templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
Electrical standards database file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Contents | ix
Electrical standards database editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Use Circuit Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Recalculate wire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
Reference an existing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Use circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Add existing circuits to the icon menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Chapter 10 Component Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Insert schematic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Insert or edit child components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Insert a copy of a component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Insert from catalog lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
The schematic lookup file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Insert from equipment lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Insert from panel lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
Manipulate Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Manipulate components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Annotate ratings attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Swap contact states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Component Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Cross-Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Check coil/contact count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
Overview of cross-reference settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Overview of graphical cross-reference formats . . . . . . . . . . 870
Overview of table cross-reference formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873
Update cross-reference tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
Use stand-alone cross-reference symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Insert dashed link lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
Follow signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
Show signal paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Overview of DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
Overview of user data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
Wire Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
Define wire jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
Chapter 11 Component Attribute Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Edit attribute values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Force attributes to layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
Manipulate component text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
Manipulate terminal text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
Move description values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Move attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
Hide attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
Show attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Rotate attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
x | Contents
Change attribute justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Change attribute text style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Change attribute text size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Rename an attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
Add attributes to blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Set tags to fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926
Retag components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
Change to multi-line text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
Add location codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Update child codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
Location Mark Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
Substitute location mark symbols for text location codes . . . . 933
Modify library symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
Chapter 12 Wire/Wire Number Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Overview of wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Use wire layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Change wire types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
Insert wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
Insert multiple wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955
Interconnect components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957
Trim wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Stretch wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
Bend wires at right angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Overview of wire color/gauge labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961
Insert in-line wire markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
Cable Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Insert cable markers into wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
Multiple cable markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
Edit the cable conductor database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
Edit the list of generic colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Insert shield symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Wire Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Manipulate wire gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
Ladder Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Define and insert new ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Modify an existing ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Overview of wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Set wire number placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017
Find or replace wire number text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
Encode wire color/gauge information into wire numbers . . . . 1026
Fix Wire Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
Fix wire numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
Reposition Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
Reposition wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
Contents | xi
Modify Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
Modify wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
Erase or Hide Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Erase or hide wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Signal Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
Signal Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
Fan In/Out Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
Fan In/Out Source and Destination Markers . . . . . . . . 1057
Wire Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
Control from/to report connection sequencing . . . . . . . . . 1063
Chapter 13 Terminal Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
Overview of connection sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
Insert terminals and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080
Multi-Level Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Overview of terminal relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
Terminal jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Resequence terminal numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
View terminal wire connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Show terminal internal/external connections . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Mark internal connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Mark external connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
Erase connection codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109
Terminal Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
Create terminal strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
Use the terminal strip editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Generate terminal strip tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
Terminal Properties Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
Overview of terminal properties database . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173
Chapter 14 Point-to-Point Wiring Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Working with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Use point-to-point wiring tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Bend wires at right angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
Insert multiple bus wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
Import data from Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable &
Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
Insert splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
Chapter 15 Project-Wide Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
Move from reference to reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
Start the Surfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
Continue a previous surf session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228
xii | Contents
Move between drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Plot one or more drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
Project-wide utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Create a project-wide script file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236
Renumber Ladder References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237
Project-wide update or retag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
Track drawing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240
Translate description text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
Publish to the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
Publish to DWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
Title Block Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
Use drawing title blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
Link information to the title block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259
Map AutoLISP values to the title block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
Chapter 16 Icon Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269
Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269
Add a new icon to the menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
Edit the properties of an existing icon in the menu . . . . . . . 1272
Use alternate icon menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
Modify Icon Menu File Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
Overview of the icon menu file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
Chapter 17 BOM and Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
Use catalog tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
Catalog table naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
Family tables in the default_cat.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
Overview of the catalog database table structure . . . . . . . . . . . 1320
How to install additional manufacturer content . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
Catalog Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
Assign catalog information to components . . . . . . . . . . . 1324
Overview of the _LISTBOX_DEF catalog database table . . . . . 1329
Copy catalog assignments from component to component . . . 1330
Show missing catalog assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333
Contact Quantity/Pin List Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
Use pin lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334
Set pin list assignments for special uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341
Chapter 18 Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
Generate reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345
Schematic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
Generate schematic reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437
Panel Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
Generate panel reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466
Contents | xiii
Overview of format files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
Run automatic reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
Export/Import spreadsheet data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
Create user-defined attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550
Export to Autodesk Inventor Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
Set up for export to Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable &
Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1554
Chapter 19 Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
Overview of panel layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1565
Overview of footprint attributes/Xdata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566
Panel drawing configuration and defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Relationship between schematic drawings and panel layouts . . . . . 1574
Automatic schematic/panel update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Schematic and panel symbol relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . 1574
Footprint/Terminal Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1576
Insert panel footprints from a schematic list . . . . . . . . . . 1576
Insert panel footprints using vendor menus . . . . . . . . . . . 1587
Insert panel footprints using icon menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1591
Insert panel footprints manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595
Insert panel footprints from a catalog list . . . . . . . . . . . . 1598
Insert footprints from an equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600
Insert a copy of a panel footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
Use panel templates and assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
Footprint/Terminal Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
Edit a footprint or panel terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
Multiple Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
Copy code values to components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
Layout Wire Connection Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
Add wire information to footprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1628
Lookup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635
Use the footprint lookup file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635
Item Numbers/Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
Add a balloon to a component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
Nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
Insert nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1647
Panel Leveling/Sequencing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
Remove sequencing assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
Show sequencing assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
Swap terminal strip wire text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
Chapter 20 Conduit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
Overview of conduit tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
Conduit Marker Intelligence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665
Overview of conduit marker support files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672
xiv | Contents
Generate a conduit marker report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1673
Generate a conduit routing report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675
Chapter 21 Conversion Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677
Convert promis.e drawing files to AutoCAD Electrical . . . . . . . . 1677
Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1681
Finish mapping values from non-AutoCAD Electrical
blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1682
Convert text to an attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684
Convert Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686
Convert non-AutoCAD Electrical arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686
Overview of ECDS legacy conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1687
Tagging and Linking Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
Use tagging and linking tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
Overview of block/attribute mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1702
Chapter 22 Miscellaneous Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
Overview of power check tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1707
Overview of pneumatic tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1710
Insert hydraulic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
Insert P&ID components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1720
Troubleshooting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725
Overview of real-time error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1725
Modify invisible data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1734
Chapter 23 Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1737
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1737
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1738
Projects - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1738
Working with projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1739
Working with drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747
Wiring - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747
About wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748
Insert wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1748
Trim a wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750
Insert a single-phase ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751
Resequencing ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752
Schematic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1753
Schematic components - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1753
About schematic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1754
Inserting components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1755
Relocating components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759
Aligning components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1763
Contents | xv
Inserting components continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1763
Editing components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767
Linking components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1770
Editing catalog information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1772
Wire layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776
Wire layers - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1776
Creating a wire layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777
Changing a wire layer assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1778
Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779
Circuits - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779
Move an existing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780
Insert and configure a circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1785
Save and insert a circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793
Insert a saved circuit using WBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799
Insert a one-line motor control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1801
Insert a one-line dual power feed circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806
Reference an existing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1809
Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813
Surf - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813
Moving between symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813
Block swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1816
Block swap - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1816
Swapping components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1817
PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818
PLC - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818
Inserting PLC modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1819
Using multiple insert component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823
Annotating PLC I/O descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1825
Schematic terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
Schematic terminals - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
About schematic terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1828
Insert terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1831
Multi-level terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1834
Modify multi-level associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1836
Terminal Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1839
Associate terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1841
Wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843
Wire numbers - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843
About wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1844
Inserting wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1844
Inserting I/O based wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1847
Deleting a wire number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1848
Source signal arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1849
Destination signal arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1851
Panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1857
Panel layout - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1857
xvi | Contents
Insert Footprint (Schematic list) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1858
Adding nameplate footprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1867
Terminal Strip Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1871
Generating reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1877
Generating reports - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1877
Generating Bill of Material reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878
Inserting Bill of Material tables into drawings . . . . . . . . . . 1880
Changing format of Bill of Material report . . . . . . . . . . . 1881
Exporting Bill of Material report to spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . 1882
Connector diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883
Connector diagrams - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883
About connector diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884
Inserting connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1884
Wiring connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888
Grouping wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1892
Modifying connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1896
Adding wire numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900
Adding connector descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901
Symbol Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1903
Symbol Builder - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1903
Creating custom symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1904
Adding attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1905
Adding wire connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1908
Saving the symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910
Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1913
Set up peer-to-peer component relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1913
Create automated pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1915
Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1918
Show source and destination markers on cable wires . . . . . . . . . 1923
Use the PLC Database File Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930
Customize Circuit Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939
Circuit Builder overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1939
Circuit Builder spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1940
Circuit Builder drawing templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1945
Circuit Builder database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1949
Add a new circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1967
Circuit Builder - How to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1978
Build your own symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2017
Build your own symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2017
Add your own symbols, circuits, and commands to the icon
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2047
Configure projects for various drawing standards . . . . . . . . . . . 2055
Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2064
Contents | xvii
Chapter 25 AutoCAD Electrical Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2071
AutoCAD Electrical Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2071
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2085
xviii | Contents
AutoCAD Electrical What's
New
Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help
The AutoCAD Electrical Help system is a browser-based system available through
context-sensitive links or by accessing it through the Help menu or icon. Key
features of the Help system include:
There is on-demand access from the F1 function key, ribbons, dialog boxes,
and the command line.
Navigation tabs in each topic link to related procedures, references, and
concepts.
The Help menu gives you access to AutoCAD Electrical Help, AutoCAD
Electrical Launchpad, the New Features Workshop and other resources.
What are ways to gain access to Help?
You can get help about a command while you are using it.
Select the Help icon in the upper right. Select the drop-
down arrow to display a menu of help options.
Help Button in ribbon environment
From the menu bar, select Help Electrical Help Topics
to view the AutoCAD Electrical Help home page.
Help Menu
1
1
Press F1 At the command prompt, press F1 to open the topic
for the active tool.
In a dialog box, press F1 to open the Reference topic
for the active tool.
In a dialog box, click Help to open the Reference topic for
the active tool.
Help button
How is Help organized?
Most of the subjects in the Help system have three topic types: Procedure,
Reference, and Concept. Every Help topic selected from a menu has a tab row
above the topic title. You can click a tab to go to the other available topic
types.
Procedure topics provide step-by-step procedures for accomplishing
AutoCAD Electrical tasks.
Reference topics offer detailed descriptions of elements in the dialog box.
Concept topics provide conceptual information about tools and tasks and
may explain related concepts.
The titles of Help topics are designed to tell you the information they contain:
Procedure topics start with an action word, for example, "Create projects."
Reference topics have the names of the dialog box as their titles.
Concept topics typically start with the words "Use" or Overview of.
How do I get around in the Help system?
When you start the Help system, the first thing you see is the AutoCAD
Electrical Help home page.
At the top of every Help window is a navigation bar with
icons. The left-most icon is either Show or Hide, which
Navigation bar
opens or closes the navigation pane of the Help window.
The navigation pane has tabs for Table of Contents, Index,
Search, and Favorites.
2 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
Presents an overview of the available documentation in a
list of topics and subtopics. Provides a structure so you can
Table of Contents
always see where you are in Help and quickly jump to
other topics. Click AutoCAD Electrical Command Listing
for an alphabetical list of AutoCAD Electrical tools found in
the menu and toolbars.
You can enter a word in the box to locate the term in the
alphabetical index. Double-click the term to display the
topic, or if multiple topics, to open a list of topics found.
Index
You can enter a search word in the box and click List Topics
to view a list of topics that contain the search word any-
Search
where in their content. Click a title, and then click Display
(or double-click a title) to open the topic.
With a topic visible in the Help window, you can click the
Favorites tab, and then click Add to add the current topic
Favorites
to a list of favorites. To remove a topic from the list, select
the topic in the list, and then click Remove.
How do I learn the product?
Training programs and products from Autodesk help you learn the key
technical features and improve your productivity. For the latest information
about Autodesk training, visit http://www.autodesk.com/training or contact your
local Autodesk office.
The Autodesk Authorized Training Center (ATC) network delivers
Autodesk-authorized, instructor-led training to design professionals who use
Autodesk software. Autodesk Authorized Training Centers use experienced
and knowledgeable instructors. More than 1,200 ATC sites are available
worldwide to meet your needs for discipline-specific, locally based training.
To find a training center near you, contact your local Autodesk office or visit
http://www.autodesk.com/atc.
Use AutoCAD Electrical Help
AutoCAD Electrical has a variety of learning tools to assist you, whether you
are a newcomer or an experienced CAD user.
Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help | 3
To gain access to Help
Use any of the following methods to gain access to Help.
Select the Help icon in the upper right or select the drop-down arrow to
display a menu of help options.
Select Help Electrical Help Topics from the menu bar, and then browse
to the desired topic. You can use the tabbed pane to access the Index,
Search, or Table of Contents.
Press F1 to open the Procedure or Reference Help topic for the active
command.
In an open dialog box, press F1 or click Help to open the Reference topic
for the active command.
To customize Help
Use any of the following methods to customize Help.
Click the Hide or Show button in the Help toolbar to control the visibility
of the tabbed pane beside the content window.
To add a topic to the Favorites tab, select a Help topic, click the Favorites
tab, and then click Add. To delete a topic from the Favorites tab, select the
topic in the list, and then click Delete.
To search Help
Another method for finding Help topics is to use the Search tab.
1 Click Show in the browser toolbar if the tabbed navigation pane is not
displayed.
2 Click the Search tab.
3 Enter text in the search text box, and then click List Topics. Use quotation
marks (" ") around the search criteria to search for a string. Use an asterisk
(*) before or after text as a wildcard.
4 Double-click a topic or select a topic, and then click Display to show the
topic.
4 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
5 You can also select one or more of the following Search options to limit
the results.
Search previous results
Match similar words
Search titles only
6 Use operators to refine your Search criteria further. Click the right arrow
next to the search text box, and then select one of the following operators.
AND Use AND to search for topics with more than one set of your
search criteria.
OR Use OR to search for topics with at least one of your search criteria.
NEAR Use Near to search for specified text within close proximity to
each other.
NOT Use NOT to search for topics that do not include your search
criteria.
To print Help
You can print a single file or you can print sections of the Help.
1 In the Help Contents tab, right-click a heading and select Print.
2 Select whether to print the selected topic or the selected heading and all
subheadings.
NOTE You can also print a single topic by right-clicking in the file and
selecting Print.
3 Click OK.
If you want to print the entire Help system, in the Contents tab, right-click
AutoCAD Electrical Help and select Print. Select the option to print the selected
heading and all subheadings and click OK.
To find out What's New about AutoCAD Electrical
What's New topics describe the new functionality in the most recent AutoCAD
Electrical release.
Overview of AutoCAD Electrical Help | 5
1 Click Help AutoCAD Electrical Help. In the AutoCAD Electrical Help,
click What's New from the Table of Contents.
You can also open the What's New by selecting Help Display
Launchpad. Click What's New on the AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad.
2 Browse to a feature you want to learn about.
3 Click More Information to learn more about the feature.
To get started with AutoCAD Electrical using Getting Started
1 Select Help Display Launchpad.
The AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad screen appears. The Launchpad has
two sections. The top section is for first-time users. It has links to white
papers, the Getting Started manual, the AutoCAD Electrical discussion
group, and frequently asked questions. The bottom section has links to
places for additional information about AutoCAD Electrical. You can find
out what's new in the current release, link to the Advanced Productivity
home page, and find out more about additional Autodesk products.
2 Click Getting Started Manual on the AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad.
Join the Customer Involvement Program
You are invited to participate in helping guide
the direction of Autodesk design software.
If you participate in the Customer Involvement Program, specific information
about how you use AutoCAD Electrical is forwarded to Autodesk. This
information includes what features you use the most, problems that you
encounter, and other information helpful to the future direction of the
product.
See the following links for more information.
Learn more about the Autodesk Customer Involvement Program:
http://www.autodesk.com/cip
Read the Autodesk Privacy Statement: http://www.autodesk.com/cipprivacy
6 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
To turn the CIP on or off
1 On the InfoCenter toolbar, to the right of the Help button, click the
drop-down arrow.
2 Click Customer Involvement Program.
3 In the Customer Involvement Program dialog box, select a level of
participation.
4 Click OK.
What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2010
Ribbon Interface
To provide easy access to AutoCAD Electrical commands, a ribbon interface
is now available. The ribbon layout is based on workflow and function. See
the Help topic, Ribbon Interface, for more information on the ribbon layout.
For More Information on page 11
Workspaces
AutoCAD Electrical provides three predefined workspaces.
ACADE & 2D Drafting & Annotation - ribbons that provide the AutoCAD
Electrical tools, and the AutoCAD 2D Drafting and Annotation tools.
ACADE & 3D Modeling - ribbons that provide the AutoCAD Electrical
tools, and the AutoCAD 3D Modeling tools.
AutoCAD Electrical Classic - toolbars and pull down menus that provide
the AutoCAD Electrical tools and AutoCAD tools.
You can switch to another workspace whenever you need to by selecting the
Workspace icon on the status bar.
What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2010 | 7
Circuit Builder goes green
Circuit Builder now provides engineering analysis/green calculations in the
area of power conductor size versus energy losses. Designing to meet minimum
code requirements can conflict with green design.
During the code requirements analysis, Circuit Builder displays parallel energy
loss calculations so you can make better green design decisions. For example,
you might want to oversize the conductors for a motor to reduce conductor
heating losses. It results in a higher initial cost. But this higher cost can
potentially be recovered many times over in reduced energy losses in the
wiring over the lifetime of the installation.
For More Information on page 764
Circuit Builder - power feed support
Circuit Builder now provides power feed circuits for insertion.
Option to add a source arrow symbols at end of the power feed bus.
Option to add a generic load box representation at the end of the power
feed bus.
Supports defining a user-created load symbol, for example a variable speed
drive symbol, for insertion at the end of a power feed bus.
Support for adjusting the load representation based on the rung spacing.
For More Information on page 744
Circuit Builder - additional features
Wire conductor sizing based upon electrical code requirements.
Support for split-parallel conductor sizing is available. You can choose to
substitute multiple, smaller diameter conductors to meet the equivalent
ampacity requirement of a single, large diameter conductor.
Fuse, breaker, disconnect switch, and overload calculations based upon
electrical code requirements.
Circuit Builder can be set up to predefine motor description text,
installation, location, and text description for individual components in
the circuit.
8 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
Insert a new circuit and reference an existing circuit. This option can
transfer the values from the existing circuit to your new circuit.
Electrical standards database editor to view, modify, and expand the
ace_electrical_standards.mdb file.
For More Information on page 703
Motor control one-line circuits
AutoCAD Electrical now provides library support and software support to
create motor control one-line diagrams that link back to other drawing types
in a project drawing set.
New motor control one-line symbol library accessible from the icon menu.
Circuit Builder supports building motor control one-line circuits
dynamically allowing the design of one-line circuits, with component
values and wire sizes, to conform to a given electrical code.
One-line component symbols can be related to parent/child counterparts
on the schematic and panel layout drawings within a project. You can surf
between one-line and related components and all related components
update if one is modified.
Tagging of schematic or panel components using existing commands can
reference a pick list that includes components pulled from the one-line
diagrams.
Certain schematic reports have a new category option. You select the
category, for example One-Line, and the data is filtered based on that
category. It can also be used to filter a report for Hydraulic, P&ID, or
Pneumatic components.
For More Information on page 310
No wire numbering option for wire layers
Wire layers now have a no wire numbering option. These wires behave
normally for inserting, breaking, and scooting components, and show up in
the Wire From/To report.
The Insert Wire Numbers command follows these rules:
If all wires in the network are on layers set No for Wire Numbering, no
new wire number is inserted.
What's New in AutoCAD Electrical 2010 | 9
If any wire in the network is on a layer set Yes for Wire Numbering, the
existing non-fixed wire number is updated or a new wire number is inserted.
If a wire network already has a non-fixed wire number, it is updated
regardless of the Wire Numbering setting. Use the Delete Wire Numbers
command to remove the wire number.
For More Information on page 282
Electrical Audit
The Electrical Audit can now display the results for the active drawing only.
Run the Electrical Audit, click the Active Drawing button and quickly see the
issues for this drawing only. Open another drawing and the dialog box updates
to display the results for the newly opened drawing. The active drawing must
be part of the active project.
For More Information on page 1730
Help Updates
Reference topics that show command access now include the following
features:
Command line access
Ribbon access
If the location of a command is changed, ribbon and menu access to the
command are updated in the Help system to reflect the new location of
the command.
NOTE This dynamic update only works when the Help is used within AutoCAD
Electrical.
10 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
Ribbon Interface
Project tab
Project Tools panel
Description Command
Lists the drawing files associated with each
open project. Use this to add new drawings,
Project Manager
AEPROJECT
reorder drawing files, and change project set-
tings. You cannot have two projects open in
the Project Manager with the same project
name.
Copies an existing project to a new name and
creates renamed copies of the drawing files.
Copy Project
AECOPYPROJECT
Deletes a project and provides the option to
also delete the drawing files in the project.
This is permanent and cannot be undone.
Delete Project
AEDELETEPROJECT
Creates a zip file of the .wdp file for the active
project and one or more drawing files it refer-
Zip Project
AEZIPPROJECT
ences. The zip file can optionally include a
copy of the temporary database file for the
project.
Updates component tags, wire numbers, lad-
der references, and select drawing settings.
Project-Wide Update/Re-
tag
AEPROJUPDATE
Ribbon Interface | 11
Description Command
Updates wire numbers, component tags, and
attribute text. Allows user-defined scripts to
be applied project-wide.
Project-Wide Utilities
AEUTILITIES
Places an invisible mark on each component
before sending the drawings to a client. When
Mark/Verify DWGs
AEMARKVERIFY
the drawings are returned, a list is generated
that includes any components or wire num-
bers that have been modified, edited, or
copied.
NOTE This command writes information to
the project database file that is used to check
for deleted components. Your drawings must
be named and part of the active project to use
this command.
Other Tools panel
Description Command
Moves from reference to reference across the
project drawing set. A new window opens and
Surfer
AESURF
the original window closes when Surf is selec-
ted unless you hold the Shift key while running
the command.
Continues a previous surf session from the
point where you left off.
Continue Surfer
AESURFCONT
Loads the drawing listed above the current
drawing in the project explorer, and closes
the current drawing.
Previous DWG
AEPREV
12 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
Description Command
Loads the drawing listed below the current
drawing in the project explorer, and closes
the current drawing.
Next DWG
AENEXT
Migrate database and support files from a
previous version of AutoCAD Electrical to the
current release.
Migration Utility
AEMIGRATION
Translates component description text from
one language to another. Description text and
Language Conversion
AELANG
switch position text is processed on schematic
and panel components.
Opens the current language table for review
and modification. The default table is
wd_lang1.mdb.
Edit Language Database
AELANGDB
You can link some AutoCAD Electrical project
description data entries and some of the
Title Block Setup
AESETUPTITLEBLOCK
drawing values to the attributes in the title
blocks. There are two methods, an attribute
mapping file or a mapping attribute embed-
ded on the title block.
Automates updating title block information
for the current drawing or the entire project
Title Block Update
AEUPDATETITLEBLOCK
drawing set. Project and drawing specific set-
tings are linked to one or more attributes
contained in the title block.
Updates component tagging based on a
change in the IEC tagging mode.
IEC Tag Mode Update
AEUPDATEIECTAG
Project tab | 13
Description Command
Replaces the schematic wd_m.dwg block in
the current drawing with a newer copy, and
Update to New WD_M
Block, Values, Layers
converts to the newer configuration values
and layers.
AESWAPWDM
Replaces the schematic wd_m.dwg block in
the current drawing with a newer copy, but
Update to New WD_M
Block, No changes
keeps existing configuration values and layer
names.
AESWAPWDM-
NOCHANGE
Replaces the panel wd_pnlm.dwg block in the
current drawing with a newer copy, and con-
Update to New WD_PN-
LM Block, Values, Layers
verts to the newer configuration values and
layers.
AESWAPPNLM
Replaces the panel wd_pnlm.dwg block in the
current drawing with a newer copy, but keeps
existing configuration values and layer names.
Update to New WD_PN-
LM Block, No changes
AESWAPPN-
LMNOCHANGE
Writes the attribute settings for the wd_m
block in the current drawing to the wd_m.dwg
drawing file in the symbol library.
Update Symbol Library
WD_M Block
AECOPY2SYMLIB
Reports the settings of each drawing in the
project, and provides the means to edit the
Settings List Utility
AEDWGCFG
report and update the drawing properties with
the edited values.
Lists extended entity data, xdata, on a selected
object.
Xdata List
AELISTXDATA
Allows display and edit of an object's 1000
type extended entity data (Xdata).
Xdata Editor
AEXDATA
14 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
Description Command
Turns off the right-click menus in AutoCAD
Electrical.
Right Click Menu Off
AEOFFRIGHTCLICK-
CONTECXTMENU
Turns on the right-click menus in AutoCAD
Electrical.
Right Click Menu On
AEONRIGHTCLICK-
CONTECXTMENU
Adds a new, blank table to the catalog lookup
database file.
Add Catalog Table
AEADDCATALOG TABLE
Moves all objects on a layer in the active
drawing to a different layer.
Move Objects to Layer
AEMOVE2LAYER
Adds the Category field to the PLC database
tables. This field is used by the Spreadsheet
PLC Database Migration
Utility
to PLC I/O utility to determine module place-
ment.
AEPLCMIGRATE
Troubleshooting panel
The Troubleshooting panel is off by default.
Description Command
Inserts a project drawing as an exploded block
into a new, blank drawing.
Clean DWG Utility
AECLEANDWG
Project tab | 15
Description Command
Turns on the display of a real-time listing of
internal calls in AutoCAD Electrical.
Command Trace On
AEONLISPDEBUG
Turns off the display of a real-time listing of
internal calls in AutoCAD Electrical.
Command Trace Off
AEOFFLISPDEBUG
Turns on the display of error messages gener-
ated during temporary MDB file rebuild or
freshen.
MDB Command Trace
On
AEONMDBDEBUG
Turns off the display of error messages gener-
ated during temporary MDB file rebuild and
freshen.
MDB Command Trace
Off
AEOFFMDBDEBUG
Turns on the timer for command execution
elapsed time.
Command Timer On
AEONTIMER
Turns off the timer for command execution
elapsed time.
Command Timer Off
AEOFFTIMER
16 | Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What's New
Schematic tab
Quick Pick panel
The Quick Pick panel is off by default.
Description Command
Activates the icon menu with the relay page
displayed.
Relays
AERELAYMENU
Activates the icon menu with the push button
page displayed.
Push Buttons
AEPUSHBUTTONSMENU
Activates the icon menu with the selector
switch page displayed.
Selector Switches
AESELECTORSWITCH-
MENU
Activates the icon menu with the limit switch
page displayed.
Limit Switches
AELIMITSWITCHMENU
Activates the icon menu with the pilot light
page displayed.
Pilot Lights
AEPILOTLIGHTSMENU
Inserts a user circuit selected from on-screen
icon menu.
Insert Saved Circuit
AESAVEDCIRCUIT
Schematic tab | 17
Insert Components panel
Description Command
Inserts selected components from the icon
menu onto the drawing.
Insert Component
AECOMPONENT
Inserts schematic symbols by choosing a
catalog number or a component description
Insert Component
(Catalog List)
from a user-defined pick list. The data dis-
played in this pick list is stored in a database
AECOMPONENTCAT
in generic Access format. The file name is
wd_picklist.mdb and can be edited with Mi-
crosoft
Excel
Inventor
block with
certain expected attributes. When inserting components, use AutoCAD
Electrical tools to break wires, assign unique component tags, cross reference
related components, and enter values for catalog information, component
descriptions, and location codes.
AutoCAD Electrical supplies a schematic symbol dialog box for finding and
inserting schematic components. It also triggers some additional features.
Automatic wire breaks
1754 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Component tagging
Real-time cross-referencing
Component annotation
Inserting components
AutoCAD Electrical employs a parent/child relationship for schematic
components. A relay coil with a certain number of contacts is represented by
the parent coil symbol and the child contact symbols. When the parent coil
symbol is inserted, it is assigned a unique component tag. When the child
contact symbols are inserted, the child is related to the parent and the parent
tag is assigned to the child symbol.
In this exercise, you insert components on the wires previously defined in
AEGS04.dwg.
Insert a parent component
1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS
and select Activate.
2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list.
3 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS04.dwg.
4 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the drawing.
5 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Components
drop-down Icon Menu.
6 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Relays/
Contacts.
7 In the JIC: Relays and Contacts dialog box, click Relay Coil.
8 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point:
Inserting components | 1755
Position the component on the wire at line reference 403 near the neutral wire
and click (1)
The coil symbol breaks the underlying ladder wire and reconnects if you
select directly on the wire or near to it. You did not select close enough
to the wire if the underlying wire did not break. To try again, click Cancel
on the Insert/Edit Component dialog box. Right-click or press ENTER to
repeat the command. Turning on Snap helps (0.125 is a good setting to
use).
This tool inserts components into alignment with underlying wires, it
does not align components side-to-side. If you want to insert components
in neat columns, you have three options: use AutoCAD Snap when
inserting components; use the Scoot command to move components and
connected wires in place; or use the Align Component tool.
9 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, verify that the Component
Tag is set to CR403.
AutoCAD Electrical automatically determines the unique tag name for
the new relay based on the line reference location that you inserted the
symbol on. CR indicates that it is a control relay and 403 indicates
that the symbol is on line reference 403. If you inserted this symbol on
line reference 404 then the tag name would be CR404.
You can assign a catalog number to the component that can be extracted
into reports. There are two pieces of BOM catalog information:
manufacturer code and catalog number. These values are carried as
invisible attributes on the symbol. You can type in values for each or
select the BOM information from an on-line catalog database file.
10 In the Catalog Data section, click Lookup.
There are three search criteria pull-down lists across the top of the Parts
Catalog dialog box. You can easily change the search criteria to get a
different set of valid catalog numbers. Each time you make a selection
from one of these lists, the catalog selection is filtered.
11 In the Parts catalog dialog box, select the following search criteria:
MANUFACTURER: AB
TYPE: TYPE P
12 Change the catalog assignment to 700-P200A1.
1756 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
13 Click Catalog Check.
14 In the Bill Of Material Check dialog box, review the BOM information
associated with the selected part number.
Click Close.
15 In the Parts catalog dialog box, click OK.
The selected manufacturer code and catalog number display in the
Insert/Edit Component dialog box. When you click OK on the dialog
box, the values transfers to the symbol.
NOTE Sample catalog information is provided with AutoCAD Electrical in
Access Database format (.mdb). If your company uses its own internal coding
system instead of manufacturer catalog numbers, substitute those numbers
into catalog database files of AutoCAD Electrical. If you use your own system
and reference a number of a vendor, extra user fields are available in all the
sample database files.
16 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Description section, specify:
Line 1: MASTER CONTROL
Line 2: RELAY
Inserting components | 1757
Up to three lines of description text can be entered as a description for
components. If the third description line is unavailable, the symbol does
not carry an attribute for a third line of description.
NOTE You can specify a description by entering text or by clicking Defaults
to select from a list of standard component descriptions.
17 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Location code section, click
Drawing.
AutoCAD Electrical does a quick read of the drawing file and returns a
list of all location codes used so far.
18 In the All Locations - Drawing dialog box, select MCAB5 and click OK.
NOTE You can also include an external LOC location list in the project
LOC list to help with consistency. To use this feature, create a file called
default.loc and put it in an AutoCAD Electrical search directory. The format
for this text file is each location on its own line in the file with no leading
spaces. You can also create a project-specific file by naming it the same as
your project but with a .loc extension.
19 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, the pin values are inserted
based on the selected catalog number:
Pins: 1: K1
Pins: 2: K2
1758 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
20 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.
Any values entered here are saved as attribute values on the symbol itself.
Relocating components
You might need to scoot the component if it was not inserted in the correct
location. Use the Scoot tool to select a component or wire number and slide
it back and forth along the wire while keeping everything connected. You can
select a wire or a whole rung of circuitry and scoot it to a new position. If
there are any parent components among the scooted items, you are asked if
you want to retag the scooted components.
The Scoot tool works on wire numbers, components, terminals, PLC I/O
modules, jogs in dashed link lines, signal arrows, wires, and wires with
wire-crossing loops.
Relocating components | 1759
Scoot a component
1 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Modify Components
drop-down Scoot.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select component, wire, or wire number for SCOOT:
Select the component that was just inserted at line reference 403
The cursor changes to a box.
Select component, wire, or wire number for SCOOT: to
Move the cursor to the right and click, right-click to exit the command
The component moves to its new location.
You can use the Scoot tool to grab a component or a wire number and
slide it back and forth along a wire. You can grab a wire or a whole rung
of circuitry and scoot it to a new position, while keeping everything
connected.
The steps to insert a parent component and a child component are the same,
except when you annotate the symbol.
Insert a child component
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Components
drop-down Icon Menu.
2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Relays/
Contacts.
3 In the JIC: Relays and Contacts dialog box, click Relay NO Contact.
1760 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
4 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point:
Position the cursor on the wire at line reference 404 near the hot wire and click
(1)
The Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box displays. Notice that
AutoCAD Electrical did not automatically assign a tag name for the relay
contact; there is just a generic CR in the edit box. Determine the relay
contact tag name. A relay contact is a child component that must link
to a parent relay coil on a drawing in the active project. The child gets
the same tag name that is found on the parent relay coil.
Assign the tag name by clicking Parent/Sibling and picking the parent in
the drawing. Or, click Drawing or Project to select from a list of
components with the same family name.
5 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, Component Tag section,
click Drawing.
6 In the Active Drawing list for FAMILY=CR dialog box, select:
MCAB5 CR403 MASTER CONTROL RELAY
7 Click OK.
The values of the parent are immediately transferred to the contact.
Relocating components | 1761
8 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, verify that the following
options are specified:
Component Tag: CR403
Description: Line 1: MASTER CONTROL
Description: Line 2: RELAY
Cross-reference: 403
Location code: MCAB5
Pins: Pin 1: A1X
Pins: Pin 2: A1Y
9 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, click OK.
The child component is inserted. It is cross-referenced in real time. The
coil is annotated with the line reference number of the new child contact
and the child contact gets annotated with the line reference location of
the parent coil.
1762 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Aligning components
Align the normally open relay contact with an existing component. After you
insert a component, you can align or edit it as necessary.
Align a component
1 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Modify Components
drop-down Align.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Pick component to align with (Horizontal/<Vertical>):
Select the normally open limit switch component near the hot wire at line
reference 406 (1)
A dashed line is displayed.
Select objects:
Select the previously inserted child contact component near the hot wire at line
reference 404 (2), right-click
The aligned component is placed.
Inserting components continued
Now you insert a system reset push button, pilot light, and an emergency stop
push button to make up the circuit.
Aligning components | 1763
Insert a system reset button
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Components
drop-down Icon Menu.
2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Push
Buttons.
3 In the JIC: Push Buttons dialog box, click Push Button NO.
4 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point:
Position the push button on the wire at line reference 403 near the hot wire
and click (1)
5 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, verify the following:
Component Tag: PB403
AutoCAD Electrical automatically assigned the tag name based on the
line reference.
6 In the Descriptions section, specify:
Line 1: SYSTEM
Line 2: RESET
7 In the Location code section, click Drawing.
8 In the All Locations - Drawing dialog box, select OPSTA3 and click OK.
9 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.
1764 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Insert a pilot light
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Components
drop-down Icon Menu.
2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Pilot
Lights.
3 In the JIC: Pilot Lights dialog box, click Green Press to Test.
4 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point:
Position the pilot light on the wire at line reference 404 near the neutral wire
and click (2)
TIP Having Snap turned on makes positioning the pilot light easier.
5 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, verify:
Component Tag: LT404
6 In the Descriptions section, specify:
Line 1: CONVEYOR
Line 2: ON
7 In the Location code section, click Drawing.
8 In the All Locations - Drawing dialog box, select OPSTA3 and click OK.
9 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.
Inserting components continued | 1765
Insert a push button for emergency stop
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Components
drop-down Icon Menu.
2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Push
Buttons.
3 In the JIC: Push Buttons dialog box, click Mushroom Head NC.
4 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point:
Position the push button on the middle of the wire at line reference 403 and
click (3)
5 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, verify:
Component Tag: PB403A
AutoCAD Electrical automatically assigned the tag name based on the
line reference. It added the A suffix since it is your second push button
on this line reference.
6 In the Descriptions section, specify:
Line 1: EMERGENCY STOP
7 In the Location code section, click Drawing.
8 In the All Locations - Drawing dialog box, select OPSTA3 and click OK.
9 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.
Your finished schematic should resemble the following:
1766 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Editing components
You can go back to a component at any time and make changes. You can
change description, tag, catalog number, location code, terminal numbers,
and rating values using the Edit Component tool.
Insert a child contact
1 Zoom in on the blank ladder rung at line reference 410.
2 Press F9 to turn on SNAP .
3 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Components
drop-down Icon Menu.
4 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Selector
Switches.
5 In the JIC: Selector Switches dialog box, click 2nd+ NC Contact.
6 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point:
Position the selector switch at line reference 410 near the left side of the ladder
and click (1)
Editing components | 1767
7 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, click OK.
Insert a pilot light
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Components
drop-down Icon Menu.
2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Pilot
Lights.
3 In the JIC: Pilot Lights dialog box, click Blue Press to Test.
4 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point:
Position the pilot light at line reference 410 near the neutral wire but exactly
in line with the selector switch and click (2)
5 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, verify:
Component Tag: LT410
6 In the Descriptions section, specify:
Line 1: MAINT
Line 2: MODE
7 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.
Edit a child contact
1 Press F9 to turn off SNAP .
1768 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
2 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Edit Components
drop-down Edit.
NOTE You can also right-click on a component and select Edit Component
from the context menu.
3 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select component/cable/location box to EDIT:
Select the selector switch on line reference 410
4 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, Component Tag section,
click Parent/Sibling.
5 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select component:
Select the bottom sibling contact (3) of the existing switch on line reference 408
Editing components | 1769
AutoCAD Electrical reads the sibling contact and transfers the appropriate
annotation to your new switch contact.
6 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, click OK.
The sibling contact information is displayed on the drawing.
Linking components
In this exercise, you link the selector switch you inserted to the existing RAM
MODE selector switch residing on line reference 406 through 408 using dashed
link lines.
Connect components using wires
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Insert Wires
drop-down Wire.
1770 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify wire start or [wireType/X=show connections]:
Click the wire connection point on the right-hand side of the switch contact (4)
Specify wire end or [Continue]:
Drag the wire to the right and click the wire connection point on the left-hand
side of the blue pilot light (5)
Specify wire start or [Scoot/wireType/X=show connections]:
Click the left-hand side of the switch contact
Specify wire end or [Continue]:
Drag the wire to the left and click the left-hand vertical bus wire
The wire automatically ends on the bus and inserts a wire connection
dot.
3 Repeat the process to connect the right-hand side of the blue pilot light
to the vertical bus wire.
4 Right-click and select Enter to finish creating the wire connections.
If you lay a wire over the top of a series of components, AutoCAD
Electrical automatically breaks and reconnects to the underlying wire
connection points.
Link components
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Dashed Link Line
drop-down Link Components with Dashed Line.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Component to link from:
Click the contact of the switch on line reference 408 (6)
Component to link to:
Linking components | 1771
Click anywhere on your new switch contact (7), right-click
The annotation of the contact is changed to invisible and a dashed link
line is drawn from the bottom of the upper contact to the top of your
new contact.
Your finished schematic should resemble the following:
NOTE The Scoot command is fully compatible with dashed line links. Scooting
one contact left or right causes both links to update automatically. You can
even scoot the horizontal jog in the dashed link line up or down.
Editing catalog information
Sample catalog information is supplied with AutoCAD Electrical. The
information is held in tables in an Access Database file (.mdb) that is populated
with sample vendor data.
You can use filter criteria in the catalog lookup to display catalog numbers
selectively for a component type.
Filter catalog data
1 Right-click LT410 and select Edit Component.
2 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Catalog Data section, click
Lookup.
3 In the Parts Catalog dialog box, select:
Manufacturer: AB
1772 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Type: 30.5mm
Voltage: 120VAC XFMR
4 Change the catalog assignment to 800T-PT16E.
Add a catalog entry
1 In the Parts Catalog dialog box, click Add.
Editing catalog information | 1773
The entries are prefilled with the information for the currently assigned
catalog part number. It is easy to add a new entry with similar
information.
2 In the Add Catalog Record dialog box, specify:
Catalog: BOG-123B
Manufacturer: BOGUS
The catalog lookup works most efficiently when field values that are
meant to be the same are the same in both spelling and capitalization.
The list box beside each field helps you maintain consistency as you add
new catalog items.
3 Click List next to the Description field.
AutoCAD Electrical does a quick scan of the existing catalog file. It collects
and displays a list of all the different description field values found in
the catalog.
4 In the Field Description existing values dialog box, select BLUE PILOT
LIGHT - PRESS TO TEST, NEMA 4/13 and click OK.
5 In the Add Catalog Record dialog box, click List next to the Type, Voltage
and Miscellaneous fields. Select the values shown in the following image
if not already selected.
1774 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
AutoCAD Electrical provides three blank user fields for your own internal
use. Each can be a maximum of 24 characters wide and are extracted into
BOM reports along with all the other fields.
NOTE You can add catalog entries with a subassembly. To link a subassembly
with the main, the catalog part numbers share the same codes. In the Edit
Catalog Record dialog box, select As main->sub, enter the ASSYCODE, and
click OK. The ASSYCODE must be unique since it links the main catalog item
with subassembly items. To add the subassembly item, in the Add Catalog
Record dialog box, create a catalog entry, select As sub, enter an
ASSEMBLYLIST code, and click OK.
6 In the Add Catalog Record dialog box, click OK.
As the new entry is being added to the file, the Part Catalog dialog box
displays.
7 In the Parts Catalog dialog box, select the BOG-123B catalog entry and
click OK.
8 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.
Editing catalog information | 1775
Wire layers
Wire layers - Introduction
Create and modify wire layers.
10 minutes Time required
Copy all files located in Prerequisites:
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Ae-
gs\Wire layers
Windows XP
to
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Wire layers Windows Vista
to
1776 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
You learn to:
Create wire layers
Change wire layer assignments
Creating a wire layer
Create wire layer
1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS
and select Activate.
2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list.
3 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS04.dwg.
4 Click Schematic tab Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel Modify Wire
Type drop-down Create/Edit Wire Type.
The Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box lists all the valid wire layers that
are defined for the active drawing. The wire layer name and the wire
properties like color, size, and user-defined properties are listed in the
grid.
5 Click inside the Wire Color column for a blank row and enter BLU as the
wire color.
6 Click inside the Size column and enter 14AWG as the size.
The Layer Name is automatically created.
7 Click Color in the Layer section. Select blue and click OK.
Creating a wire layer | 1777
NOTE If you want the new wire layer to be the default, click Mark Selected
as Default.
8 Click OK.
Changing a wire layer assignment
When a wire is inserted, the wire ends up on the first valid wire layer as defined
in the Drawing Properties dialog box. It may be more appropriate to place
some wires on different wire layers. You can use the AutoCAD
PROPERTIES
command to move a wire to the correct layer or you can use the Wire Layer
utility.
Change wire layer assignments
1 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the drawing.
2 Click Schematic tab Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel Modify Wire
Type drop-down Change/Convert Wire Type.
The Change/Convert Wire Type dialog box lists all the valid wire layers
that are defined for the active drawing. The wire layer name and the wire
properties like color, size, and user-defined properties are listed in the
grid. An X in the Used column indicates the layer name is currently
being used.
3 Select RED_18AWG.
The wire type highlights in blue in the dialog box indicating that it is
the wire type to change.
4 Click OK.
5 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select Objects:
Window from left to right around the wires as shown and press ENTER
1778 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Before you press ENTER, the wires display as dashed lines to indicate that
they have been selected. Once you press ENTER the lines display in red
indicating that they have been moved to the RED_18AWG wire layer.
6 Repeat to move any other wiring onto another wire layer.
Circuits
Circuits - Introduction
Create circuits with Circuit Builder. Save and insert a saved circuit.
60 minutes Time required
Copy all files located in Prerequisites:
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Ae-
gs\Circuits
Windows XP
to
Circuits | 1779
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Circuits Windows Vista
to
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
You learn to:
Move a circuit
Insert a circuit using Circuit Builder
Save and insert a saved circuit
Insert a saved circuit using WBLOCK
Move an existing circuit
When you move a circuit, most of the parent components contained in the
circuit automatically retag since the drawing is set up for reference-based
component tagging. In the process of moving the circuit, you change the
reference locations of the moved components. Related child components
update to match the new parent tags, including references on other drawings
in the project.
NOTE Tagging updates vary depending on your default tagging configurations.
Move the location of a circuit
1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS
and select Activate.
2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list.
3 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS02.dwg.
4 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the drawing. Make sure the 3-phase
motor circuit at line reference 215 is visible.
1780 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
This circuit has component tags
FU215 on the 3-pole fuse
215CBL on the multi-conductor cable
DS215 on the disconnect switch
MOT216 on the motor
5 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Circuit
drop-down Move Circuit.
6 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select Objects:
Window select the circuit on line reference 215 to capture the connection wire
and dots that tie in to the vertical bus, right-click
Press F9 to turn on SNAP .
Specify base point or displacement:
Select a base point and then select a point on line reference 214
The circuitry is moved, the affected components are retagged, and
cross-references are updated based on the new line reference. Each of the
listed parent component tags decrement by one. For example, fuse FU215
became FU 214.
7 In the Update Related Components dialog box, click Yes-Update.
Move an existing circuit | 1781
Related child references on the active drawing update to match the newly
retagged parent components.
8 In the Update other drawings dialog box, click OK.
Related child components and panel layout references on other drawings
update to match the parent components on the moved circuit.
9 If asked to save the drawing, click OK.
10 Click Project tab Other Tools panel Surfer drop-down Surfer.
11 Select FU214 on the drawing.
The Surf dialog box displays three references on sheet 2 and one reference
on sheet 9.
12 Double-click the reference on Sheet 9.
Surfer goes to the panel layout drawing and zooms in on the physical
representation of this 3-pole fuse. Notice that the physical representation
of the fuse block tag updated because the circuit was moved.
13 Double-click the first entry in the dialog box to return to the original
AEGS02.dwg drawing.
14 Click Close.
Moving the motor circuit up one line reference spacing opened up a bit more
room to add a new circuit below it. The next step is to extend the 3-phase bus
down to line reference 218 and over to the right to begin building a new motor
circuit.
1782 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Extending the 3-phase bus
1 Click Schematic tab Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel Trim Wire.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Fence/Crossing/Zext/<Select wire to TRIM>:
Click the bottom ends of the three dangling wires, right-click
You can insert vertical or horizontal 3-phase wiring. Three-phase wiring
automatically breaks and reconnects to any underlying components that
it finds in its path. If it crosses any existing wiring, wire-crossing gaps are
inserted.
3 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Multiple
Bus.
4 In the Multiple Wire Bus dialog box, select:
Horizontal Spacing: 0.5
Vertical Spacing: 0.5
Starting at: Another Bus (Multiple Wires)
Number of Wires: 3
Move an existing circuit | 1783
5 Click OK.
6 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select existing wire to begin multi-phase bus connection:
Select the bottom corner of the left-most vertical bus on line reference 214 as
shown
Select existing wire to begin multi-phase bus connection: to
Pull the cursor down to line reference 218.
Temporary graphics show the proposed routing of the extended bus.
7 Click to create the wires.
8 Right-click to exit the command.
1784 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
The 3-phase bus and wire connection dot symbols are inserted on the
drawing.
Insert and configure a circuit
You now construct a new motor circuit on the extended 3-phase bus.
Insert and configure the circuit
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Circuit Builder
drop-down Circuit Builder.
2 The Circuit Selection dialog box displays.
Insert and configure a circuit | 1785
3 Expand 3ph Motor Circuit.
4 Select Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
5 Change the Rung Spacing: Horizontal to 0.5.
6 Select Configure.
7 Specify insertion point at rung 217.
1786 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Circuit Configuration
A circuit is made up of individual circuit elements and the wiring that connects
them. Circuit Builder inserts a template drawing. This template contains the
base wiring for the circuit and strategically positioned marker blocks.
The marker blocks control what circuit elements are presented in the Circuit
Configuration dialog box. For example, a marker block indicates the need
for a Disconnecting Means in the circuit. Various options for the Disconnecting
Means are presented in the dialog box. The option selected for this circuit
element is inserted at the location of the marker block. Circuit Builder
dynamically builds the complete circuit based on the selections you make on
this dialog box.
1 In the Circuit Elements section, select Motor symbol.
In the Select section, select Motor: 3ph motor,
Ground/PE wire connection: No.
2 In the Circuit Elements section, select Disconnecting Means.
In the Select section, select Main Disconnect: Fuses,
Include N.O. auxiliary contact: No.
Insert and configure a circuit | 1787
Setup & Annotation section: The options within this section change
according to your selections in the Circuit Elements and Select sections.
Type in values or select the Browse button to access a lookup table.
Select an entry from the lookup table to obtain values for the individual
settings. The catalog lookup is opened if the circuit option is a component.
3 In the Circuit Elements section, select Control transformer and circuit -
non-reversing.
In the Select section, select Include control circuit: None.
1788 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
4 In the Circuit Elements section, select Power Factor correction.
In the Select section, select Include power factor correction capacitor:
None.
Insert and configure a circuit | 1789
5 In the Circuit Elements section, select Overloads.
In the Select section, select Overload elements: Thermal,
Include N.O. auxiliary contact: No.
6 In the Circuit Elements section, select Motor terminal connections.
In the Select section, select Motor connection terminals: Round.
1790 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
7 In the Circuit Elements section, select Cable marker.
In the Select section, select Cable: None.
Insert and configure a circuit | 1791
8 In the Circuit Elements section, select Safety disconnect at the load.
In the Select section, select Safety disconnect: Disconnect switch,
Include N.O. auxiliary contact: No.
9 Select the Insert all circuit elements tool. Circuit Builder inserts each of
the selected circuit elements.
10 Select Done.
NOTE See the Circuit Builder topics later in this section for more examples.
1792 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Save and insert a circuit
AutoCAD
WBlock
command to save selected circuitry to disk and an Insert Circuit command to
insert WBlocked circuits into the active drawing.
Save your circuit for use in the future
1 Zoom around the circuit so that it fills your screen.
2 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Circuit
drop-down Save Circuit To Icon Menu.
3 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box, click Add New circuit.
4 On the Create New Circuit dialog box, specify:
Name: Motor Circ - Fusible DS
Image file: Active and Create PNG from current screen image
File name: UserCirc1
5 Click OK.
6 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Base point:
Save and insert a circuit | 1793
Select the left-most wire connection point where the circuit ties into the left-hand
vertical bus wire
Select objects:
Window around the circuit from left to right to capture all the components and
wiring, but exclude the vertical bus, press ENTER
7 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box, click OK.
The circuit is saved to your AutoCAD Electrical user folder and can be
quickly accessed from the Insert Component icon menu or from the
Insert Saved Circuit tool.
The new motor has a 3-pole motor contactor child reference but there is not
a parent motor starter relay coil to operate it. The motor start coil circuit must
be added on a control schematic in the project drawing set and linked back
to the new motor circuit.
Insert motor start coil circuit to control schematic
1 Open AEGS04.dwg.
2 Zoom on the upper-right hand ladder column so the full circuit on line
reference 422-423 is displayed.
3 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Circuit
drop-down Save Circuit To Icon Menu.
1794 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
4 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box, click Add New circuit.
5 On the Create New Circuit dialog box, specify:
Name: Motor starter circ
Image file: Active and Create PNG from current screen image
File name: UserCirc2
Click OK.
6 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Base point: Select the left-most wire connection point at line reference 422
Select objects:
Window around the circuit from left to right to capture all the components and
wiring, but exclude the vertical bus, press ENTER
7 On the Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog box, click OK.
Insert a circuit you saved for re-use
1 Pan to display the blank area between line references 426 - 432.
2 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Circuit
drop-down Insert Saved Circuit.
3 In the JIC: Saved User Circuits dialog box, select the Motor starter circ
button.
4 In the Circuit Scale dialog box, click OK.
Save and insert a circuit | 1795
5 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point:
Place the circuit insertion point on the vertical bus wire at line reference 427,
left-click to insert the circuit.
The circuit inserts and updates. Tags automatically update to reflect the
new line reference number, and parent/child relationships defined inside
of the circuit update accordingly.
6 Right-click the M427 coil symbol and select Edit Component.
7 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify:
Description Line 2: MOTOR NO. 2
Click OK.
8 In the Update Related Components dialog box, click Yes-Update.
Linking the parent coil to the child contactor
1 Open AEGS02.dwg and zoom on the untagged 3-pole motor
contact/overloads on line reference 217.
2 Right-click the M contact and select Edit Component.
The Insert/Edit Child Component is displayed. Enter the exact parent
coil tag into the Component Tag box to establish the link between the
parent and the child contacts. Currently the Component Tag is M.
3 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, Component Tag section,
click Project.
4 In the Complete Project list for Family=M dialog box, select M427
HYDRAULIC MOTOR NO. 2 and click OK.
1796 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
The tag M427 is now displayed in the Component Tag edit box. Notice
that the description, cross-reference, and location code boxes have also
updated.
5 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, click OK.
6 In the Update linked components dialog box, click OK.
The components are now linked. If you go back to drawing AEGS04.dwg
and look at the motor starter coil, it shows references to these three child
contacts (plus one seal contact around PB427).
Using the icon menu to add a motor
1 Reopen drawing AEGS04.dwg and zoom to the blank area at line references
430-431.
2 Repeat the steps for inserting the saved Motor starter circ circuit.
3 In the Circuit Scale dialog box, click OK.
4 Insert the circuit at line reference 430.
5 Right-click the M430 coil symbol, and select Edit Component.
Save and insert a circuit | 1797
6 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify:
Description Line 2: MOTOR NO. 3
Click OK.
7 In the Update related components dialog box, click Yes-Update.
8 Open drawing AEGS02.dwg and zoom to the blank area at line references
204-206.
9 Repeat the steps for inserting a saved circuit, but this time insert the
Motor Circ - Fusible DS circuit.
10 In the Circuit Scale dialog box, click OK.
11 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point:
Position the motor circuit so that the insertion point lands on the left-hand
vertical bus at line reference 204, left-click to insert the circuit.
Notice that the fuse, disconnect, and motor automatically retag based
on their reference locations.
12 Right-click the M child motor contact symbol, and select Edit Component.
13 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, Component Tag section,
click Project.
14 In the Complete Project list for Family=M dialog box, select M430
HYDRAULIC MOTOR NO. 3 and click OK.
The tag M430 is now displayed in the Component Tag edit box. Notice
that the description, cross-reference, and location code boxes have also
updated.
15 In the Insert/Edit Child Component dialog box, click OK.
16 In the Update linked components dialog box, click OK.
1798 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Insert a saved circuit using WBlock
Another method for saving and inserting circuits is to use the AutoCAD WBlock
command to save the circuit to disk. A separate Insert Circuit command is
used to browse to a selected saved circuit and insert it into the active drawing.
This method allows unlimited circuits to be constructed and saved to disk.
They can be arranged into a set of shared subfolders for easy browsing and
retrieval using the Insert Circuit command.
Saving a circuit using WBlock
1 Pan to display the 3-phase motor circuit at line references 207 - 209.
2 Enter wblock at the command line and press ENTER.
3 In the Write Block dialog box, click Pick point.
4 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion base point:
Select the intersection of the left vertical bus with the upper horizontal wire at
line reference 207
5 In the Write Block dialog box, click Select objects.
6 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select objects: Window from left to right around the full circuit, right-click
Insert a saved circuit using WBlock | 1799
7 In the Write Block dialog box, enter a name for the saved circuit. Take
note of the location where the drawing file is being saved.
8 Click OK.
Inserting a WBlocked circuit
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Circuit
drop-down Insert WBlocked Circuit.
2 In the Insert Wblocked Circuit dialog box, browse to the folder containing
the circuit you saved.
3 Select the WBlocked motor circuit, and click Open.
4 In the Circuit Scale dialog box, select:
Move all lines to wire layers
Keep all source arrows
Update circuits text layers as required
Click OK.
5 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point: Select any blank spot on your drawing
The parent component tags that are not set to Fixed automatically retag
based on the insertion point. It is like the behavior when inserting a
circuit using the icon menu method.
6 Delete the circuit.
1800 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Insert a one-line motor control circuit
In this exercise, you insert and configure a one-line motor control circuit using
Circuit Builder.
In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click One-Line.dwg.
One-Line.dwg contains a one-line bus. This wire is drawn on a wire layer
defined as No Wire Numbering. Such a wire layer behaves normally for
inserting, breaking, and scooting components. These wires also show up
in the from/to report. Wire numbers are not placed on these wires during
the Insert Wire Numbers process.
Insert the one-line circuit
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Circuit Builder
drop-down Circuit Builder.
The Circuit Selection dialog box displays.
2 Expand One-line Motor Circuit.
3 Select Vertical - FVNR - non reversing.
4 Click Configure.
5 Specify an insertion point on the one-line bus.
Insert a one-line motor control circuit | 1801
The Circuit Configuration dialog box displays.
6 In the Circuit Elements section, select Motor Setup.
1802 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
7 In the Setup & Annotations: Motor Setup section, select the Browse
button.
The Motor Table Not Found dialog box displays. The sample project is
set up to use the NEC standard. However, a MOTOR_NEC table is not
supplied, only a default MOTOR table.
8 Select Use default table.
The Select Motor dialog box displays.
9 Select Type: Induction, Voltage (V): 480, and Frequency (HZ): 60.
10 Select the row that shows Load: 15, Units: HP, Phase: 3, Speed (RPM):
3600, FLA (A) 18.6.
NOTE The values used to populate this dialog box are defined in the MOTOR*
tables in the electrical standards database file, ace_electrical_standards.mdb.
11 Click OK.
The values are entered in the Motor Setup section. A default wire size,
based on the load for the motor, is selected and shown in the Wire Setup
section.
12 In the Setup & Annotations: Wire Setup section, select the Browse
button.
The Wire Size Lookup dialog box displays. The minimum wire size is
preselected. The size is based on the load for the selected motor.
NOTE When Show all is on, wires where the %Ampacity value is greater than
100% and less than 300%, are shown in red.
The values in the Load section are populated with the values from the
Motor Setup. The options available within this dialog box are defined in
the electrical standards database file, ace_electrical_standards.mdb.
13 In the Wire section, select Wire standard: AWG, Type/method: CU,
Insulation: THWN / 75C.
14 In the De-rating factors section, select the Ambient temperature correction
option.
Insert a one-line motor control circuit | 1803
This option directs Circuit Builder to use a de-rating factor for an elevated
ambient temperature. These values are defined in the electrical standards
database file.
15 Select 36~40C from the drop-down list.
The de-rating factor is extracted from the electrical standards database
file and entered in the dialog box. The wire size grid is adjusted based on
the new total de-rating factor. Based on this de-rating factor the minimum
wire size can change.
16 Select the Run distance option.
This option directs Circuit Builder to consider the length of the wire run
in the voltage drop calculation. Additional columns display in the wire
selection grid showing Voltage drop, wire KW loss, and wire loss cost
estimate.
17 Select 200 from the drop-down list.
Circuit Builder displays parallel energy loss calculations to allow you to
make better green design decisions. For example, you can oversize the
conductors for a motor to reduce conductor heating losses. It results in
a higher initial cost, material, and installation labor, which is recovered
many times over in reduced energy losses in the wiring during the life of
the motor.
18 Select a wire size in the grid based on the values shown.
19 Select a Grounding conductor size. The minimum size is preselected based
on the load of the motor.
20 Click OK.
21 Select Circuit Elements: Motor Symbol.
22 In the Setup & Annotations: Motor section, select the Browse
button.
The Parts catalog dialog box displays.
23 Select a catalog value and click OK.
NOTE Circuit Builder does not preselect the catalog based on the parameters
entered previously.
24 Continue selecting Circuit Elements:
1804 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Disconnecting means: Disconnect switch and fuses
Motor starter: Yes
Power factor correction: No
Overloads: None
Terminal strip or connector: None
Cable marker: Yes
Safety disconnect at the load: None
25 Click to insert all circuit elements.
26 Click Done.
27 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Edit Components
drop-down Edit.
Insert a one-line motor control circuit | 1805
28 Select the motor symbol.
29 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, enter FIELD for the Location
code and MY MOTOR for Description Line 1.
30 Save the drawing.
Insert a one-line dual power feed circuit
In this part of the exercise, you insert a dual power feed circuit. A dual circuit
has two distinct circuits running off the same bus-tap. Each circuit can be
independently configured.
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Circuit Builder
drop-down Circuit Builder.
2 The Circuit Selection dialog box displays.
3 Select One-line Power Feed: Vertical - Dual feed.
4 Click Configure.
5 Specify an insertion point on the one-line bus.
1806 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
The Circuit Configuration dialog box displays. Notice that some circuit
elements have a (2) prefix. These elements make up the second circuit
in the dual circuit.
6 In the Circuit Elements section, select Load Setup.
7 In the Setup & Annotations: Load Setup section, select the Browse
button.
The Select Load dialog box displays.
8 Select Type: Transformer, Voltage (V): 480, and Phase: 3.
9 Select an entry from the grid and click OK.
10 Continue selecting Circuit Elements for the first circuit:
Load: Generic box
Disconnecting means: None
Terminal strip or connector: Square
Cable marker: None
11 In the Circuit Elements section, select (2) Load Setup.
Insert a one-line dual power feed circuit | 1807
12 In the Setup & Annotations: Load Setup section, select the Browse
button.
The Select Load dialog box displays.
13 Select Type: Transformer, Voltage (V): 480, and Phase: 3.
14 Select an entry from the grid and click OK.
15 Continue selecting Circuit Elements for the second circuit:
(2) Load: Source arrow
(2) Disconnecting means: Disconnect switch and fuses
(2) Terminal strip or connector: None
(2) Cable marker: None
16 Click to insert all circuit elements.
17 Click Done.
1808 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
18 Save the drawing.
Reference an existing circuit
When a new circuit is inserted, you can reference an existing circuit picked
from a list of circuits pulled from the active project. The components, values,
descriptions, and tag assignments from the selected circuit, become defaults
for the new circuit. Tags are recalculated if the option Retag new components
is selected.
In this exercise, you insert a 3-phase motor control circuit referencing the
one-line motor control circuit inserted earlier.
1 Start a new blank drawing and save it as Three-Line.dwg.
2 In Project Manager, right-click on the project name and select Add Active
Drawing.
Reference an existing circuit | 1809
3 Click Yes to apply the project default values to the drawing settings.
4 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Insert Ladder
drop-down Insert Ladder.
5 Insert a 3-phase ladder.
6 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Circuit Builder
drop-down Circuit Builder.
7 The Circuit Selection dialog box displays.
8 Select 3ph Motor Circuit: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
9 Select Reference Existing Circuit.
10 Select the List button.
The Existing Circuits dialog box displays.
11 Select the one-line motor control circuit inserted on One-Line.dwg, MOT1.
12 Click OK.
The default circuit element options are controlled by both the CODE
value and the UI_VAL from the circuit codes sheet of the circuit builder
spreadsheet. For example, the one-line circuit used the Disconnect switch
and fuses option with a UI_VAL of 4. When the 3-phase circuit
references this one-line circuit, the disconnecting means option with a
UI_VAL of 4 becomes the default. If a matching UI_VAL is not found
for a particular marker block CODE value, the default as defined by the
X in the UI_DEF column is used.
When the new circuit is built, component values from the referenced
circuit are applied to components in the new circuit only if the marker
block on page 709 code matches.
13 Turn off the Retag new components check box.
1810 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
It directs Circuit Builder to use the tags from the one-line circuit for the
components with matching marker block code values.
14 Select Configure.
15 Select an insertion point on the bus for the new circuit.
16 Verify that the same circuit elements as the referenced one-line motor
circuit are selected. The default options are based on the referenced circuit.
Select Circuit Elements
Motor: 3ph motor Motor symbol
Ground/PE wire connection: No
Main Disconnect: Disconnect switch and Fuses Disconnecting means
Include N.O. Auxiliary contact: No
Include control circuit: None Control transformer and circuit - non-re-
versing
Reference an existing circuit | 1811
Select Circuit Elements
Include power factor correction capacitor: None Power Factor correction
Overload elements: None Overloads
Include N.O. auxiliary contact: No
Motor connection terminals: None Motor terminal connections
Cable: Yes Cable marker
Safety disconnect: None Safety disconnect at the load
Include N.O. auxiliary contact: No
17 Click to insert all circuit elements.
18 Click Done.
The circuit is inserted and the component values from the one-line circuit are
applied. The motor symbol receives the same catalog value and horsepower
rating. The main disconnect switch receives the same rating values for the
switch and the fuses. The motor symbol receives the values modified on the
one-line circuit after it was inserted.
1812 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Surf
Surf - Introduction
Move between related components with Surfer.
10 minutes Time required
Copy all files located in Prerequisites:
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Ae-
gs\Surf
Windows XP
to
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Surf Windows Vista
to
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
You learn to:
Use the Surfer tool
Moving between symbols
Use the AutoCAD Electrical Surf utility to move from component reference
to reference across the project drawing set quickly.
1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS
and select Activate.
Surf | 1813
2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list.
3 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS04.dwg.
4 Zoom on the upper left-hand portion of the first ladder column.
5 Click Projects tab Other Tools panel Surfer drop-down Surfer.
6 Click anywhere on relay coil CR407.
All instances of CR407 appear in the Surf dialog box.
7 Select the reference on sheet 6.
8 Click Go To.
The instance of CR407 on sheet 6 is surfed to and displayed in the drawing
next to the Surf dialog box.
1814 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
9 Select the reference on sheet 9.
10 Click Go To.
You can edit or delete the component using options in the Surf dialog
box.
11 Double-click the first entry in the Surf dialog box to return to the original
AEGS04.dwg drawing.
12 Click Close.
NOTE Drawing files are saved while surfing if AutoCAD Electrical senses that
a change has been made to the drawing.
Moving between symbols | 1815
Block swap
Block swap - Introduction
Swap components while maintaining wire connections with Swap/Update
Block.
10 minutes Time required
Copy all files located in Prerequisites:
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Ae-
gs\Block swap
Windows XP
to
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Block swap Windows Vista
to
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
You learn to:
Use the Block Swap tool
1816 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Swapping components
Use the Swap Block tool to swap one component for another (such as swapping
a proximity switch with a limit switch) in a single drawing or project-wide.
Swap switches while keeping wire connections
1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS
and select Activate.
2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list.
3 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS04.dwg.
4 Zoom in on the limit switch on line reference 406.
5 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Swap/Update Block.
6 In the Swap Block/ Update Block/ Library Swap dialog box, specify:
Option A: Swap a Block - drawing wide
Pick new block from icon menu
Retain old block scale
Auto re tag if parent swap causes FAMILY change
Attribute Mapping: Use Same Attribute Names (default)
Click OK.
7 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click
Miscellaneous Switches.
Swapping components | 1817
8 In the JIC: Other Switch Types dialog box, click Proximity Switch NO.
9 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select component type to swap out: Select the limit switch, LS406
The limit switch symbol disappears and the proximity switch symbol
inserts. All existing text annotation transfers to the new symbols and the
wires reconnect.
PLC
PLC - Introduction
Insert PLC modules and connected devices.
30 minutes Time required
Copy all files located in Prerequisites:
1818 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Ae-
gs\PLC
Windows XP
to
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\PLC Windows Vista
to
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
You learn to:
Understand PLC parametric build
Insert a PLC module
Remove ladder rungs
Use multiple insert component
Annotate PLC I/O descriptions
Inserting PLC modules
AutoCAD Electrical generates any of hundreds of different PLC I/O modules
on demand, in various different graphical styles, all without a single, complete
I/O module library symbol resident on the system. Modules adapt to the
underlying ladder rung spacing, whatever that value might be. They can be
stretched or broken into two or more pieces at insertion time.
To insert a PLC module, you select the module and pick a location. AutoCAD
Electrical builds and inserts the module, using a small set of library symbols.
Insert a PLC module
1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS
and select Activate.
2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list.
3 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS05.dwg.
Inserting PLC modules | 1819
4 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert PLC
drop-down Insert PLC (Parametric).
5 In the PLC Parametric Selection dialog box, select:
Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley
Series: 1746
Type: Discrete Input
Part Number: 1746-IA16
Graphics Style: 2, Vertical Module
6 Click OK.
7 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify PLC module insertion point or [Z=zoom, P=pan]:
Pick a point on wire line reference 520 closer to the right side, ensure the X is
near the horizontal wire, click
1820 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
8 In the Module Layout dialog box, verify the default settings:
Spacing: 1.0000
I/O Points: Insert all
Click OK.
AutoCAD Electrical reads the vertical rung spacing of your ladder and
calculates how long the module is going to be. It multiplies the rung
spacing by the number of wire connections specified by the module you
selected.
Temporary graphics display a representation of the module (with the
spacing defined) to help position the module on the ladder.
9 In the I/O Point dialog box, specify:
Rack Number: 1
Slot Number: 1
NOTE Specify the values by either entering text into the edit boxes or by
clicking the arrows.
10 Click OK.
11 In the I/O Address dialog box, specify:
Beginning address: I:11/00
Inserting PLC modules | 1821
NOTE You can also select the beginning address from the Quick picks list.
12 Click OK.
13 In the I/O Addressing dialog box, click Decimal.
The PLC module is inserted into your drawing with incremental address
numbers already annotated as the module goes in, it breaks and
reconnects to underlying wires.
You can break an I/O module into as many pieces as you want at insertion
time. It is great for high-density modules that do not fit into a single
ladder column. Use the Allow spacers/breakers option in the Module
Layout dialog box at insertion time to do it.
You can also add extra space between adjacent I/O points using the Stretch
Block tool. This feature leaves extra room when you know ahead of time
that a certain I/O point will have additional components wired tied to a
single I/O point after a PLC module is inserted.
NOTE It can be used on any block, not just a PLC module.
1822 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Remove ladder rungs
1 Click Schematic tab Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel Trim Wire.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Fence/Crossing/Zext/<Select wire to TRIM>:
Select the ladder rung at line reference 519, right-click
The ladder rung is removed from your drawing.
Using multiple insert component
You can insert components into wires that are tied to the PLC module. Use
the Multiple Insert Component tool to insert a string of normally open limit
switches.
Insert a limit switch
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Multiple Insert
drop-down Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).
2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click Limit
Switches.
3 In the JIC: Limit Switches dialog box, select Limit Switch, NO.
Using multiple insert component | 1823
4 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Component Fence, From Point:
Select above the wire at line reference 520 (1)
Component Fence, From Point: to:
Drag below the wire at line reference 522, click the point (2), right-click
5 In the Keep dialog box, select:
Keep this one
Show edit dialog box after each
Click OK
6 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify:
Component Tag: LS520
Description: Line 1: PALLET ENTERING
Description: Line 2: STATION
Location code: MACHINE
Click OK.
NOTE In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Component Tag section,
you can use the Use PLC Address button to add the I/O Address as the
component tag.
7 In the Keep dialog box, select:
Keep this one
Show edit dialog box after each
Click OK
8 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify:
Component Tag: LS521
Description: Line 1: PALLET INSIDE
Description: Line 2: STATION
1824 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Location code: MACHINE
Click OK.
9 In the Keep dialog box, select:
Keep this one
Show edit dialog box after each
Click OK
10 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, specify:
Component Tag: LS522
Description: Line 1: PALLET LEAVING
Description: Line 2: STATION
Location code: MACHINE
Click OK.
The normally open limit switches are inserted into the drawing.
Annotating PLC I/O descriptions
You can add description text to a PLC module using the Edit Component tool.
You can change the descriptions at any time. However, edit each split PLC
piece separately.
Add description text
1 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Edit Components
drop-down Edit.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select component/cable/location box to EDIT:
Annotating PLC I/O descriptions | 1825
Select anywhere on the top portion of the PLC module
The Edit PLC Module dialog box displays.
This dialog box provides spaces for you to enter description text for each
I/O point. Assume that the descriptions already assigned to the connected
limit switches are like what you want to use for the PLC I/O point
descriptions.
3 In the Edit PLC Module dialog box, click Wired Devices.
AutoCAD Electrical immediately follows each I/O points connected wire
backwards. If it finds a connected component, the component description
text is retrieved. Each description is displayed in a dialog box list.
4 For the first I/O address (I:11/00), select the first description (PALLET
ENTERING STATION) in the extracted device list.
The Confirmation dialog box displays.
5 Make sure that the correct description is specified and click OK.
1826 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
6 Click Next to highlight I/O address 1:11/01 in the Addressing list.
The corresponding device description highlights automatically.
7 Select the highlighted description, PALLET INSIDE STATION, and click
OK.
8 Repeat this process for the remaining I/O point.
NOTE Alternately you can use Pick to capture existing description text from
a connected device. To do so, in the Edit PLC Module dialog box, click Pick,
and then select the component whose text you want to copy. AutoCAD
Electrical reads the existing DESC text values on the component and transfers
a copy to the DESC boxes in the Edit PLC Module dialog box.
9 In the Edit PLC Module dialog box, click OK.
Your descriptions appear on the module.
NOTE If your PLC description is not where you want it, use the Scoot tool
to scoot the description to a new location.
Schematic terminals
Schematic terminals - Introduction
Insert and modify schematic terminals. Define multi-level schematic terminals.
45 minutes Time required
Schematic terminals | 1827
Copy all files located in Prerequisites:
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Ae-
gs\Schematic terminals
Windows XP
to
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Schematic terminals Windows Vista
to
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
You learn to:
Understand terminal relationships
Insert terminals
Assign terminal block properties
Define a multi-level terminal
Associate terminals
About schematic terminals
AutoCAD Electrical supports two types of relationships for terminals:
schematic-to-schematic and schematic-to-panel.
NOTE Since one-line terminal symbols will likely represent multiple, independent
terminals, they cannot be associated to other schematic or panel terminals. A
one-line terminal must be updated manually. A one-line terminal symbol is defined
by a WDTYPE attribute on page 335 value of 1-.
Schematic-to-Schematic
The schematic-to-schematic relationship defines separate schematic terminal
symbols as one multi-level (also referred to as multi-tier or multi-stack) terminal
block. On the schematic drawing, each schematic terminal symbol represents
one level of the multi-level terminal block.
NOTE Multiple terminal symbols for one level are not currently supported.
1828 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
The number of levels for the block is defined as a block property. Each level
carries certain characteristics, such as a label, wires per connection, left pin,
and right pin. Each schematic terminal symbol carries all of the block properties
for each level so that removing one terminal symbol does not remove the
block properties. If a block property is modified, all of the terminal symbols
update.
The terminal symbols are associated by an ID value held on the LINKTERM
attribute or xdata. When a terminal symbol is inserted, by default it is seen
as a standalone terminal (it has no associations) and receives a new LINKTERM
value. When the terminal is associated to another, the LINKTERM value
updates so that each terminal carries the same LINKTERM value. Changing
or removing the LINKTERM value breaks any associations that terminal may
have.
To associate schematic terminals, first add block properties. The number of
terminals you can associate is limited to the number of levels defined in the
block properties. Once block properties are established you can associate
schematic terminals to build a multi-level terminal block by:
Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Associate
Terminals.
You select a master terminal and then select each terminal symbol to
associate to the master.
Clicking Pick on the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box. It adds the
edited symbol into an association with the picked terminal.
Clicking Add/Modify on the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box. It
adds the edited symbol into an association with any schematic terminal
in the project.
Prebuilt circuits may contain associated terminals. These relationships are
maintained when the circuit is inserted. Copying a circuit also maintains these
relationships within the copied circuit.
When the Bill of Materials report is run, these separate terminal symbols that
make up one multi-level terminal, are counted as one in the quantity.
About schematic terminals | 1829
Schematic-to-Panel
The schematic-to-panel relationship is used mainly for updating. If the
schematic or panel is modified, the other updates to reflect the changes. This
relationship is like component relationships, which are based on the TAG
value. The TAGSTRIP, Installation, and Location values must match for the
terminals to associate together and the association number on the LINKTERM
is also taken into account when creating a relationship between the schematic
terminal and its panel representation. Block properties are not required to
associate a schematic to panel terminal. Once they are associated, modifications
on one results in modifications on the other.
You can associate a schematic and panel terminal automatically by:
Click Panel tab Terminal Footprints panel Insert
Terminals drop-down Insert Terminal (Schematic List).
Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Components
drop-down Terminal (Panel List).
For multi-level terminals, the Insert Terminal (Schematic List) tool shows only
one terminal for insertion regardless of how many schematic terminal
symbols/levels there are for that multi-level block. The Insert Terminal (Panel
List) tool shows one terminal for each level for insertion.
NOTE Panel terminals inserted by the Terminal Strip Editor are automatically
associated to the schematic representation.
Additionally, you can click the Associate terminals on page 1098 tool to select
terminals to associate or click Add/Modify on the Panel Layout - Terminal
Insert/Edit dialog box to add the panel terminal to an association with a
schematic terminal on any drawing in the project.
1830 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Insert terminals
Insert terminals
1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS
and select Activate.
2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list.
3 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS05.dwg.
4 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Multiple Insert
drop-down Multiple Insert (Icon Menu).
5 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, click
Terminals/Connectors.
6 In the JIC: Terminals and Connectors dialog box, click Round with
Terminal Number.
7 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Component Fence, From Point: Select above wire at line reference 520 (1)
Component Fence, From Point: to:
Select below wire at line reference 535 (2), left click to end command, right-click
to add terminal
Insert terminals | 1831
8 In the Keep dialog box, select Keep this one.
Click OK.
9 In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Terminal section, specify:
Location: MCAB5
Tag Strip: TS1
Number: 1
1832 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
10 Click OK.
11 In the Keep dialog box, select:
Keep all, dont ask
Clear Show edit dialog box after each
Click OK
The terminals are automatically added to your drawing.
Insert terminals | 1833
Multi-level terminals
Multi-level terminals
1 In the Project Manager, Project Drawing List, double-click AEGS02.dwg.
2 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Edit Components
drop-down Edit.
3 Select the round terminal on rung 217. The Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol
dialog box displays, where you can annotate the terminal properties and
associations.
4 In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Project List section, select
Tag Strip TB.
5 Enter Location: MCAB5 and Number: 10.
1834 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
6 Click Details >>.
7 In the Catalog Data section, click Catalog Lookup.
8 On the Parts Catalog dialog box, select:
Manufacturer: SIEMENS
Type: MULTI-LEVEL
Rating: 20 AMPS
9 Select part 8WA1 011-3JF16 and click OK.
The Manufacturer and Catalog information for the selected part displays
in the Catalog Data section of the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog
box.
10 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click OK.
11 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Edit Components
drop-down Edit.
12 Select the middle terminal between rungs 217 and 218. The Insert/Edit
Terminal Symbol dialog box displays.
13 In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Project List section, select
Tag Strip TB.
Multi-level terminals | 1835
14 Enter Location: MCAB5 and Number: 11.
Modify multi-level associations
Modify multi-level terminal associations
1 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Modify
Properties/Associations section, click Add/Modify.
2 On the Add/Modify Association dialog box, Select Association section,
expand the active project node. The active node is bold in the list.
3 Select the terminal block node you inserted on line reference 217 (10, ,
(3)).
The terminal numbers defined on the block are listed, separated by
commas. The number of levels defined in the block properties displays
at the end of the node string in parenthesis. For example, 1,21,GND (3).
If a level is not represented on the schematic, it is represented by empty
space: 1, , GND (3). If a terminal has been assigned to the level, but the
terminal does not have a number assignment, it is represented by ???:
1,???,GND (3).
1836 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
NOTE The grid to the right populates with the definition for the selected
terminal: Level 1 has Label = TOP, Number = 10, Reference = 2,217.
4 Select Level 2 in the grid and click Associate.
Once you click Associate, the middle level updates with the terminal
number in the grid in the Active Association section of the dialog box.
5 Click OK.
The level assignments display in the Properties/Associations section of
the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box. Notice that the terminal is
three levels and levels 1 and 2 are now assigned.
6 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click OK.
Modify multi-level associations | 1837
7 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Edit Components
drop-down Edit.
8 Select the bottom terminal on rung 218. The Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol
dialog box displays.
9 In the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Project List section, select
Tag Strip TB.
10 Enter Location: MCAB5 and Number: 12.
11 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Modify
Properties/Associations section, click Add/Modify.
12 On the Add/Modify Association dialog box, Select Association section,
expand the active project node.
13 Select the terminal block node you inserted on line reference 217 (10,11,
(3)). Notice that the node properties updated to reflect that levels 1 and
2 are assigned and that level 3 is still blank/available.
14 Select Level 3 in the grid and click Associate.
Once you click Associate, the bottom level updates with the terminal
number in the grid in the Active Association section of the dialog box.
You can rearrange the levels by selecting a level and clicking Move Up
or Move Down.
1838 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
15 Click OK.
The level assignments display in the Properties/Associations section of
the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box. Notice that levels 1, 2, and
3 are now assigned.
16 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click OK.
Terminal Properties
You can modify an existing terminal to make it a multi-level terminal block
and then associate terminals to the master terminal block.
Modify terminal properties
1 Right-click terminal 4 on line reference 211 and select Edit Component.
2 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Catalog Data section,
delete the Manufacturer and Catalog information.
Terminal Properties | 1839
3 In the Modify Properties/Associations section, click Block Properties.
4 On the Terminal Block Properties dialog box, specify:
Levels: 3
Level 1
Level Description: Top
Wires Per Connection: 2
PinL: 1
PinR: 2
Level 2
Level Description: Middle
Wires Per Connection: 2
PinL: 3
PinR: 4
Level 3
Level Description: Bottom
Wires Per Connection: 2
PinL: 5
PinR: 6
Click OK.
Notice on the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box,
Properties/Associations section that the block now has three levels.
Terminal 4 is assigned to the top level of the block.
1840 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
5 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click OK.
6 On the Update other drawings dialog box, click OK.
7 If asked to save the drawing, click OK.
Associate terminals
Associate terminals
1 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Associate
Terminals.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select Master terminal: Select terminal 4 on line reference 211
Pick terminal: Select terminal 5
Pick terminal: Select terminal 6, right-click
NOTE The command prompt area indicates that the terminal was added as
level 02 or level 03 once you pick the terminal.
Associate terminals | 1841
3 Right-click terminal 6 and select Edit Component.
On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Properties/Associations
section, all three levels have been assigned. You can now move a terminal
to another level using the Add/Modify Association dialog box.
4 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, Modify
Properties/Associations section, click Add/Modify.
5 On the Add/Modify Association dialog box, Active Association section,
highlight level 3 in the grid and click Move Up.
The grid updates to reflect the move. Notice that terminal 6 is now
assigned to level 2.
6 Click OK.
7 On the Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box, click OK.
8 If asked to update related components, click Yes-Update.
1842 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
NOTE If the terminals are not all on the same drawing you can associate them
using the Add/Modify Association dialog box.
Wire numbers
Wire numbers - Introduction
Insert wire numbers and signal arrows.
45 minutes Time required
Copy all files located in Prerequisites:
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Ae-
gs\Wire numbers
Windows XP
to
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Wire numbers Windows Vista
to
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
You learn to:
Understand wire numbers
Insert wire numbers
Wire numbers | 1843
Insert I/O based wire numbers
Delete wire numbers
Understand signal arrows
Insert a source arrow
Insert a destination arrow
About wire numbers
Wire numbers can be assigned to any existing wires on an individual selection,
an entire drawing, selected drawings in a project, or an entire project.
AutoCAD
Access
format.
Export the BOM to an Excel
spreadsheet
1 In the Report Generator dialog box, click Save to File.
2 In the Save Report to File dialog box, select Excel spreadsheet format (.xls)
and click OK.
3 In the Select file for report dialog box, enter an output file name or click
OK to accept the default name BOM.xls. Click Save.
4 In the Optional Script File dialog box, click Close - No Script.
5 In Excel, click File Open.
6 Browse to the location where you saved the spreadsheet. The default is
C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents or
C:\Users\{username}\My Documents on a Windows Vista installation.
Select the spreadsheet.
7 Click Open.
Your BOM data is displayed in spreadsheet format. You can slide the column
borders to expose the full column of text for each field. The first six columns
of the spreadsheet are shown in the previous image. The first column is the
tallied quantity, followed by subassembly quantity, catalog number, and
1882 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
manufacturer code. The remaining fields are the fields extracted from the
mfg/cat combo query on the external catalog look-up file.
Connector diagrams
Connector diagrams - Introduction
Insert, modify, and wire connectors.
45 minutes Time required
Copy all files located in Prerequisites:
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Ae-
gs\Connector diagrams
Windows XP
to
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Connector diagrams Windows Vista
to
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
You learn to:
Understand connectors
Insert a connector
Wire connectors
Connector diagrams | 1883
Insert in-line connectors
Stretch a connector
Add a connector pin
Move a connector pin
Add connector descriptors
About connector diagrams
The connector wiring tools help you more easily create and work with
point-to-point style wiring schematics (as opposed to ladder-style schematics).
Although some of these tools are useful for ladder-style schematics, they are
tuned to work well with drawings that are heavy on point-to-point connector
diagrams. Instead of creating and maintaining a large library of schematic
connector symbols, each symbol is generated parametrically, on the fly, per
user input and at user-defined orientation. A connector toolbar contains tools
for creating and editing connectors.
Inserting connectors
The Insert Connector tool generates a connector symbol from user-defined
parameters. The symbol is created on the fly and inserted as a block insert
into your active drawing file. Since they are created on an as needed basis, it
eliminates the need for you to create and maintain a library of connector
symbols.
Change drawing properties
1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS
and select Activate.
2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list.
3 Open AEGS10.dwg.
4 Click Schematic tab Other Tools panel Drawing Properties
drop-down Drawing Properties.
1884 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
5 On the Drawing Properties Components dialog box, select Sequential.
6 On the Drawing Properties Wire Numbers dialog box, New Wire
Number Placement section, select In-Line.
7 Click OK.
Add connectors to the drawing
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Connector
drop-down Insert Connector.
2 On the Insert Connector dialog box, specify:
Pin Spacing: 1.0
Pin Count: 15
Fixed Spacing
Pin List: 1
Insert All
3 Click the Flip button to flip the connector about its long axis.
The preview should look like the following image.
4 Click Insert.
Inserting connectors | 1885
A preview outline of the connector displays for placement on the drawing.
It shows rounded corners for the plug side of the connector. An x
indicates the insertion point of the connector. An arrow indicates the
plug side wire connection direction for plug/receptacle or plug-only
connector inserts or shows the wire connection direction for a
receptacle-only connector insert.
NOTE Before committing the connector outline to the drawing, press TAB
to flip the connector through four different orientations. Or, press the V key
to switch between vertical and horizontal orientations.
5 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point or [Z=zoom, P=pan, X=wire crossing,
V=horizontal/vertical, TAB=flip]:
Select to place the connector in the middle of the right-hand border of Black
Box 1
The connector was automatically assigned a component tag of PJ1.
6 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Connector
drop-down Insert Connector.
7 On the Insert Connector dialog box, specify:
Pin Spacing: 0.75
Pin Count: 4
1886 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Fixed Spacing
Pin List: A
Insert All
8 Click the Flip button to flip the connector.
The preview should look like the following image.
9 Click Insert.
10 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point or [Z=zoom, P=pan, X=wire crossing,
V=horizontal/vertical, TAB=flip]:
Select to place the connector in the middle of the left-hand border of Black Box
2
The connector was automatically assigned a component tag of PJ2.
11 Repeat steps 6 - 10 to place connectors on Black Box 3 and Black Box 4.
The connectors are assigned tags PJ3 and PJ4 respectively.
Inserting connectors | 1887
Wiring connectors
Black Box 1 is associated to a larger component such as a power box. Black
Box 2 - Black Box 4 are smaller components that are part of the power box.
The components must be wired together. The easiest way to do it is to use the
Insert Wire and Multiple Wire Bus tools.
Wire the connectors together
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Insert Wires
drop-down Wire.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify wire start or [wireType/X=show connections]:
Click PJ1 at pin 1 on Black Box 1
Specify wire end or [Continue]: Click PJ2 at pin A on Black Box 2
3 Repeat to connect PJ1 (Pin 2) to PJ3 (Pin A) and PJ1 (Pin 3) to PJ4 (Pin
A). Right-click to exit the command.
1888 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Notice that the Insert Wire tool drew the wire between the connectors
while avoiding any existing geometry on the screen.
4 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Multiple Bus.
5 On the Multiple Wire Bus dialog box, specify:
Horizontal Spacing: 0.75
Vertical Spacing: 0.50
Starting at: Component (Multiple Wires)
Wiring connectors | 1889
6 Click OK.
7 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Window select starting wire connection points
Select pins 5-7 on Black Box 1 (1) and right-click
to (T= wiretype):
Drag the wires to the right past the three wires you inserted,
to Point (Continue/Flip):
Drag the wires up towards PJ2 on Black Box 2, enter C and press ENTER (to
continue and lock the drag)
to (Continue/Flip):
Drag the wires to the right and connect to pins B-D on PJ2 (2)
8 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Multiple Bus.
9 On the Multiple Wire Bus dialog box, click OK to use the previous settings.
10 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Window select starting wire connection points:
Select pins 9-11 on Black Box 1 and right-click
1890 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
to (T= wiretype):
Drag the wires to the right,
to Point (Continue/Flip):
Drag the wires up towards PJ3 on Black Box 3, enter C, and press ENTER (to
continue and lock the drag)
to (Continue/Flip):
Drag the wires to the right and connect to pins B-D on PJ3
11 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Multiple Bus.
12 On the Multiple Wire Bus dialog box, click OK to use the previous settings.
13 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Window select starting wire connection points:
Select pins 13-15 on Black Box 1 and press ENTER
to (T= wiretype):
Drag the wires to the right,
to Point (Continue/Flip):
Drag the wires down towards PJ4 on Black Box 4, press C, and press ENTER (to
continue and lock the drag)
to (Continue/Flip):
Drag the wires to the right and connect to pins B-D on PJ4
Wiring connectors | 1891
Grouping wires
Now that you wired the connectors together, you insert in-line connectors to
group the wires.
Insert in-line connectors
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Connector
drop-down Insert Connector.
2 On the Insert Connector dialog box, specify:
Pin Spacing: 1.0
Pin Count: 3
At Wire Crossing
Pin List: 1
Insert All
3 Click Details.
4 On the Type section, clear the Add Divider Line box.
1892 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
5 On the Display section, set Plug to Right and Pins to Both Sides.
6 On the Size section, set the Plug to 0.325.
7 Click Insert.
8 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point or [Z=zoom, P=pan, X=wire crossing,
V=horizontal/vertical, TAB=flip]:
Select to place the connector on the wires connected to PJ1, Pins 1-3
9 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Connector
drop-down Insert Connector.
10 On the Insert Connector dialog box, specify:
Pin Spacing: 1.0
Pin Count: 9
At Wire Crossing
Pin List: 1
Grouping wires | 1893
Allow Spacers/Breaks
11 Click Insert.
12 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point or [Z=zoom, P=pan, X=wire crossing,
V=horizontal/vertical, TAB=flip]:
Select to place the connector starting on the line at PJ1, Pin 5
Notice how the connector expands when you cross the wires.
13 On the Custom Pin Spaces/Breaks dialog box, click Insert Next
Connection.
The dialog box displays which connector pin has been inserted so far.
Keep clicking Insert Next Connection until you place six of the nine
connections.
14 When the Custom Pin Spaces/Breaks dialog box says Inserted So Far: 6
of 9, click Break Symbol Now.
15 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point or [Z=zoom, P=pan, X=wire crossing,
V=horizontal/vertical, TAB=flip]:
Select to place the connector starting on the line at PJ1, Pin 13
16 On the Connector Layout dialog box, select Insert All.
17 Click OK.
1894 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
NOTE Another method is to insert the entire connector and then use the
Split Connector tool to break the existing connector.
18 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Dashed Link Line
drop-down Link Components with Dashed Line.
19 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Component to link from: Select the bottom portion of PJ6 (1)
component to link to: Select the top portion of PJ6 (2), right-click
Grouping wires | 1895
Modifying connectors
The Insert Connector toolbar has tools for modifying connectors and connector
pins. You can also add, remove, or move the pins found inside of the
connector.
Stretch existing connectors
1 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Modify Connectors
drop-down Stretch Connector.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify which end of connector to stretch: Select the bottom of PJ1
Specify second point of displacement:
Pull the connector down towards the bottom of Black Box 1
3 Repeat for PJ6, pulling the bottom of the connector down so that it is
even with PJ1.
1896 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Add connector pins
1 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Modify Connectors
drop-down Add Connector Pins.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select connector: Select PJ1
Specify where to insert new pin or [Reset]<16>:
Select 4 spaces down from pin 15 on PJ1, right-click, and select Enter
The next available pin number (16) inserts at the selected point.
3 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Modify Connectors
drop-down Add Connector Pins.
4 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select connector: Select PJ6
Specify where to insert new pin or [Reset]<10>:
Select the new pin 16 on PJ1 to insert pin 10 in-line with it, right-click and
select Enter
Modifying connectors | 1897
NOTE You can delete pins using the Delete Connector Pins tool. Select the
pin you want to delete and it is automatically removed from the connector.
Modify connector pins
1 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Modify Connectors
drop-down Move Connector Pins.
2 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select connector pin to move: Select pin 16 on PJ1
Specify new location for pin 16: Select 2 spaces up on PJ1
Select connector pin to move: Select pin 10 on PJ6
Specify new location for pin 10:
Select pin 16 on PJ1 to move pin 10 in-line with it, right-click
3 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Modify Connectors
drop-down Swap Connector Pins.
4 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select connector pin: Select pin 16 on PJ1
Select connector pin: swap with: Select pin 12 on PJ1, right-click
5 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Modify Connectors
drop-down Reverse Connector.
1898 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
6 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Select connector to Reverse: Select the top in-line connector, right-click
7 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Connector
drop-down Insert Connector.
8 On the Insert Connector dialog box, specify:
Pin Spacing: 1.0
Pin Count: 2
Fixed Spacing
Pin List: 1
Insert All
9 Click Details.
10 On the Type section, select Add Divider Line.
11 On the Display section, set Pins to Plug Side.
12 Click Insert.
13 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify insertion point or [Z=zoom, P=pan, X=wire crossing,
V=horizontal/vertical, TAB=flip]:
Select to place the connector on the top of Black Box 1
14 Click Schematic tab Edit Components panel Modify Connectors
drop-down Rotate Connector.
15 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Modifying connectors | 1899
Select connector to Rotate or [Hold]:
Select the new connector, right-click and select Enter
Adding wire numbers
Wire numbers are blocks or attributes inserted on a line wire entity. AutoCAD
Electrical assigns each wire number type to its own layer. You can assign a
different color to each of these layers so you can easily tell them apart. The
wire number placement is set to in-line as defined on the Drawing Properties
Wire Numbers dialog box.
Insert wire numbers
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Insert Wire
Numbers drop-down Wire Numbers.
2 On the Wire Tagging dialog box, specify:
Wire Tag Mode: Sequential
Start: 100
3 Click Drawing-Wide.
The wire numbers are automatically inserted into the drawing starting
with number 100.
4 Click Schematic tab Edit Wires/Wire Numbers panel Move Wire
Number.
5 Respond to the prompts as follows:
Specify new Wire Number location (select on wire):
Select each wire closest to Black Box 1, right-click
1900 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
NOTE You can align the wire numbers using the Align tool.
Adding connector descriptors
AutoCAD Electrical supports two lines of description text on each connector:
one for the plug and one for the receptacle side of the connector.
Add descriptions
1 Right-click connector PJ1 and select Edit Component.
2 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, Pins section, click List.
3 On the Connector Pin Numbers In Use dialog box, connector pin grid,
click in the Description column for Pin 1.
4 On the Pin Descriptions section, enter POWER B2 for the Receptacle.
5 On the connector pin grid, click in the Description column for Pin 2.
6 On the Pin Descriptions section, enter POWER B3 for the Receptacle.
7 On the connector pin grid, click in the Description column for Pin 3.
8 On the Pin Descriptions section, enter POWER B4 for the Receptacle.
Adding connector descriptors | 1901
9 Click OK.
10 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.
11 Repeat to add the description POWER IN for Pins A on Black Box 2, Black
Box 3 and Black Box 4.
Your finished point-to-point diagram should look like the following
image.
1902 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Symbol Builder
Symbol Builder - Introduction
Create custom symbols with Symbol Builder.
30 minutes Time required
Copy all files located in Prerequisites:
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Ae-
gs\Symbol Builder
Windows XP
to
Documents and Settings\{username}\My Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Tutorial\Aegs\Symbol Builder Windows Vista
to
Users\{username}\Documents\Acade {version}\Aedata\Proj\Aegs
You learn to:
Create a schematic parent
Add attributes
Add wire connections
Save the symbol
Symbol Builder | 1903
Creating custom symbols
You can use the Symbol Builder to create an AutoCAD Electrical symbol easily.
This utility builds a smart schematic symbol by either adding AutoCAD
Electrical attributes to the geometry of the symbol, or by converting text
entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes. You can also use AutoCAD attribute
definition and editing commands to do the same thing. This tool makes the
task easier because you quickly pick and place attributes. It tracks what
attributes are present and checks your work to make sure that any required
attributes are not omitted.
NOTE If you exit out of the Symbol Builder, restart it. On the Select Symbol/Objects
dialog box, click Select objects and select any graphics and attributes you added
so far. You can then start from where you left off.
Create a parent schematic symbol
1 If AEGS is not the active project, in the Project Manager, right-click AEGS
and select Activate.
2 In the Project Manager, double-click AEGS to expand the drawing list.
3 Open AEGS03.dwg.
4 Draw a rectangle anywhere on the drawing.
TIP It is easiest to draw it in the white space on the left-hand side of the
drawing.
5 Click Schematic tab Other Tools panel Symbol Builder
drop-down Symbol Builder.
1904 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
6 In the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box, Attribute template section,
browse to the Library path C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125 (or
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125 on a Windows
Vista installation).
7 In the Attribute template section, select Symbol: Horizontal Parent, Type:
Generic.
8 In the Select from drawing section, click Select objects, select the rectangle,
and press ENTER.
9 Select OK.
Adding attributes
In this example, you add the attributes: TAG1, DESC1, LOC, INST, FAMILY,
MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE. You are not limited to these attributes and you
can include your own user-defined attributes on the AutoCAD Electrical block
files.
NOTE The TAG1 attribute is the only one required for a parent schematic symbol.
The other attributes in the Required section are expected on a parent schematic
symbol, however the symbol is recognized as a parent symbol without them.
Add attributes
1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible,
Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Palette Visibility Toggle.
Adding attributes | 1905
Use this palette to assign attributes to the rectangle as well as set the
height and justification for each attribute. The palette displays the
AutoCAD Electrical attributes that you can insert and define as part of
the symbol. Once an attribute is inserted on the symbol a check mark is
displayed next to it and you cannot insert it again. AutoCAD Electrical
allows only one insertion of each attribute.
2 In the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, select TAG1 and click the
Properties tool.
Enter:
Value: PS
It is the default code used as the %F value of the tag format (such as CR
, PB, LT)
Height: 0.125
Justify: Center
Click OK.
3 Click the Insert Attribute tool.
Insert the attribute above the rectangle.
1906 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
In the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, notice the check mark next to
the TAG1 attribute. Continue placing the rest of the attributes.
4 In the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor select DESC1.
Click the Insert Attribute tool.
5 Insert the attribute below TAG1.
6 Insert the LOC and INST attributes as indicated.
7 Insert the FAMILY attribute near the center of the rectangle.
8 With FAMILY still highlighted in the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor,
select the Properties tool.
Enter:
Value: PS
Click OK.
This assigns the %F value to the FAMILY attribute inserted.
9 Select MFG and insert near the center of the rectangle. Repeat for CAT
and ASSYCODE.
Adding attributes | 1907
Adding wire connections
If a X?TERMxx of the component (for example, "X2TERM01") wire
connection-point attribute lies within the small trap distance of the end of a
wire, then AutoCAD Electrical interprets the component connected to the
wire. The only time the trap distance changes is when you change the Feature
Scale Multiplier in the Drawing (or Project) Properties Drawing Format
dialog box.
NOTE Components with closely spaced wire connection points may not be
processed properly if the connection points fall within the AutoCAD Electrical trap
distance of one another.
A wire connection attribute can have a related terminal text attribute, TERMxx,
and terminal description attribute, TERMDESCxx. The "xx" is a two-digit
number (starting at 01) that is used to match up with the corresponding
X?TERMxx wire connection attribute.
Insert connection points
1 In the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, expand the Wire Connection
section.
2 In the Direction / Style list, select Others.
3 On the Insert Wire Connection dialog box select Terminal Style: Screw.
This terminal style inserts both the graphic to represent the screw and
the wire connection points.
4 Check Use this configuration as default. It directs Symbol Builder to use
the current Terminal Style and Scale as the default in the Symbol Builder
Attribute Editor.
5 Select Connection direction: Left & Top.
It determines the direction the wire attaches to the component.
1908 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
6 Enter L as the value for TERM01 in Pin Information.
7 Select X2TERMDESC01 in Pin Information and click Delete.
8 Click Insert.
9 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the terminal in the
upper left-hand corner as shown.
NOTE Always use AutoCAD Snap to insert the wire connection point.
10 Back on the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, expand the Wire Connection
Direction / Style list and select Right & Top / Screw.
11 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the terminal in the
upper right-hand corner.
You can continue to insert wire connections until you press ENTER by
entering the characters indicated in the command line prompt followed
by a space. You can also select from the Direction / Style list.
12 Insert the rest of the terminals as follows:
TERM03: Right
Insertion Point: below TERM02
TERM04: Bottom
Insertion Point: in the lower right-hand corner
TERM05: Bottom
Insertion Point: to the left of TERM04
TERM06: Bottom
Insertion Point: to the left of TERM05
TERM07: Bottom
Adding wire connections | 1909
Insertion Point: to the left of TERM06
13 Press Enter if necessary to return to the command prompt.
14 On the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, expand the Pins section. Enter
the Pin values as follows:
TERM02 : N
TERM03 : GND
TERM04 : -
TERM05 : -
TERM06 : +
TERM07 : +
Your drawing should look like the following image:
Saving the symbol
You have two options for saving the symbol: WBlock or Block. WBlock creates
the symbol .dwg file while Block creates the symbol for this drawing file only.
1910 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Save and insert the symbol onto a drawing
1 Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Done.
2 On the Close Block Editor: Save Symbol dialog box, in the Base point
section, click Pick point. Select a point in-line with the top terminals so
that it is easy to place on a wire later.
3 Select WBlock.
4 Enter a file name or accept the default.
5 Click OK.
6 When asked to insert the symbol, click Yes.
7 Place the symbol on the empty wire on the left-hand side of the drawing.
The wire breaks, the component tag inserts, and the wires connect to the
symbol.
NOTE New symbols you create can also be inserted with the AutoCAD
Electrical Insert Component command. You can add your new symbol to the
icon menu. Or, you can select it from the Type it or Browse dialog box file
selection options in the icon menu.
Saving the symbol | 1911
8 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.
1912 | Chapter 23 Tutorials
Advanced Productivity
Set up peer-to-peer component relationships
The following example has a valve representation on
an instrument drawing, FE100, and its equivalent on
the electrical schematic, SOL2500. They are the same
physical device, but carry different tags based on the
drawing discipline in which they appear. Though
each device is represented as a parent symbol, you
can set up a peer-to-peer relationship between them
so that the electrical tag name of the schematic
automatically cross-references to the instrument
drawing, and the tag cross-references of the instru-
ment bubble to the tag of the schematic.
The instrument bubble symbol is set up with an op-
tional split tag. Instead of a single TAG1 attribute, it
has two tags: TAG1 PART1 and TAG1 PART2. The
instrument bubble is also set up as a normal AutoCAD
Electrical parent schematic symbol without the wire
connection points. It includes two extra attributes
beyond what a normal parent symbol carries:
WDTAGALT - carries a copy of the schematic
TAG1 value of the symbol.
WDTYPE - an invisible attribute with a nonblank
value indicating the component category. Ex-
ample: "PI" for P&ID, "PN" for pneumatic, or "HY"
for hydraulic
24
1913
The schematic parent solenoid symbol includes just
one extra attribute: WDTAGALT carries a copy of the
instrument value of the bubble.
Your drawings must be part of the active AutoCAD Electrical project so that
the WDTAGALT value on the instrument drawing is automatically updated
when you edit the schematic parent tag name and vice versa. Using AutoCAD
Electrical SURF on one automatically includes the other in the surf pick
window.
1 Open the Project Manager.
2 Open the project containing the instrument and schematic drawings.
3 On the Project Manager, double-click the schematic drawing to open it.
4 Zoom in so that your schematic symbol is visible.
5 On the Project Manager, double-click the instrument drawing to open
it.
6 Zoom in so that your valve representation is visible.
7 On the Project Manager, right-click the project name, and select
Properties.
8 On the Project Properties, Cross-references dialog box, Cross-reference
Options section, select Peer-to-Peer.
9 Click OK.
10 Right-click the schematic symbol to edit in the drawing (in this case,
SOL2500).
11 Select Edit Component from the context menu.
12 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click Tags Used: Schematic.
1914 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
13 Select Show all components for all families.
The tag values from the other symbol appear in the list.
14 Select the valve representation (in this case, FE100) with a family code
of IN (for instrument).
15 Click Copy Tag.
16 On the Copy Tag dialog box, click WDTAGALT.
17 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click Show/Edit Miscellaneous.
18 Verify that the WDTAGALT value lists the TAG1 value of the valve (in
this case, FE100) and click OK.
19 On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK.
20 On the Update Other Drawings dialog box, click Now to update the
drawing.
The WDTAGALT value of the schematic symbol is automatically updated
and the TAG1 value of the valve (or TAG1 PART1/TAG1 PART2 combined
value) appears next to the symbol in the drawing.
The WDTAGALT value of the valve is automatically updated and the TAG1
value of the schematic symbol appears next to the valve in the drawing.
Create automated pin assignments
AutoCAD Electrical consults a Pin List database when a part number is added
or an existing part number is changed on a parent schematic symbol. If
AutoCAD Electrical finds a match on the part number's MFG, CAT, and
optional ASSYCODE values (which ties to the catalog number to make unique
parts) in this database table, then the associated contact count and pin number
information is retrieved and placed on the parent schematic component.
Create automated pin assignments | 1915
Any device can have pins assigned to it, but common components that carry
pin assignments are relays, motor starters, and connectors. Pins are used for:
Error checking
Accurate connection information
Providing correct connections
You can expand the Pin List database table as needed. Many users have
difficulty creating their own database entries so the following procedures
simplify this procedure for you.
Basic workflow
Pin lists are directly associated to catalog numbers and therefore are not applied
to a component symbol until the catalog number has been assigned. You can
use wildcards inside the Pin List database to find the catalog number to apply
a single pin list to multiple symbols. The basic workflow for pin numbers
being assigned to a symbol is as follows:
Insert a component.
On the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, assign a catalog number.
Pin List database is queried.
Coil pins are applied to the parent symbol's terminal attributes.
The Pin List is applied to the parent symbol as xdata or attributes.
If the pin numbers are assigned as xdata, there is not a PINLIST attribute
since the pin assignment comes from the pin list table.
Setting up COILPINS
The COILPINS column in the Pin List database specifies the terminal pin
numbers for a coil or parent symbol of a component. This is generally two
pin numbers separated by a comma (such as K1,K2). When a component calls
for additional pin assignments on the parent, you can continue the list with
each value separated by commas. These values are applied to the TERM01 and
TERM02 attributes respectively on the parent symbol.
If you set COILPINS = "K1,K2;" then pins K1/K2 are assigned to the parent
symbol of a component.
In the example below, TERM01 = K1 and TERM02 = K2.
1916 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Setting up COILPINS for two wired devices
The automatic pin list look-up and assignment at component insertion time
is not limited to relay devices as shown in the example above. You can encode
two wire devices like pilot lights or proximity switches into the database file.
Insert the Manufacturer and Catalog numbers and fill in the COILPINS filed
with the terminal pin numbers. Leave the PINLIST field blank. Now, when
you insert one of these devices and do a catalog lookup and part number
selection, AutoCAD Electrical quickly looks for a MFG/CAT match in the pin
list database. On a match, AutoCAD Electrical pulls out the device's coil pin
numbers and inserts them in the newly inserted device.
Setting up a PINLIST
The PINLIST column in the Pin List database specifies the contact types and
their respective pin numbers. A two terminal contact has three elements in
this format: contact type, terminal pin, terminal pin. Each PINLIST value can
have up to 256 characters. Use a value 0-5 to specify the contact type, where:
0 = convertible contact
1 = N.O.
2 = N.C.
3 = Form-C (NO/NC pair)
4 = multiple-pole terminal strips or undefined type
5 = multiple-pin or stacked terminals
If you set PINLIST = "0,13,14;0,23,24" then 0= contact type, 13 (or 23)=
TERM01, and 14 (or 24)= TERM02.
If you set PINLIST = "0,13,14,*prompt," "*prompt" adds a description label.
This optional label is always the last element of the list and is preceded by an
asterisk character (if the asterisk is left out, the comment is interpreted as
another pin number).
To view or manually edit the PINLIST values, select Edit Component, and
then click NO/NC Setup on the Insert/Edit Component dialog box.
Create automated pin assignments | 1917
Setting up PEER_COILPINS and PEER_PINLIST
The PEER_ fields in the Pin List database specify pin list assignments for a
single part number with two parent devices. You set up the second coil's coil
pins and pin list data in the PEER_COILPINS and PEER_PINLIST fields for the
common part number. This is commonly used for setting up forward and
reversing starters or latching and unlatching relays. You apply the pins to the
forward (latching) relay, and then apply the peer pins to the reversing
(unlatching) relay.
To split the pin list data between two peer coil symbols:
1 Insert the first coil symbol and make the catalog look-up selection.
The COILPINS and PINLIST data is found and applied to the coil symbol.
Any defined peer coil and pinlist data is also saved on the symbol as
invisible xdata.
2 Insert the second coil symbol but do not make a catalog assignment.
3 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click NO/NC Setup.
4 Click Pick.
5 Select the first coil symbol.
The saved peer pinlist data is moved from the first symbol over to this
peer symbol. Child contacts can now be auto-annotated with the selected
coil's available pin list information and max NO/NC count tracked on a
per-coil basis.
Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users
You can manually move any shared files to a new central location after
installation by using normal Microsoft Windows operations to cut or copy
and paste from their local location to a central shared location. These shared
files are located by AutoCAD Electrical as long as they are placed in the
AutoCAD Electrical defined path (such as in the project's subdirectory), the
path given by the AutoCAD Electrical environment variable, or AutoCAD
search paths.
NOTE We recommend that you create a backup of your information in another
location and remove the shared data from your local drive to ensure that the data
is being located correctly.
1918 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Shared files
The following shared files can be pasted from your local machine to a shared
location. The table lists the file names, default location, and any WD.ENV file
lines that must be modified.
The main executables and static support files are located under C:\Program
Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\. The user-modifiable support files and
database content are found under
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\
Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD
Electrical {version}\{release}\{country code}\
NOTE It is not required that you share these files, but sharing makes it easier for
multiple users to work with projects in AutoCAD Electrical.
default_cat.mdb, footprint_lookup.mdb, schematic_look-
up.mdb, wd_lang1.mdb, wd_picklist.mdb, wddinrl.xls,
ace_electrical_standards.mdb
Databases
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My
Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs
Windows Vista:C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade
{version}\AeData\Catalogs
WD.ENV file edit:
Original path: WD_CAT,%WD_DIR%/catalogs/,AE catalog
file path
Edited path: WD_CAT,N:Electrical/Shared_Files/Catalogs/,AE
catalog file path
NOTE These files must be kept in the same location since
the program locates them according to the same WD.ENV
file entry.
ace_circuit_builder.xls Circuit Builder Spreadsheet
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Support\
Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users | 1919
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Docu-
ments\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Support\
WD.ENV file edit:
Original file name: WD_CIRCBUILDER_FNAM,ace_cir-
cuit_builder.xls,Circuit Builder spreadsheet file name
Edited name: WD_CIRCBUILDER_FNAM,my_ace_cir-
cuit_builder.xls,Circuit Builder spreadsheet file name
jic1, jic125, iec2, iec4, jis2, gb2, panel, pneu_iso125 Symbol libraries
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Docu-
ments\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs
NOTE The symbol library path is stored with each project
in its .wdp file and must be modified.
ACE_AS_MENU.DAT, ACE_GB_MENU.DAT,
ACE_HYD_MENU.DAT, ACE_IEC_MENU.DAT,
AutoCAD Electrical icon menu (In-
sert Component menus)
ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT, ACE_JIS_MENU.DAT, ACE_PAN-
EL_MENU.DAT, ACE_PID_MENU.DAT,
ACE_PNEU_MENU.DAT, WD_ABECAD.DAT
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Ap-
plication Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{re-
lease}\{country code}\Support
Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roam-
ing\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{coun-
try code}\Support
NOTE The menu path is stored with each project in its
.wdp file and must be modified.
ACE_GB.slb, ACE_GB.dll, ACE_JIS.slb, ACE_JIS.dll, ace_as.slb,
ace_as.dll, ace_hyd.slb, ace_hyd.dll, ace_pid.slb, ace_pid.dll,
Slide images for AutoCAD Electrical
menus
bb.slb, iec1.slb, iec.dll, loc2.slb, pn0.slb, pn0.dll, pn1.slb,
1920 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
pn1.dll, pn2.slb, pn2.dll, pn3.slb, pn3.dll, pnl2.slb, pnl2.dll,
pnl.slb, pnl.dll, s1.slb, s1.dll, s2.slb, s2.dll, Ww.slb
Windows XP:C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Ap-
plication Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{re-
lease}\{country code}\Support
Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roam-
ing\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{coun-
try code}\Support
S_LDPC.SLB, WD_LOCAL.SLB, WDSIG.SLB, WDSIG_1.SLB,
gepb.slb
C:\Program Files [(x86)]\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Sup-
port
WD.ENV file edit:
Original path: *WD_SLB,x:some path/, to override path
pointing to ".slb" slide lib support files
Edited path: WD_SLB,N:/Electrical/Shared_Files/Slides/, to
override path pointing to ".slb" slide lib support files
NOTE For the path in the .env file to be recognized, the
asterisk (*) in front of the line must be removed. These slide
files may be relocated using this path, or they can just be
placed in the same location as the menu files.
Content of PLC folder (ace_plc.mdb and bitmap files) PLC database/images
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My
Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\PLC
Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade
{version}\AeData\PLC
NOTE These files must be in a location that is specified as
an AutoCAD Support path. They can be placed in a location
that is already defined as being a support path, or you can
add a new support path pointing to this location.
wd_desc.wdd Description selections
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Ap-
plication Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{re-
lease}\{country code}\Support
Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users | 1921
Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roam-
ing\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{coun-
try code}\Support
NOTE These files must be in a location that is specified as
an AutoCAD Support path. They can be placed in a location
that is already defined as being a support path, or you can
add a new support path pointing to this location.
default.inst Installation code selection list
Optional file, does not exist by default. To create this file
in Notepad, create a file with the project name and an .inst
extension (or use default.inst) and save to an AutoCAD
Support path so the program can find it.
NOTE These files must be in a location that is specified as
an AutoCAD Support path. They can be placed in a location
that is already defined as being a support path, or you can
add a new support path pointing to this location.
default.loc Location code selection list
Optional file, does not exist by default. To create this file
in Notepad, create a file with the project name and a .loc
extension (or use default.loc) and save to an AutoCAD
Support path so the program can find it.
NOTE These files must be in a location that is specified as
an AutoCAD Support path. They can be placed in a location
that is already defined as being a support path, or you can
add a new support path pointing to this location.
Using network deployment
You can alternately install AutoCAD Electrical databases, symbol libraries,
part footprint files, and support files to a shared network location, so all users
can work from a common standard database and simplifying database
management and configuration.
To start network deployment, select Network Deployment in the AutoCAD
Electrical installation program. Install the Network Installation Wizard (NIW)
and run it from the start menu. From the NIW, you can create an image for
client installations.
1922 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Use the Symbols Libraries, Catalog Database and Support Files dialog box to
install these files to a shared network location so that multiple users can work
from a common standard symbol library and parts database.
NOTE You cannot set up network deployment after installing AutoCAD Electrical
as a stand-alone program on individual machines.
Referencing icon menus from other menu files
You can also share custom symbols to be accessed by multiple users. The
easiest way to do this is to create and link to your own menu file.
You can set up AutoCAD Electrical's icon menuing system so that you can
switch back and forth from the default menu file (such as ACE_JIC_menu.dat)
to your own menu (for example "special_menu.dat").
1 Add a line like this to AutoCAD Electrical's ACE_JIC_menu.dat file:
Special menu|special_menu.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu
"special_menu.dat")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0)
2 In your new "special_menu.dat" file, add this line so you can switch back
to AutoCAD Electrical's default menu:
Default Electrical menu|back2wd.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu
"ACE_JIC_menu.dat")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0)
3 In AutoCAD Electrical's default icon menu, select the new entry.
Your menu immediately appears. When you want to go back to AutoCAD
Electrical's default menu, select Default Electrical menu on your own
special menu. AutoCAD Electrical immediately switches back to the
AutoCAD Electrical default icon menus.
Show source and destination markers on cable
wires
There may be times when you want to show the individual wires of a cable
at each end where they connect and yet you want to show the wires coming
together to form a single line cable in between the ends. Showing individual
wires along the entire run of the cable is too messy or not an option.
You can use the Fan-In/Out command set to do this. The Fan-In/Out command
relies on special pairs of source/destination markers plus a special layer for
Show source and destination markers on cable wires | 1923
the single line part of the cable representation. This layer is defined in the
Define Layers dialog box.
Setting up layers
1 In a blank AutoCAD Electrical drawing,
Click Schematic tab Other Tools panel Drawing Properties
drop-down Drawing Properties.
2 On the Alert dialog box, click OK to add the WD_M block.
3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click the Style tab.
You can select the default Fan-In/Out marker style here along with
defining the layers for the wires. Notice that the default layer name for
fan in/out single line layers is "_MULTI_WIRE."
4 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the AutoCAD Layer Properties Manager tool.
6 In the Layer Properties Manager dialog box, change the color of
"_MULTI_WIRE" to red and the color of "WIRES" to blue for this example.
The color difference illustrates how the feature works.
7 In the Layer Properties Manager dialog box, click OK.
Inserting components
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Insert Components
drop-down Icon Menu.
2 In the Insert Component: JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box, select Push
Buttons.
3 In the JIC: Push Buttons dialog box, select Push Button N.O.
4 Press F9 to turn on SNAP.
5 Insert the push button anywhere on the left-hand side of the drawing.
1924 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
6 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK-Repeat to insert two
more push buttons directly below the first one.
7 In the Insert/Edit Component dialog box, click OK after the last push
button is inserted on the drawing.
8 Repeat to insert three Limit Switches N.O. Insert the limit switches
anywhere on the right-hand side of the drawing (slightly below the push
buttons you inserted).
Adding wires
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Insert Wires
drop-down Wire.
2 Add a wire to the top push button. Drag the wire to the right.
3 Repeat for the other two push buttons.
4 Add a wire to each of the limit switches. Drag the wires to the left.
5 Press F9 to turn off SNAP.
6 Select all of the wires and verify that they were created on the WIRES
layer.
Show source and destination markers on cable wires | 1925
Adding source and destination markers
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Signal
Arrows drop-down Fan In Source.
2 In the Fan In/Out Source dialog box, select Solid as the Source marker
style.
4 Click the left button to set the wire connection orientation.
5 Select in the middle of the wire that is connected to the top push button.
6 In the Signal - Source Code dialog box, enter "cbla" as the code and "RED"
as the description.
If you enter the color of the wire in the Description field, AutoCAD
Electrical reports use this information in the Wire Color field.
7 Click OK.
1926 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
8 In the Source/Destination Signal markers (for Fan In/Out) dialog box,
click Yes to insert the matching destination marker now.
NOTE Because the destination wires are nearby, it is easier to insert them
right away. If the wires were on another drawing you could wait until later
to add the destination markers.
9 In the Fan-In/Fan-Out Signal Destination dialog box, select Solid as the
destination marker style.
10 Click the right button to set the wire connection orientation.
11 Select in the middle of the wire connected to the top limit switch.
Notice that the wires for both change from blue to red and the description,
RED, appears on both.
AutoCAD Electrical breaks the wire and changes the appropriate wire
piece to the defined layer. When inserting a source marker the wire
coming out of the marker changes; when inserting a destination marker,
the wire going into the marker changes.
You are prompted to define the next source.
Show source and destination markers on cable wires | 1927
12 Repeat for the middle and bottom wires for each group.
For the middle wire: In the Signal - Source Code dialog box, click Use to
enter "CBLA-01" as the code and enter "BLUE" as the description.
For the bottom wire: In the Signal - Source Code dialog box, click Use to
enter "CBLA-02" as the code and enter "WHT" as the description.
Notice that the wires change from blue to red and the descriptions, BLUE
and WHT, display on both sets of wires.
13 Press Esc to exit the command.
14 Select all of the wires and verify that they are on the _MULTI_WIRE layer.
Creating connecting wires
1 At the command line, type L and press Enter.
2 Click the end of the uppermost wire and drag down across each of the
wires connected to the push buttons. Continue dragging past the push
buttons and click.
3 Drag your cursor to the right to create a horizontal line, and click.
4 Drag down across the ends of the wires connected to the limit switches,
ending on the bottom wire and click. Press Enter to create the lines.
1928 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
5 Type MA at the command prompt to run the AutoCAD MATCHPROP
command.
6 Click the wire connected to the top limit switch.
7 Click each of the lines you just created. The lines change from black to
red since they are taking on the properties of the wire you selected.
Press Enter to exit the command.
Adding cable markers
At this point, you have established the link between the push buttons and
the limit switches. You can now include a cable marker identifier that is
associated with these wire connections in various wire and cable reports.
Show source and destination markers on cable wires | 1929
1 Click Schematic tab Insert Wires/Wire Numbers panel Cable
Markers drop-down Cable Markers.
2 Select to insert a cable marker.
3 Insert the cable marker on the horizontal line.
4 In the Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent wire) dialog box, click Catalog
Data Lookup.
5 In the Parts Catalog dialog box, select the 3 conductor (second item in
list) and click OK.
6 In the Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent wire) dialog box, delete the wire
color/id value (BLK), and click OK.
7 In the Insert Some Child Components dialog box, click Close.
Use the PLC Database File Editor
AutoCAD Electrical can generate any of hundreds of different PLC I/O modules
on demand, in a variety of different graphical styles, all without a single,
complete I/O module library symbol resident on the system. Modules
automatically adapt to the underlying ladder rung spacing, whatever that
value might be, and can even be stretched or broken into two or more pieces
at insertion time. This is all possible because AutoCAD Electrical generates
PLC I/O modules via a parametric generation technique driven by a PLC
database (ACE_PLC.MDB).
1930 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Creating new PLC modules
By default, when creating a PLC module the PLC Database File Editor lists as
many blank field Terminal Types as there are terminals defined in the New
Module dialog box.
1 Click Schematic tab Other Tools panel Database Editors
drop-down PLC Database File Editor.
2 Click the PLC Database File Editor tool.
3 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, highlight PLCs in the PLC
selection list and click New Module.
4 In the New Module dialog box, specify the following:
Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley
Series: 1746
Series Type: Discrete Input
Code (Catalog Number): 1746-IA9
Terminals: 9
Addressable Points: 8
5 Click OK.
You now have a new blank input module with nine terminals and eight
addressable I/O points. You now need to define some information for
each terminal in the module, the most important being what symbols
AutoCAD Electrical should stack together to build the module. Usually
the top-most symbol for the module is a little different from the rest so
Use the PLC Database File Editor | 1931
that it can carry some basic information for the module that only needs
to occur once in the final symbol.
Assigning Terminal Types
1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, right-click Terminal Type 1
and select Edit Terminal from the context menu.
The Select Terminal Information dialog box appears. There are 3 categories
for top symbols: Top Input, Top Output, and Top Terminal. Top Input
and Top Output are addressable terminals, while the Top Terminal
category consists of non-addressable terminals.
2 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, select Top Input.
The available terminals for that category appear along with any recently
used terminals. Each terminal shown is slightly different. It may have an
input wire connection terminal or have terminals for both input and
output, or it may not have a wire connection.
3 Select to use Module Info Input I/O Point Wire Left by selecting the
picture and then click OK.
The selected terminal is assigned to the Terminal Type in the PLC Database
File Editor dialog box. AutoCAD Electrical looks at the block to see what
attributes come in when the block is inserted. Some of the attributes come
in with predefined values that can be overwritten. You will see these
predefined values in the grid below the terminal type list.
4 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, multiple-select the next seven
terminals, right-click, and select Edit Terminal.
1932 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
NOTE You can select multiple fields to edit at the same time by dragging
your mouse across contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key
while selecting non-contiguous fields.
5 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, select the Input category
and look at the available terminals.
6 Select the Input I/O Point Wire Left terminal and click OK.
All seven terminals are assigned at the same time.
7 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, right-click on the last terminal
and select Edit Terminal.
8 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box, select the Terminal
category.
9 Click the Terminal Point Wire Right terminal and click OK.
As an alternative to the Select Terminal Information dialog box, you can use
the drop-down list of predetermined Terminal Types. Click the arrow for the
Terminal Type and select from the list of available terminal types.
Use the PLC Database File Editor | 1933
Setting additional terminal information
Some modules may have terminals that are not used. When you build your
PLC module on an AutoCAD Electrical drawing there is a choice inside the
Module Layout dialog box to include unused/extra connections. When this
toggle is not selected, all terminal entries marked as "Show: When Including
Unused" in the PLC Database File Editor are skipped. When this toggle is
selected, all entries marked with "Show: When Excluding Unused" are skipped.
This gives flexibility to how a module is represented.
1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, make sure all of the terminals
are set to Show: Always.
2 Make sure all of the terminals are set to Optional Re-prompt: No.
You can trigger AutoCAD Electrical to prompt for a new beginning address
number when the parametric build flips from inputs to outputs or vice
versa. On the line where you want AutoCAD Electrical to re-prompt for
a new output address, select Output. If you want a re-prompt for a new
input address, select Input from the list.
3 If you want a prompt for an automatic break in the PLC module, select
the toggle in the Break After column.
4 If you want to override the rung spacing for the I/O and wire connection
point spacing, enter a value in the Spacing Factor column.
When AutoCAD Electrical generates a PLC module, it uses the current
rung spacing for I/O and wire connection point spacing. When a Spacing
Factor is specified, AutoCAD Electrical sees this spacing factor value on
any terminal type I/O point or wire connection entry line, it uses a factor
of the rung spacing. For example, a 2 for a given entry inserts this point
down two times the rung spacing instead of a full rung spacing. A value
of 1.5 inserts the point down an extra half rung spacing than normal. A
value of 0.0 puts the particular I/O point at the same location as the
preceding one.
Modifying the terminal box dimensions
The Style Box Dimensions dialog box defines the module box dimensions
(such as the offset values and line properties) based upon the style number
used when the PLC was created.
1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, click Style Box Dimensions.
1934 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
2 Select Style 2 as the graphic style for your plc module. Styles 1-5 are
predefined, styles 6-9 may be user-defined. Select a style number - a sample
portion of a PLC module appears.
There are about two dozen symbols (with a file name "HP?*.dwg" where
"?" is the style number) associated with each style in the library folder.
To create a style, copy an existing style's symbols to one of the unused
style numbers (6-9) and edit each library symbol.
Library folder:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\{library}\
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\Libs\{library}\
3 Specify the module box dimensions for the selected style.
These values set the right, left, top, and bottom offsets for the rectangle
that surrounds the module. The optional Split Top and Split Bottom
specify the offsets for a split module where Split Top specifies the offset
for the top of a split module and Split Bottom specifies the offset for the
bottom of the split module. If left blank, the rectangle Top and Bottom
values are used.
4 Specify any properties for the lines that make up the box. You can set
the color and linetype using the properties fields. To predefine the color,
enter "COLOR colorname" into the box. For linetype, enter "LTYPE
linetypename" in the box.
5 Click OK.
Modifying the terminal block settings
The Terminal Block Settings dialog box is used to manage the library symbols
in the PLC Database File Editor. You can add a terminal to the list by clicking
in any box in the last entry of the list. A blank entry line is added to the bottom
of the list. You must define the block name, assign it to a terminal category
for selection, give it a description, and assign a bitmap to be used for dialog
box appears.
The list shows the block name, category, unique description, and sample
bitmap file for each terminal type.
As defined when creating the parametric PLC blocks. Block
file names adhere to the naming conventions to identify
Block Name
Use the PLC Database File Editor | 1935
the PLC style numbering in the third position and the ori-
entation in the first position.
Used in the PLC Database File editor to easily find specific
types of terminals.
Category
These descriptions are used during the terminal type selec-
tion process. They need to be maintained as unique
Unique Description
This file is also used by the PLC database File editor to dis-
play a view of the terminal for selection.
Sample Bitmap File
Symbols and BMP files need to be created outside of the
PLC database file editor. Symbols are found in the standard
library search path, while PLC Bitmap images are main-
tained in the same OS folder as the PLC Database itself
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My
Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\
Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade
{version}\AeData\
1 In the PLC Database File Editor dialog box, click Settings.
The Terminal Block Settings dialog box lists the library symbols for the
terminal blocks that appeared in the Select Terminal Information dialog
box. Notice that row 1 lists the block file name and sample bitmap file
for the terminal we selected for Terminal Type 1.
2 Switch between the various graphic styles. Notice that the block name
updates depending on the style and orientation you select. For example,
the block name is "HP1WA-DL" for Style 1, Horizontal. If you select Style
4, Vertical the block name changes to "VP4WA-DL".
Graphical styles are used during the operation of the PLC Parametric
Selection process. These bitmap images appear during normal operation
and selection of PLC entries and are found at C:\Program
Files\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Acade. Use the same file names that are
already there: P_STYLEx.bmp where 'x' is the plc style 1-9.
3 Click View DWG or View Bitmap to view the PLC parametric symbols.
4 After you are done viewing the various symbols, click Cancel.
1936 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Adding terminal attributes
1 Select the first terminal in the list of terminals.
The attributes associated to the block, along with any predefined values,
appear below the Tree Structure section of the dialog box.
Notice that the value for the LINE1 is RACK %%1 and LINE2 is SLOT
%%2. The prompting values of %%1 and %%2 are populated with what
you type into the text box when prompted. The static text of Rack and
Slot appears in the attribute once the PLC module is created. There are
multiple prompting variables from %%1 through %%9. Prompting strings
can be added to any existing attributes on the terminal block. If you
wanted to add additional prompts with out using the existing attributes
you would have to modify the block file to add additional attributes such
as Line3.
Top terminals are the only symbols which can accept prompts during
the parametric PLC insertion process.
2 Edit each attribute value for the TAG attributes to read "IN-%%N."
Besides the Module Prompt variables, AutoCAD Electrical also supports
the use of an address variable. When the module is inserted, the PLC I/O
addresses are calculated based on some AutoCAD Electrical settings and
the module settings. You can trigger AutoCAD Electrical to include a
prefix or suffix to each address value it inserts.
The %%N represents the calculated I/O address and the IN- is the prefix
that gets added to the address value. You can also use the prompt values.
For example, if you want to permanently encode the rack and group
numbers (%%1 and %%2 prompts) into each I/O address value, encode
each I/O address entry in the date file with "TAGA_=%%1%%2%%N."
3 If you want to assign a text constant to any attribute value, combine a
text constant with the variables as shown in the module prompts and
addressing examples above.
Inserting the PLC module into the drawing
1 Click Save Module to save the module to the PLC database file.
2 Click Done/Insert.
The PLC Parametric Selection dialog box appears.
Use the PLC Database File Editor | 1937
3 Click OK to insert the new PLC module onto the drawing.
4 Specify the insertion point on the drawing.
5 In the Module Layout dialog box, click OK.
6 In the I/O Address dialog box, specify a beginning I/O address or use the
quick picks to select an address (such as I:/00).
7 Click OK.
Your module should look like the following. The Manufacturer, Catalog
Number, and Description attributes also display at the top of the module
(not shown).
1938 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Customize Circuit Builder
Circuit Builder overview
The Circuit Builder tool comes prepopulated with data to build and annotate
a sampling of motor control circuits and power feed circuits. This includes
3-phase, single-phase, and one-line circuit representations. Each circuit is built
dynamically, adjusting the power bus to match the wire bus for the drawing,
adding wiring between components, and annotating the elements with
suggested values based upon the selected load. Each time a circuit is configured,
it is added to a history list of circuits. This provides for quick re-insertion at
a later time.
The feature is controlled by three things:
The spreadsheet on page 1940 defines the available circuits, circuit types,
and defaults for each option within a circuit.
The template on page 1945 (.dwg file) for a selected circuit defines the
placement for the individual components and the wiring.
The electrical standards database on page 1949 provides the values used to
annotate the circuit, size circuit components, and provide the appropriate
motor wire type.
Workflow
1 Circuit Builder opens the spreadsheet and reads in the first sheet named
ACE_CIRCS.
2 Circuit Builder shows the list of defined circuits in the Circuit Selection
dialog box.
3 Select a circuit to insert or configure. The associated line from the
ACE_CIRCS sheet provides the base drawing template name, and the
name of a circuit code sheet. This is a separate sheet within the Circuit
Builder spreadsheet.
4 The base drawing template for the circuit inserts at your selected location.
5 Circuit Builder finds and reads the attributes on all the special marker
blocks on the inserted drawing template.
Customize Circuit Builder | 1939
6 Circuit Builder matches each marker block to a specific section in the
circuit codes sheet. This section can be a single spreadsheet row or
multiple consecutive rows in the circuit codes sheet. The section identifies
one of the following:
The action taken at this marker block location in the circuit. For
example, calculate a wire type, insert a wire number, or adjust rung
spacing.
Provides a list of component insertion options that can be inserted
at this point in the circuit. For example, presents a selection list
containing a fuse, circuit breaker, or disconnect switch symbol.
Each marker block is processed in sequence, controlled by an ORDER
attribute value carried on each marker block
7 A marker block can trigger a nested template to be inserted into the main
circuit template. If the nested template carries its own marker blocks,
these are added to the overall list of marker blocks to process. When all
marker blocks have been processed, the circuit is complete.
Circuit Builder spreadsheet
The Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls, along with the template
drawings that it references, control what is displayed in the Circuit Selection
and Circuit Configuration dialog box options. The first sheet in the
spreadsheet, ACE_CIRCS, contains the main circuit categories, for example
3ph Motor Circuit, and types, for example Horizontal - FVNR - non
reversing. Along with this first sheet are one or more circuit code sheets.
These sheets contain the information needed to insert or configure a specific
circuit selected from the first sheet.
The ace_circuit_builder.xls circuit builder spreadsheet can be relocated into
any of the normal AutoCAD Electrical or AutoCAD support paths.
The default location for the spreadsheet is:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Support\
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE
{version}\Support\
1940 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
The default spreadsheet name, ace_circuit_builder.xls, can be overridden
by setting the environment variable, WD_CIRCBUILDER_FNAM, in the wd.env
on page 1918 file.
ACE_CIRCS sheet
Circuit Builder reads the list of circuit categories and types from the first sheet
in the spreadsheet, ACE_CIRCS. This appears in a tree-structure selection
window in the Circuit Selection dialog box. The ACE_CIRCS sheet contains
the following columns.
A major circuit category displayed at the highest level of the tree structure
in the Circuit Selection dialog box.
CATEGORY
The specific type of circuit within a major category. The circuit types appear
at the second level of the tree structure.
TYPE
The drawing template that is inserted when this circuit is selected. A .dwg
extension is assumed if it is not present.
DWG_TEMPLATE
The circuit code sheet name that is referenced for the selected circuit
template. This circuit code sheet carries the definitions for all of the marker
blocks in the selected drawing template and any nested templates.
SHEET_NAME
Code maps to the ANNO_CODE table in the spreadsheet. Allows you to
predefine the description, installation, location, and other key information,
ANNO_CODE
for the motor or load and the individual components that might be inserted
into the circuit.
Circuit code sheets
Once a circuit is selected from the Circuit Selection dialog box (the CATEGORY
and TYPE fields from the ACE_CIRC sheet), the associated drawing template
is inserted (the DWG_TEMPLATE field), and a related circuit code sheet is
ready for reference (the SHEET_NAME field).
The inserted drawing template on page 1945 contains special marker blocks.
Each marker block contains a CODE attribute with a value. This CODE value
is used to match up with a section in the circuit code sheet. The matching
section in the circuit code sheet provides the key information on what action
is required at this physical location in the circuit.
Circuit Builder spreadsheet | 1941
Each circuit code sheet contains the following columns.
Value is matched to the CODE attribute value on the marker block. Each
code corresponds to one circuit element in the list or an action/decision
that takes place at the insertion point of the marker block.
CODE
Text displayed in the Circuit Elements list in the Circuit Configuration dialog
box.
COMMENTS
The default option for a circuit element is marked with an X. When a
circuit is inserted rather than configured, all elements marked with "X" are
used to build the selected circuit.
UI_DEF
Title for the group of options in the middle Select section of the Circuit
Configuration dialog box. Each circuit element may have one or more
UI_TITLE
groups of options. For example, the main disconnecting means might
have two groups of options, the disconnecting means itself and an optional
auxiliary contact.
This field may also contain a predefined code to bring up a separate dialog
instead of driving the middle Select section of the main Circuit Configura-
tion dialog box. There are two pre-defined codes:
!MCC_CTRL - invokes the Select Motor on page 761 dialog box when
the Browse button on the Motor Setup section of the Circuit Configur-
ation on page 759 dialog box is selected. It must be combined with
the ace_cb_motor_select API call in the LOOKUP_CMD entry.
!PF_CTRL - invokes the Select Load on page 762 dialog box when the
Browse button on the Load Setup section of the Circuit Configuration
on page 759 dialog box is selected. It must be combined with the
ace_cb_power_feed_select API call in the LOOKUP_CMD entry.
NOTE Include the ace_cb_wire_select API call in the LOOK-
UP_CMD entry to invoke the Wire Size Lookup on page 764
dialog box when the Browse button in the Wire Setup section
of the Circuit Configuration dialog box is selected.
The text to display in the middle Select section for each option within this
group.
UI_PROMPT_LIST
A numerical value assigned to the selection from each group. These numer-
ical values are added up and matched to the value in the UI_SEL column.
UI_VAL
1942 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
NOTE This value must be inserted as a text value in the spreadsheet and
not as a number. An apostrophe character in front of the number forces
the spreadsheet software to interpret it as a text value. You can also format
the cells specifically as text. The text should appear left justified in the cell.
A numerical value matched to the sum total of the values in the UI_VAL
column for each selection made within a group. The COMMAND_LIST
value from this row is used to insert the selected options.
UI_SEL
NOTE This value must be inserted as a text value in the spreadsheet and
not as a number. An apostrophe character in front of the number forces
the spreadsheet software to interpret it as a text value. You can also format
the cells specifically as text. The text should appear left justified in the cell.
The command calls to insert the selected options. COMMAND_LIST
NOTE These calls are generally set up using standard AutoLISP format.
Multiple calls can be concatenated in the same cell or in subsequent rows
of the sheet. If multiple rows are used, the UI_SEL value cell should be re-
peated. Anything after a semi-colon character is interpreted as a comment
Optional command calls to annotate the circuit element. The ANNOT-
ATE_LIST calls execute after all rows of the COMMAND_LIST calls have
executed.
ANNOTATE_LIST
Optional command calls to perform the electrical standards database or
catalog lookups for the selected circuit element. This controls the right-
hand side of the Circuit Configuration dialog.
LOOKUP_CMD
Optional catalog lookup table name. If the option contains multiple com-
ponents, such as a disconnect switch and a fuse, there are multiple columns
where n increments for each component.
TABLEn
The title for the component within the Setup & Annotation section on the
Configuration dialog box. If the option contains multiple components,
TITLEn
such as a disconnect switch and a fuse, there are multiple columns where
n increments for each component.
Circuit Builder spreadsheet | 1943
ANNO_CODE sheet
Allows you to predefine the description, installation, location, and other key
information for the motor or load and the individual components inserted
into the circuit.
Value is matched to the ANNO_CODE value from the ACE_CIRCS sheet. ANNO_CODE
Value is matched to the CODE value of the marker block on the circuit
template.
CODE
Attribute name on the component inserted at the position of the marker
block.
ATTRIBUTE
Text prompt displayed in the Annotation Presets dialog box. PROMPT
The default value for the attribute if annotation presets are listed on page
759 or applied on page 757. This value can be a text value or an AutoLISP
expression that returns a text value.
DEFAULT
Future OPTIONS
How Annotation Presets work
1 Make a selection from the Circuit Selection dialog box, for example
"Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing". This selection has a value in the
ANNO_CODE cell, "ANNO_3M".
2 Circuit Builder finds the group of entries that match up with code
"ANNO_3M" in the ANNO_CODE sheet of ace_circuit_builder.xls.
3 If any matching entries are found, the Special Annotation: Presets section
of the Circuit Selection dialog box, is enabled.
4 If you select Presets and click the Presets List button, the Annotation
Presets dialog box displays. The rows displaying the entries with non-blank
DEFAULT values are initially marked as Selected.
5 Edit the attribute values as necessary and click OK.
6 Select to Insert or Configure the circuit.
7 Circuit Builder processes each marker block on the circuit template. If
the CODE value matches the CODE value from the ANNO_CODE rows,
1944 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
the attribute values marked as Selected in the Annotation Presets dialog
box are applied to the target attributes of the inserted component. If a
target attribute is not found, the value is inserted as an Xdata value.
Circuit Builder drawing templates
Each circuit starts with a main drawing template. These main circuit template
drawings are named ace_cb1*.dwg. Branching or nested circuit drawing
templates are named ace_cb2*.dwg. A branching circuit is a circuit inserted
as an option on to the main circuit, for example a control transformer circuit
or a power factor correction circuit.
The circuit drawing templates use the following naming convention.
ace_cb1_*.dwg - primary circuit drawing templates
ace_cb2_*.dwg - branching or nested circuit drawing templates
The default location for the circuit drawing templates is the schematic library
folder:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE
{version}\Libs\{library}\
One-line template drawings have a 1- suffix. The default location is in a
1- folder under the schematic library folder.
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\1-
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE
{version}\Libs\{library}\1-
NOTE This template drawing naming convention is recommended but is not
required for Circuit Builder to function.
A circuit template contains the wiring framework for the circuit and special
marker blocks. These marker blocks are nothing more than instances of a
standard AutoCAD block, ace_cb_marker_block, carrying three attributes.
Circuit Builder drawing templates | 1945
These marker blocks tell Circuit Builder that some action or decision is required
at the insertion point of the marker block. The action can be:
Insert a component.
Insert a multi-pole component.
Make a wire type assignment to the underlying wire.
Insert a wire number on the underlying wire.
Decide if a branching circuit is needed.
Decide if an underlying wire should be stretched and connect to a nearby
power bus.
Decide if underlying wire bus spacing should be adjusted.
Decide if an underlying wire should be trimmed.
Set up the circuit annotation.
NOTE If you choose to Insert a circuit, bypassing the Circuit Configuration dialog
box, the default options, as defined in the Spreadsheet on page 705, for each circuit
element are used.
Marker block attributes
This attribute value provides the link between the marker block on the circuit template
drawing and a section in the circuit codes sheet. The value on this attribute matches
with the CODE column value in the circuit codes sheet for the selected template.
CODE
This attribute value controls the sequence of circuit element display and insertion
within the circuit. Marker blocks are processed in order, from low to high. Assigning
ORDER
the same order value to multiple marker blocks links multiple marker blocks together
that should be processed as a group. For example, to adjust the spacing between
multiple wires of a 3-phase bus there are three marker blocks with a common CODE
value and a common ORDER value. The ORDER value can be an integer or a decimal
number value. Support for decimal number order values makes it easy to add a
marker block between two others without having to reorder everything.
This attribute value contains miscellaneous annotation values, actions, and flags.
Annotation values are in the format <attribute name>=<attribute value>. Actions
MISC1
might include embedded AutoLISP expressions or programs. Flags are key words
1946 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
that include enabling child contacts to link to parents and overriding multi-pole build
directions.
Flag codes include the following
_TAGFMT=<value> - override the drawing property component tag format or
wire number format setting for this one instance.
_PRETAG=<value> - predefine a default alias tag for parent child linking. This
can be used for situations when the child component is inserted before the parent.
The marker block for the child contact might have "_PRETAG=MR". When the
parent coil is inserted, its marker block also has "_PRETAG=MR". As the circuit
completes, the actual tag value of the parent annotates on to the child contact.
This is based upon the matching "MR" alias assigned to each.
_WIRENO=<value> - predefine a fixed wire number.
WIRENUMBERS=0 - if a required wire type does not exist, create it and mark it
as No Wire Numbering. If a required wire type does not exist and this flag is
missing or has a value of 1, create it and mark it as Wire Numbering.
_WIRETYPE=<value> - predefine the wire type layer name.
_WIRESKIP=<value> - number of wires to skip over when trying to connect to
another wire.
_MAXTRAPCOUNT=<value> - maximum search distance to look for a wire
connection, given in wire connection trap units. The wire connection trap value
is fixed and is displayed on the Drawing properties: drawing format tab on page
247 for the active drawing.
_BASE - indicates a base wire, the one that does not move, when setting up to
adjust multiple bus wire spacing. If not defined, the wire that is co-linear with
the insertion point of the template becomes the default base wire.
_L =<value>- each sublist, delimited by "|" characters, can predefine attribute
values for individual poles of a multi-pole component, set of terminals, or set of
cable markers.
_D=<value> - define the build direction override for a multi-pole component.
1=build right, 2=build up, 4=build left, 8=build down. Without an override, the
build direction is down for horizontal inserts, and from left to right for vertical
inserts.
X=<value or AutoLISP expression> - reposition the marker block in the "X" direc-
tion. For example, "_X=(* 0.5 DIST01)" means adjust the position of this marker
block in the X direction by an amount equal to 0.5 times the bus spacing distance
defined by marker block with a CODE attribute value of "DIST01". This example
might be used to position a marker block for a single phase motor insertion point,
halfway between two power bus wires.
Circuit Builder drawing templates | 1947
_Y=<value or AutoLISP expression> - reposition the marker block in the "Y" direc-
tion.
NOTE The flags defined in the circuit drawing marker blocks override any
spreadsheet settings.
Marker block functions
All marker blocks have the same block name, ace_cb_marker_block, but can
have a wide variety of functions. The specific function assigned to a marker
is based on its CODE attribute value and what this code value maps back to
in the circuit code sheet for the circuit template. Here are the categories of
marker block functions:
Blocks that define the circuit properties, such as motor selection. Setup
Blocks that define the wire type layers layer to assign to the wire network under the
block.
Wire Type
Blocks that define a wire number to assign to the wire under the block. Wire Number
Blocks that define the placement of a branching or nested circuit such as a control
circuit at the insertion point of the marker block.
Nested Circuit
Blocks that define the placement of a component, connector, terminal, cable marker,
or a multi-pole component at the insertion point of the marker block.
Component
Blocks that control rung spacing adjustment for the wires under these blocks. Blocks
that are to be processed as a group must carry common CODE and ORDER attribute
values.
Bus Spacing
Blocks that control stretching a wire segment to connect to another wire. Wire Connec-
tions
NOTE The name of the marker block cannot be changed. The Circuit Builder
command only processes marker blocks named "ace_cb_marker_block".
1948 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
One-line circuit templates
One-line circuit templates use the same marker block concept as three-phase
motor and power feed circuit templates. However, there are a few differences.
There is a single line wire that represents a multi-wire bus. Most of the one-line
circuit templates contain a special "bus-tap" symbol.
The bus-tap symbol can have two functions:
Provide an anchor point for the one-line circuit representation that begins
at this point.
Break into the one-line bus where the circuit connects.
On a dual circuit one-line template, there are three of these. One at the normal
point where the circuit ties into the bus. There is another version of the symbol
on each of the two circuit "legs", each marking the point where that part of
the dual circuit starts. These bus-tap symbols allow various reports to accurately
report on a one-line circuit, whether a single circuit or a dual circuit
representation.
The following bus-tap symbols are supplied:
HDV1_BT_1-.dwg - with dot for horizontal one-line circuit
VDV1_BT_1-.dwg - with dot for vertical one-line circuit
HDV1_BTT_1-.dwg - tee connection for dual horizontal circuit
VDV1_BTT_1-.dwg - tee connection for dual vertical circuit
HDV1_BTL_1-.dwg - corner connection for dual horizontal circuit
VDV1_BTL_1-.dwg - corner connection for dual vertical circuit
NOTE A bus-tap symbol is identified by a WDTYPE attribute with a 1-1 value.
Circuit Builder database
Circuit Builder uses an electrical standards database to define default values,
define engineering calculations, annotate circuits, and provide wire size
recommendations. The electrical standards database,
Circuit Builder database | 1949
ace_electrical_standards.mdb, is located in the catalog folder. The default
location is:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My
Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs\
Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade
{version}\AeData\Catalogs\
Sizing and wire type values are based on information from the electrical
standards database. Circuit Builder looks for a match on the motor size, supply
voltage, and phase. On a match, Circuit Builder provides the Full Load Amp
value, recommended motor power conductor size, and suggested rating values
for various branch circuit protection elements such as circuit breakers, fuses,
and disconnect switches.
The electrical standards database also allows Circuit Builder to provide
engineering estimates and green calculations in the area of power conductor
size versus energy losses. Designing to meet minimum code requirements can
conflict with green design. For example, designing to the minimum conductor
size for a given load may provide short-term savings on material cost but run
up longer-term expense due to higher heating loses in the wiring. Over the
life of the installation, the energy lost in heating up the minimum-sized wiring,
instead of reaching the load to do useful work, could be substantial.
During wiring sizing, Circuit Builder displays not only a list of the valid wire
sizes meeting the ampacity requirements of the load, but also a list of the
estimated maximum energy loss cost for each wire size. This set of calculations
allows you to make better green design decisions. For example, you might
want to oversize the conductors for a motor to reduce conductor heating
losses. This results in a higher initial cost, material and installation labor,
which is recovered many times over in reduced energy losses in the wiring
during the life of the installation.
NOTE The ace_electrical_standards.mdb file replaces the mcc.mdb file used in
previous versions of Circuit Builder.
The electrical standards database contains multiple tables used by Circuit
Builder.
Contains the values used to populate the Select Motor on page
761 dialog box.
MOTOR
1950 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Contains the values used to populate the Select Load on page
762 dialog box. This table name can have an optional suffix to
relate it to a specific electrical standards code.
FEED
Options tables contain values defining defaults and options lists
specific to an electrical standard. For example, default to copper
wiring, AWG size standard, and feet for conductor length units.
OPT
Wire ampacity tables contain the ampacity ratings for different
conductor sizes and insulation temperature ratings.
AMP_{wire type}_{wire size stand-
ard}
Grounding conductor sizing tables contain the maximum ampa-
city ratings for different grounding conductor sizes. This inform-
AMPG_{wire type}_{wire size stand-
ard}
ation is used to retrieve the minimum grounding conductor size
and provide a selection list of larger sizes.
Wire insulation tables lists the insulation types, the maximum
temperature rating for each, and de-rating factors for each based
on a series of temperatures.
INSUL_{wire type}_{wire size stand-
ard}
Conductor Reactance/AC Resistance tables contain values used
to estimate single-phase and three-phase voltage drop values.
XL&R_{wire type}_{wire size stand-
ard}
Conduit/raceway descriptions list used in conjunction with the
XL&R_{wire type}_{wire size standard} tables.
XL&R_DESC
Fill tables contain the ampacity de-rating factors used when
there is more than one current carrying conductor (power wiring,
FILL
not ground, neutral, or control wires) in the same conduit, duct,
or raceway.
Lists the component type descriptions whose sizing ties directly
into the full load amps value (FLA) of the motor or load. The
MOTOR_I_DESC
CODE value maps to the MOTOR_I_CALC and MOTOR_I_MAP
tables.
Lists the formula to calculate the maximum amp value for various
types of components on a per motor type basis.
MOTOR_I_CALC
Circuit Builder database | 1951
Maps the calculated FLA for a component to a specific rating
value and an optional catalog assignment.
MOTOR_I_MAP
NOTE Each table name can have an optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical
standards code.
Motor table
The data in the Motor table is used to populate the Select Motor on page 761
dialog box. The selection list can be filtered by type, voltage, and frequency.
The load and FLA values for the selected motor are passed back to the Circuit
Configuration dialog box and are used in wire size calculations. The values
are also used to calculate breaker size, fuse size, and disconnect switch rating,
for the selected motor.
The MOTOR table follows this table naming convention:
MOTOR - the default table name to use if no specific electrical standards
table is found.
_{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards
code. For example, an _NEC suffix might mean that the data for the
table parallels the National Electrical Code. A suffixed MOTOR table name
is not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database
to support multiple standards.
Feed table
The data in the Feed table is used to populate the Select Load on page 762
dialog box. The selection list can be filtered by type, voltage, and frequency.
The load and FLA values for the selected feed are passed back to the Circuit
Configuration dialog box and are used in wire size calculations. The values
are also used to calculate breaker size, fuse size, and disconnect switch rating,
for the selected load.
The FEED table follows this table naming convention:
FEED - the default table name to use if no specific electrical standards table
is found
_{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards
code. For example, an _NEC suffix might mean that the data for the
table parallels the National Electrical Code. A suffixed FEED table name is
1952 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database
to support multiple standards.
Options tables
Options tables contain values defining defaults and options lists specific to
an electrical standard. For example, default to copper wiring, AWG size
standard, and feet for conductor length units.
The OPT table follows this table naming convention:
OPT - default table name to use if no specific electrical standards table is
found.
_{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards
code. For example, an _NEC suffix might mean that the data for the
table parallels the National Electrical Code. A suffixed OPT table name is
not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database
to support multiple standards.
Description Name
Default full load amps multiplier value used to determine a maximum load. For
example, the full load amps for a motor is rated at 10 amps and the FLA_MULT
FLA_MULT
default is set to 1.25. The minimum wire size calculation for the wiring for the
motor is based upon an ampacity rating of not 10 amps but 12.5 amps (10
amps x 1.25).
The FLA_MULT factor displays in the Select Motor on page 761 and Wire Size
Lookup on page 764 dialog boxes.
Continuous load correction factor for wire size ampacity de-rating. If the elec-
trical load is anticipated to be classified as a continuous load, a default de-rating
factor can be automatically applied to the wire size ampacity calculation.
C_LOAD
For example, a given electrical code defines the Continuous load correction
factor at a value of 0.8. This means that a given wire size that normally has a
maximum rated ampacity value of 20 amps should be de-rated to a maximum
ampacity of 16 amps when the wiring is to power a motor that is expected to
be a continuous load. The wire size calculation may need to select the next
larger wire size.
Circuit Builder database | 1953
Description Name
Default wire metal value used to determine appropriate wire ampacity and wire
insulation table names. For example, CU to define copper wiring as the default,
AL to define aluminum wiring as the default.
W_METAL
Default wire type standard used to determine appropriate wire ampacity and
wire insulation table names. For example, AWG or MM2.
W_STD
Maximum allowable % voltage drop in power wiring. This can be used to help
calculate an appropriate wire size when the wire run distance is also defined.
V_DROP
Default insulation type used to determine the ambient temperature correction
factor.
W_INSUL
Wire run distance values for pick list in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. The
run distance is used for estimated voltage drop calculations in the motor or load
power wiring.
LEN_LIST
Run distance units for power conductors and values for units pick list in the Wire
Size Lookup dialog box. Run distance is used in the estimated voltage drop
calculation. Units are either "FT" for feet or "M" for meters.
LEN_UNITS
Unit cost per kWh. This value is used for estimating a maximum annual cost of
energy loss in the power wiring for a motor or load, assuming a continuous full
load.
KWH_COST
KWh cost units character used in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box showing the
wire loss estimates. For example, $ for dollar, for euro.
KWH_COST_UNITS
The code for the electrical standards name for this table. This code on page 197
is saved in the project .wdp file when the standard is applied to a project.
SHORTNAME
The full name of the electrical standards name for this table. This value extracted
from all the OPT tables provide the values for the pick list when setting an
FULLNAME
Electrical Code Standard for a project from the Project properties: project settings
tab on page 218.
1954 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Description Name
Run distance units for power conductors and values for units pick list in the Wire
Size Lookup dialog box. Run distance is used in the voltage drop calculation.
LEN_UNITS
Default supply voltage value and values for voltage pick list in the Wire Size
Lookup dialog box.
VOLTS
Default supply phase value and values for phase pick list in the Wire Size Lookup
dialog box. For example, 1 for single-phase, 3 for three-phase.
PHASE
Default value for the minimum wire size when displaying paralleled wire option
in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. For example, 1-0 AWG.
PARALLEL_MIN_SIZE
Default value for the maximum number of wire conductors when displaying
paralleled wire option in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. For example, 4 for
up to four paralleled wires per phase.
PARALLEL_MAX_CNT
Default ambient temperature correction factor. This value is used in wire type
sizing. It must match up with one of the temperature de-rating column labels
found in the INSUL_* tables. For example, 30C.
T_AMBIENT
Default power factor for a motor. This value is used in estimated voltage drop
calculations. For example, 0.85.
M_POWERFACTOR
Default power factor for a power feed. This value is used in estimated voltage
drop calculations. For example, 0.85.
F_POWERFACTOR
Defines the expression to calculate the minimum grounding conductor ampacity
size. The I in the expression represents the motor or load full load amps (FLA).
AMPG_MAX
The result of the expression is then applied to the appropriate AMPG table to
determine the minimum grounding conductor size.
Circuit Builder database | 1955
Wire ampacity tables
The wire ampacity tables provide the wire conductor sizes, descriptions, and
maximum FLA ampacity values based on wire size and standard insulation
temperature ratings. This information is used in the following ways:
Automatically select a default wire size based upon the maximum load
amp value displayed in the Select Motor on page 761 or Select Load on page
762 dialog boxes.
1956 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Automatically calculate or recalculate suggested wire sizes in the Wire Size
Lookup on page 764 dialog box as various parameters and de-rating factors
are applied.
The wire ampacity tables use the following naming convention:
AMP - the table name prefix.
_{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum.
_{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric.
_{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards
code. For example, an _NEC suffix might mean that the data for the
table parallels the National Electrical Code. A suffixed table name is not
necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to
support multiple standards.
For example, a table named AMP_CU_AWG_NEC contains the wire ampacity
information for copper, AWG sizes, and parallels what is found in the National
Electrical Code.
Description Name
Wire size code. This value can be automatically pushed into a wire type layer
name. For example, 12, 250KCMIL.
SIZE
Wire size description shown on the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. For example,
12 AWG, 250 KCMIL.
SIZE_DESC
Imperial cross-section value for the wire conductor size. CIRC_MIL
Maximum ampacity rating values for the wire conductor size for each of these
standard ambient temperature ratings. Additional columns can be added or an
60C, 75C, 90C
existing column can be deleted. For example, if 90C is not supported by local
electrical codes, this field can be removed from the table and will not show up
as an option in the Wire Size Lookup dialog box.
Circuit Builder database | 1957
Grounding conductor sizing tables
The grounding conductor sizing tables provide the grounding wire conductor
sizes and maximum FLA ampacity values. This information is used in the
following ways:
Provide a suggested minimum grounding conductor size based on the amp
value returned by the expression defined in the AMPG_MAX entry in the
OPT table.
1958 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Provide a selection list on the Wire Size Lookup on page 764 dialog box
giving this minimum suggested size plus all larger grounding conductor
sizes.
The grounding conductor sizing tables use the following naming convention:
AMPG - the table name prefix
_{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum.
_{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric.
_{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards
code. For example, an _NEC suffix might mean that the data for the
table parallels the National Electrical Code. A suffixed table name is not
necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to
support multiple standards.
For example, a table named AMPG_CU_AWG_NEC contains the grounding
conductor sizing information for copper, AWG sizes, and parallels values
found in the National Electrical Code.
Description Name
Wire size code. This value can be automatically pushed into a wire type layer
name for the ground wire. For example, 12, 250KCMIL.
SIZE
Wire size description shown on the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. For example,
12 AWG, 250 KCMIL.
SIZE_DESC
Maximum amp value associated to this grounding wire size. The value comes
from the result of the expression held in the AMPG_MAX entry of the OPT table.
MAX
Wire insulation tables
The wire insulation tables provide the option to de-rate wire conductor
ampacity based upon expected maximum ambient temperature.
Automatically select a default wire size based upon the maximum load
amp value, displayed in the Select Motor on page 761 or Select Load on
page 762 dialog boxes, and the default insulation type and ambient
temperature rating defined in the W_INSUL and T_AMBIENT entries of
the OPT table.
Circuit Builder database | 1959
Automatically calculate or recalculate suggested wire sizes in the Wire Size
Lookup on page 764 dialog box as various insulation and temperature
de-rating factors are applied.
The wire insulation tables use the following naming convention:
INSUL - the table name prefix.
_{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum.
_{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric.
_{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards
code. For example, an _NEC suffix might mean that the data for the
table parallels the National Electrical Code. A suffixed table name is not
necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to
support multiple standards.
For example, a table named INSUL_CU_AWG_NEC contains the wire insulation
information for copper, AWG sizes, and parallels values found in the National
Electrical Code.
Description Name
Insulation type code. INSUL
Insulation type description shown on the Wire Size Lookup dialog box. INSUL_DESC
Standard, maximum temperature rating for the insulation type. TEMP
A series of wire conductor ampacity de-rating factor values for maximum ambient
temperature. Columns may be added or deleted. For example, if 30C is the
minimum ambient temperature rating, the 25C column can be removed.
25C-80C
1960 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Conductor Reactance / AC Resistance tables
The optional conductor reactance/AC resistance tables provide the reactance
and resistance values for wire size based on conduit type. These values are
used to calculate the voltage drop percentage in power wiring when a run
distance is supplied.
There are two types of tables for this feature. A conduit type description table
and the reactance/resistance data tables.
Conduit type description table
Circuit Builder database | 1961
The description table, XL&R_DESC, contains the labels used on the Wire Size
Lookup on page 764 dialog box for the conduit or raceway type selection list
and map to the columns in the data tables.
Data tables
The conductor reactance/AC resistance data tables use the following naming
convention:
XL&R - the table name prefix
_{type} - the wire metal type such as CU for copper, or AL for aluminum.
_{size} - wire size standard such as AWG, or MM2 for metric.
_{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards
code. For example, an _NEC suffix might mean that the data for the
table parallels the National Electrical Code. A suffixed table name is not
necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database to
support multiple standards.
1962 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
For example, a table named XL&R_CU_AWG_NEC contains the conductor
reactance/AC resistance information for copper, AWG sizes, and parallels
values found in the National Electrical Code.
Description Name
Wire size code. SIZE
A set of reactance and resistance values, semi-colon delimited for the conduit
type. The first element is the estimated reactance and the second element is
the AC resistance.
C1-C3
NOTE see the XL&R_DESC table for the corresponding label for each. Data for
additional conduit/raceway types can be added to this table with a correspond-
ing entry added to the XL&R_DESC table.
NOTE See Wire Size Lookup on page 764 for the voltage drop calculation.
Circuit Builder database | 1963
Fill tables
When multiple current carrying wire conductors are in the same conduit,
duct, or raceway, the wire ampacity may need to be de-rated. Current carrying
wire conductors are defined as power wiring, not ground, neutral, or control
wires. The Fill table provides the de-rating factor based on the maximum
number of power wire conductors.
The FILL table follows this naming convention:
FILL - the table name prefix.
_{standard} - optional suffix to relate it to a specific electrical standards
code. For example, an _NEC suffix might mean that the data for the
table parallels the National Electrical Code. A suffixed FILL table name is
not necessary unless you plan to set up the electrical standards database
to support multiple standards.
1964 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
MOTOR_I* tables
A set of three tables that contain values used for calculating suggested breaker
size, fuse size, and disconnect switch ratings for a given motor or load amp
value. Each table name can have an optional suffix to relate it to a specific
electrical standards code such as _NEC for National Electrical Code.
MOTOR_I_DESC
Lists the component type descriptions whose sizing ties directly into the full
load amps value (FLA) of the motor or load. The CODE value maps to the
MOTOR_I_CALC and MOTOR_I_MAP tables.
Circuit Builder database | 1965
MOTOR_I_CALC
Lists the formula to calculate the maximum amp value for various types of
components on a per motor type basis. Each row gives a motor type followed
by columns marked with the codes given in the MOTOR_I_DESC table. Each
cell contains an expression to calculate a FLA value. The FLA value for the
selected motor corresponds to the symbol "I" in the expression.
Valid operations are +-*/^. The ^ character is the exponential function. For
example, I^2 is I squared, while I^0.5 is the square root of I.
If-then-else statements are supported including one level of nested statements.
For example,
(if (I > 400) then (I * 8) else (I * 11)) - the calculated amp value is eight
times FLA current for 0-400 amps and 11 times for greater than FLA of 400
amps. One level of nesting is supported.
(if (I >= 9.0) then (I * 1.25) else if (I < 2.0) then (I * 3.0) else (I * 1.67) - the
calculated value is set to (I * 1.67) if I is less than 9 but greater or equal to
2.0 amps. If I is less than 2.0 amps the calculated value is (I * 3.0), and if
greater than or equal to 9.0 amps, it is (I * 1.25).
Valid Boolean operations are >, <. >=. <=, =.
MOTOR_I_MAP
Maps the calculated FLA for a component to a specific rating value and an
optional catalog assignment. The rating value is annotated to the symbol
using the API call c:ace_cb_anno2 in the circuit builder spreadsheet.
The optional catalog assignment is defined in the Default field. Use the
following format:
MFG={manufacturer};CAT={catalog};ASSYCODE={assembly code}
If the ASSYCODE value is not needed, use the format:
MFG={manufacturer};CAT={catalog}
CATALOGSEL table
Circuit Builder uses the CATALOGSEL table to save the catalog selections made
for the motor and other components. The catalog information is saved based
on the motor size. If this same motor size is used later on another circuit, these
previous catalog selections become the default values when they match up
with the configured selections. For example, if the previous circuit was
1966 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
configured with a 10HP motor with time-delay fuses, and a 10HP motor with
time-delay fuses is selected for the new circuit, the previously used catalog
selection appears as the default.
If the circuit is configured using the Reference an existing circuit on page 773
feature, the values are not used from the CATALOGSEL table but from the
referenced circuit. However, if a new motor is then selected from the Select
Motor on page 761 dialog box, the CATALOGSEL tables values are checked for
a match.
Add a new circuit
To add a new circuit to Circuit Builder there are three main tasks:
Create the circuit drawing template on page 1967 (an AutoCAD .dwg file).
Add a reference to this new circuit in the ACE_CIRCS on page 1973 sheet in
the ace_circuit_builder.xls spreadsheet.
Create or modify a circuit codes on page 1974sheet in the
ace_circuit_builder.xls spreadsheet.
NOTE This exercise demonstrates the capabilities of Circuit Builder and the result
may not necessarily be electrically valid.
Create the circuit template
It is recommended that you read the Circuit Builder template overview on
page ? topic before continuing.
A circuit template drawing is an AutoCAD .dwg file that contains the wiring
framework for the circuit. On this wiring framework are positioned special
marker blocks. These marker blocks are configured, using attribute values, to
tell Circuit Builder that some action or decision is required at the insertion
point of each marker block. One marker block might identify where to place
he power disconnecting means for the circuit. Another marker block might
identify that an underlying wire must be appropriately sized to the motor
inserted at yet another marker block on the wire framework of the circuit
template.
The easiest way to create a circuit template is to copy a similar template to a
new name and modify the marker blocks on this copied template. For this
example you copy the circuit template ace_cb1_FVNR_H.dwg to a new name.
Add a new circuit | 1967
It is the main template for a 3-phase, horizontal, full-voltage, non-reversing
motor circuit. You modify this template to create a custom circuit template.
1 Locate the existing circuit template drawing file ace_cb1_FVNR_H.dwg.
Copies of the circuit builder templates are installed in each of the
schematic library folders, JIC125, IEC2, and so onto. Copy this file to
ace_cb1_FVNR_H_custom.dwg.
NOTE The circuit template name is not critical and does not affect
functionality of Circuit Builder.
2 Open the copied and renamed circuit template,
ace_cb1_FVNR_H_custom.dwg, in AutoCAD. Make sure that you have
write access to the drawing.
This template consists of three wires and some marker blocks.
3 Open ace_circuit_builder.xls in a spreadsheet software for reference. See
Circuit Builder spreadsheet overview on page ? for the location of this
file.
Use standard AutoCAD commands to modify the template and not AutoCAD
Electrical commands. It avoids creating a template that contains an extra copy
of the AutoCAD Electrical WD_M block. If you accidentally use a command
that inserts the invisible WD_M block, either UNDO or erase and purge the
WD_M block instance. To erase and purge the invisible block, follow these
steps:
1 Enter ATTDISP at the command prompt.
2 Enter ON to make all attributes visible.
3 Locate the block at 0,0.
4 Click Home tab Modify panel Erase.
5 Select the block and press enter.
6 Enter PURGE at the command prompt.
7 Select WD_M in the Block s section.
8 Click Purge.
9 Click Close.
1968 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Define wires stretching to connect to bus
The first modification is to change the way the horizontal wires connect to
the vertical bus when inserted. The copied template is defined as follows:
Top wire skips over two wires and connects to the left-most vertical bus
wire.
Middle wire skips over one wire and connects to the middle vertical bus
wire.
Bottom wire connects to the first vertical bus wire it encounters.
The following changes to the marker blocks reverse it.
1 Zoom in on the left-hand side of the template.
You should see three marker blocks, each with a CODE value of WCON.
Each one is directly on top of and near the end of one of the wires.
2 Enter ATTEDIT and select the top WCON marker block.
You should see the following values:
CODE = WCON - maps back to a row in the circuit codes sheet with
a function to stretch the end of the underlying wire to try to make a
connection.
ORDER = 1.02 - indicates the order of processing for the marker block
relative to all the other marker blocks in the template. The order value
can be an integer number or a decimal number. The blocks are
processed low to high starting at 0. Blocks with the same ORDER value
are processed as a group.
Add a new circuit | 1969
MISC1 = _WIRESKIP=2;_MAXTRAPCOUNT=200 - defines any special
handling of the marker block. See the Marker block attributes on page
711 topic for a complete list of supported values.
3 Change the MISC1 value to _MAXTRAPCOUNT=200, removing
_WIRESKIP=2.
The _WIRESKIP value defines the number of wires to skip over when
trying to connect to the vertical bus when inserted. Removing this value
directs Circuit Builder to connect to the first vertical wire it finds.
The _MAXTRAPCOUNT limits the relative distance that circuit builder
searches to find a wire to connect to. It is measured in an integer number
of wire connection trap on page 249 distance units. If _MAXTRAPCOUNT
is not defined or is zero, the search is across the whole extents of the
drawing.
4 Click OK.
5 Enter ATTEDIT and select the bottom WCON marker block.
6 Change the MISC1 value to _WIRESKIP=2;_MAXTRAPCOUNT=200, making
sure to enter the semi-colon character between the values.
It tells Circuit Builder to skip over two vertical wires when trying to
connect to the vertical bus and to search up to 200 times the trap distance
for a vertical wire to connect to. If none are found within that distance,
Circuit Builder will not stretch this wire.
7 Click OK.
Remove unnecessary marker blocks
The copied circuit has marker blocks for a control transformer and power
factor correction capacitor. For this custom circuit, these options are not
needed and the marker blocks can be removed.
1 To verify which marker block is for the control transformer, switch over
to ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Open the ACE_CIRCS worksheet.
Find which circuit codes sheet is used for the original template you copied
over, ace_cb1_FVNR_H.dwg.
3 Locate a row with the name of the original template you copied over,
ace_cb1_FVNR_H.dwg, in the DWG_TEMPLATE field.
1970 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
4 Find the SHEET_NAME value for this row, 3ph_H.
5 Open the 3ph_H worksheet.
6 Find the entry for Control transformer and circuit - non-reversing in the
COMMENTS column.
7 Find the CODE value for this row, XF01.
This CODE value links the marker block to the circuit code sheet.
8 Switch back to the drawing and locate the marker block with the CODE
value of XF01.
9 Erase the marker block using the AutoCAD ERASE command.
10 Repeat the steps to locate and delete the power factor correction marker
block, CODE=KVAR1.
Add a marker block
You can add a marker block by inserting the library symbol,
ace_cb_marker_block.dwg, or by copying an existing marker block and
modifying the attribute values. In this section, you will insert a marker block
that directs Circuit Builder to display a list of possible components to insert
in the Circuit Configuration dialog box.
NOTE This exercise demonstrates the capabilities of Circuit Builder and the result
may not necessarily be electrically valid.
1 Determine exactly where in the template you want this specific
component inserted as the circuit is built.
2 Enter INSERT at the command line to launch the AutoCAD block insert
command.
3 Browse to ace_cb_marker_block.dwg and insert this block at the desired
location.
A copy of this block is installed in each of the schematic library folders,
JIC125, IEC2, and so on.
NOTE You could also use the AutoCAD COPY command and copy a nearby
marker block into the desired location.
4 Enter ATTEDIT and select the marker block.
5 Enter a value for the CODE attribute, for example USR001.
Add a new circuit | 1971
Use letters or numbers for the value. There is no code naming convention.
Make sure it is unique within the circuit codes spreadsheet. This marker
block code value maps a row or group of rows in to the spreadsheet. The
information in the spreadsheet directs Circuit Builder to perform a specific
action at the XY coordinate of this marker block.
6 Enter a value for the ORDER attribute, for example 12.
This value can be an integer or decimal number and defines the order
that the marker blocks are processed. In this example, 12 is the highest
ORDER value on the template. This means that the action defined by
this marker block is the last one processed as the circuit is built.
7 Enter an optional value for the MISC1 attribute, such as
LOC=FIELD;DESC1=ADDED COMPONENT.
This value can carry a number of flags on page 1945 as well as predefine
attribute values. When more than one, they are to be semi-colon
delimited.
Modify existing marker block
The template has a marker block with a CODE value of X001. Finding the
matching code in the circuit codes sheet indicates a multi-pole component
insertion. Three terminals are inserted at the location of this marker block. In
this section, you add a MISC1 value to predefine the terminal numbers.
1 Enter ATTEDIT and select the marker block with the CODE value of X001.
2 Enter _L=|TERM01=T1|TERM01=T2|TERM01=T3|.
This " _L= " prefix marks the beginning of a list of data to annotate on
to a multi-pole insertion triggered by the single marker block. In the
example here, a multi-pole insertion of three terminals into the three
phase bus defined in the template drawing.
The "|" symbol separates the attribute groups for each pole of the
multi-pole insertion. Multiple attributes within a group are separated by
a ";", the second-level delimiter. This example directs Circuit Builder to
assign T1 to the TERM01 attribute on the first terminal inserted, T2 on
the second, and T3 on the third.
NOTE See Assign different attribute values on a multi-pole insert on page
1980 for more information.
3 Click OK.
1972 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
NOTE Save the circuit template drawing after all the modifications are made.
ACE_CIRCS sheet
The ACE_CIRCS sheet in the ace_circuit_builder.xls spreadsheet controls the
circuit options displayed on the Circuit Selection dialog box. In this exercise,
you add entry to this ACE_CIRCS sheet so your new circuit option shows up
in the Circuit Selection dialog box.
1 Open ace_circuit_builder.xls for edit using a spreadsheet software. See
Circuit Builder spreadsheet overview on page ? for the location of this
file.
2 Open the ACE_CIRCS sheet.
The structure of this sheet controls the tree structure used by Circuit
Builder on the Circuit Selection dialog box. You will add a new category,
Custom Circuits, with one custom circuit option, My 3-ph motor,
within that category.
3 Enter Custom Circuits in the CATEGORY field of the first blank row below
the existing entries.
It adds a new category to the highest level of the tree display.
4 Enter My 3-ph motor in the TYPE field for the same row.
It adds an option within this new category.
5 Enter ace_cb1_FVNR_H_custom.dwg in the DWG_TEMPLATE field in
this row.
It defines which circuit template drawing to use for this option. This is
the circuit template drawing created in the Create the circuit template
on page 1967 exercise.
6 Enter 3ph_H_custom in the SHEET_NAME field in this row.
It defines the circuit codes sheet name. This is created in the Circuit codes
sheet on page 1974 exercise.
7 Save the spreadsheet.
NOTE Leave the ANNO_CODE field blank. See Predefine attribute values using
annotation presets on page 2007 to learn how to define annotation.
Add a new circuit | 1973
Circuit codes sheet
Once a circuit is selected from the Circuit Selection dialog box (the CATEGORY
and TYPE fields from the ACE_CIRC sheet), the associated circuit template
drawing, with the marker blocks, is inserted (the DWG_TEMPLATE field). A
related circuit code sheet is ready for reference (the SHEET_NAME field). Each
marker block contains a CODE attribute with a value. This CODE value is used
to match up with a section in the circuit code sheet which defines what to do
at the location of this marker block in the template.
You can create a sheet or copy an existing, similar sheet. Since the circuit
template drawing was copied from ace_cb1_FVNR_H.dwg, it is easier to copy
the circuit codes sheet, 3ph_H, and modify it.
1 Open ace_circuit_builder.xls for edit using a spreadsheet software. See
Circuit Builder spreadsheet overview on page ? for the location of this
file.
2 Copy the 3ph_H sheet and rename it 3ph_H_custom as referenced in the
ACE_CIRCS sheet.
The changes in the circuit codes sheet must correspond to the changes made
to the marker blocks in the circuit template drawing. You can delete the lines
in the sheet that match the code values from the marker blocks you deleted,
XF01 and KVAR1. If you decide not to delete them from this sheet, it is not
a problem. These lines are ignored and not displayed on the Circuit
Configuration dialog box if the corresponding marker blocks are not found.
3 Locate the CODE value XF01.
4 Delete all the spreadsheet rows to the point where the next non-blank
CODE value begins, such as XF02.
5 Repeat for CODE value KVAR1.
Add a section for the new marker block you added with a CODE value of
USR001. Add this new section at the bottom of the sheet after the last
non-blank row.
6 Enter USR001 in the CODE field in the blank row.
7 Enter Extra Component in the COMMENT field.
It is displayed in the left-hand Circuit Elements section of the Circuit
Configuration dialog box and is used for selection.
8 Enter Component in the UI_TITLE field.
1974 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
It is the label that shows up above the selection list in the middle part of
the Circuit Configuration dialog box.
9 Enter Red Light in the UI_PROMPT_LIST field in the same row.
It is the text shown in the selection list for this item, displayed in the
middle part of the dialog box.
10 Enter 1 in the UI_VAL field in the same row.
It is a numerical value assigned to the selection from each group. These
numerical values are added up and matched to the value in the UI_SEL
column. This example only has one value.
11 Enter 1 in the UI_SEL field in the same row.
NOTE All UI_VAL and UI_SEL values must be inserted as text values in the
spreadsheet and not as numbers. An apostrophe character in front of the
number forces the spreadsheet software to interpret it as a text value. You
can also format the cells specifically as text. The text should appear left justified
in the cell. If any values appear right justified, they must change from numeric
to text values.
It is a numerical value matched to the sum total of the values in the
UI_VAL column for each selection made within a group. The
COMMAND_LIST value from this row is used to insert the selected
options.
12 Enter (c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil HLT1R #scl 8 nil) in the COMMAND_LIST
field.
It is the API call Circuit Builder uses to insert a component. See the API
documentation for more information.
13 Enter Selector Switch in the UI_PROMPT_LIST field in the next row.
It is the second option within the Extra Component option. The CODE,
COMMENTS, and UI_TITLE fields should remain blank.
14 Enter X in the UI_DEF field in this row. It defines the entry as the default
option. The default is used when the circuit is inserted using the Insert
button on the Circuit Selection dialog box. If the Configure button is
selected, the "X" entry is the preselected default in the Circuit
Configuration dialog box when the options for this marker block are
displayed
15 Enter 2 in the UI_VAL field in the same row.
16 Enter 2 in the UI_SEL field in the same row.
Add a new circuit | 1975
17 Enter (c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil HSS112 #scl 8 nil) in the
COMMAND_LIST field.
18 Enter NO Contact in the UI_PROMPT_LIST field in the next row.
19 Enter 3 in the UI_VAL field in the same row.
20 Enter 3 in the UI_SEL field in the same row.
21 Enter (c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil HCR21 #scl 8 nil) in the
COMMAND_LIST field.
22 Enter None in the UI_PROMPT_LIST field in the next row.
23 Enter 0 in the UI_VAL field in the same row.
24 Enter 0 in the UI_SEL field in the same row.
Leave the COMMAND_LIST field blank, meaning that if this option is
selected no action is needed.
25 Save the spreadsheet.
NOTE A new circuit codes sheet is not always needed. Depending on the circuit
and the circuit options, the information can be added to an existing sheet. In this
example, a new sheet was created to demonstrate the procedure.
Testing the circuit
Once you create the circuit template on page 1967, modified ACE_CIRCS on
page 1973 sheet, and added the circuit codes on page 1974 sheet, you are ready to
test your custom circuit.
1 Make sure that you save the spreadsheet changes and close the spreadsheet
file.
2 Open a new or existing drawing to insert the circuit. Make sure that the
drawing has a vertical 3-phase bus.
3 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Circuit Builder
drop-down Circuit Builder.
1976 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
4 Look for the new category you added, Custom Circuits, on the Circuit
Selection dialog box.
If it is not there, or is not in the place you wanted, go back to the
ACE_CIRCS on page 1973 exercise.
5 Expand the Custom Circuits category and select the circuit you added,
My 3-ph motor.
If it is not there or is not in the place you wanted, go back to the
ACE_CIRCS on page 1973 exercise.
6 Click Configure.
7 Select a location on the 3-phase bus.
If the wires do not connect to the bus in the way defined, go back to
Define wires stretching to connect to bus on page 1969.
8 Look through the circuit elements on the Circuit Configuration dialog
box. If the circuit element for the new marker block, Extra Component,
is not there, go back to Circuit codes sheet on page 1974.
9 Select Extra Component in Circuit Elements.
If the options, Red Light, Selector Switch, NO Contact, and None are not
displayed in the Select section, go back to Circuit codes sheet on page
1974.
If the default value for the Extra Component is not Selector Switch, go
back to Circuit codes sheet on page 1974.
10 Select a component from the list.
11 Select to insert all the circuit elements.
12 If the component selected for the new Extra Component option was not
inserted, go back to Circuit codes sheet on page 1974.
13 If the attribute values for the component are not predefined, LOC=FIELD
and DESC1=ADDED COMPONENT, go back to circuit template on page
1967.
14 If the three terminals are not numbered, T1, T2, and T3, go back to circuit
template on page 1967.
Add a new circuit | 1977
Circuit Builder - How to
Circuit Builder is controlled by a spreadsheet, a set of circuit template drawings,
and the electrical standards database file. The spreadsheet, circuit template
drawings, and the electrical standards database file can be modified to
customize Circuit Builder.
Spreadsheet
The spreadsheet defines the available circuits, circuit types, and defaults for
each option within a circuit. The default name for the Circuit Builder
spreadsheet is ace_circuit_builder.xls. The default location for the spreadsheet
is:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Support\
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE
{version}\Support\
The ace_circuit_builder.xls spreadsheet can be relocated into any of the normal
AutoCAD Electrical or AutoCAD support paths.
The circuit builder spreadsheet name can be overridden by setting the
environment variable, WD_CIRCBUILDER_FNAM, in the wd.env on page 1918
file.
circuit template drawings
The template for a selected circuit defines the placement for the individual
components and the wiring. The circuit template drawings use the following
naming convention.
ace_cb1_*.dwg - primary circuit template drawings
ace_cb2_*.dwg - branching or nested circuit template drawings
The default location for the circuit template drawings is the schematic library
folder:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE
{version}\Libs\{library}\
1978 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
One-line circuit templates have a 1- and the default location is in a 1-
folder under the schematic library folder.
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE {version}\Libs\{library}\1-
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\AcadE
{version}\Libs\{library}\1-
NOTE New templates do not have to follow this naming convention.
Electrical Standards database file
Circuit Builder uses an electrical standards database to define default values,
define engineering calculations, annotate circuits, and provide wire type
analysis. The electrical standards database, ace_electrical_standards.mdb, is
located in the catalog folder. The default location is:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\My
Documents\Acade {version}\AeData\Catalogs\
Windows Vista: C:\Users\{username}\Documents\Acade
{version}\AeData\Catalogs\
See also:
Circuit Builder spreadsheet on page 1940
Circuit Builder drawing templates on page 1945
Circuit Builder database on page 1949
Add a multiple catalog option
Some components need multiple catalog entries. Define them in the Circuit
Builder spreadsheet to add them in the Setup & Annotation section of the
Circuit Configuration dialog box.
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
Circuit Builder - How to | 1979
4 Find the component, for example CODE: PB01, COMMENTS: Stop,
UI_PROMPT_LIST: Stop.
Notice the values in TABLE0: PB and TITLE0: Push Button.
It indicates that the component can have a main catalog value. The
TABLE0 value is the table name for the catalog lookup. The TITLE0 value
is the title for the section in the Setup & Annotation area of the Circuit
Configuration dialog box.
5 Add a value in the TABLE1 and TITLE1 cells. For example, if the push
button requires a cover and it is found in the MISC_CAT table of the
catalog lookup database file, enter TABLE1: MISC_CAT and TITLE1: Cover.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
The next time Circuit Builder is run using the configure option, an extra
catalog section appears for this component.
Assign different attribute values on a multi-pole insert
There are two ways to predefine attribute values for a multi-pole component.
On the marker block for the component in the circuit template drawing.
In the Circuit Builder spreadsheet circuit codes sheet.
NOTE The attribute value defined on the marker block overrides any value defined
in the spreadsheet.
Marker block method
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the component.
2 Find the correct marker block for the component.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format _L=|{attribute
name}={attribute value} | {attribute name}={attribute value}. For example,
to assign different terminal numbers to the multi-pole insertion of three
motor terminals, enter _L=|TERM01=T1|TERM01=T2|TERM01=T3|.
1980 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
Spreadsheet method
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
4 Find the specific component, for example CODE: X001, COMMENTS:
Motor terminal connections, UI_PROMPT_LIST: Square.
There can be multiple selections within the group. For example, there is
a selection for the type of disconnecting means, and a selection to include
an auxiliary contact. Each selection is assigned a numerical value from
the UI_VAL field. The values are added to determine the appropriate
action for this combination of selections. The sum is matched to a value
in the UI_SEL field. Once this match is made, the COMMAND_LIST value,
ANNOTATE_LIST value, and so on, are used to insert and annotate the
selections.
Circuit Builder - How to | 1981
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this component.
For example, the last argument of this Insert Multi-pole Component API
call is used to predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra
is defined.
Before and after are shown:
Before: (c:ace_cb_multipole #xyz nil "HT0001" 3 #scl 4 nil)
After: (c:ace_cb_multipole #xyz nil "HT0001" 3 #scl 4
_L=|TERM01=T1|TERM01=T2|TERM01=T3|)
NOTE See the API documentation for more information.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
Assign attribute values using AutoLISP
An AutoLISP expression can be used to define a calculated or special value for
an attribute on a component. For example, you can calculate related values
such as Kilowatt (KW) based upon a selected horsepower value.
See Map motor parameters to the motor symbol attributes on page 1998 to map
the entered horsepower.
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the motor symbol.
2 Find the correct marker block for the motor symbol.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format {attribute
name}=(AutoLISP expression). For example, convert the HP value to
Kilowatts and push this value out to attribute RATING5 on the motor
symbol. Enter this expression on the MISC1 attribute of the marker block:
RATING5=(rtos (* @1@ 0.746) 2 2)
The "@1@" maps to the second entry (list is zero based) held in the #data
global variable, which is the entered horsepower value. Multiplying by
0.746 converts the horsepower (HP) to Kilowatts (KW).
1982 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
Conditionally trim or remove a wire segment
As Circuit Builder dynamically builds the circuit, a circuit element selection
can require that a wire is trimmed back or removed. For example, the circuit
can include an option for an indicator light. If no indicator light is selected,
the wire framework for it must be removed.
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the optional component. Take note of the value of the ORDER attribute.
2 Find the wires to remove or trim if the optional component is not selected.
3 Add marker blocks on each wire with the same ORDER attribute value as
the optional marker block for the component.
4 Assign the same CODE value to each trim wire marker block, for example
XY01.
Circuit Builder - How to | 1983
5 Save the circuit template drawing.
6 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
7 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
8 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
9 Find the optional component, for example CODE: LT01, COMMENTS:
Light, UI_PROMPT_LIST: Light.
10 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for the option that
would require a wire trim or removal. For example, add this command
call for the "No light" option in the spreadsheet:
(c:ace_cb_trim "XY01" nil) where XY01 is the CODE attribute value
assigned to each wire marker block.
NOTE See the API documentation for more information.
11 Save the spreadsheet.
1984 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Conditional component insertion
As Circuit Builder dynamically builds the circuit, a circuit element selection
may require a conditional component insertion. For example, there may be
an option to insert either a start push button or a N.O. relay contact at the
insertion point of a marker block. If a momentary push button is selected then
a seal contact should be inserted around the push button at the location
marked with a separate marker block. However, if the N.O. relay contact option
is selected, then no seal contact is needed and wires must be trimmed or
removed.
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the selected component, for example the momentary push button. Take
note of the value of its ORDER attribute.
2 Find the wire that should receive the conditional component. Add a
marker block with the same ORDER attribute value.
3 Assign a unique CODE attribute value to this conditional marker block,
for example XY02.
4 Find the wires to remove or trim if the conditional component is not
needed.
5 Add marker blocks on each of these wire segments. Edit the ORDER
attribute value to match the one on the marker block for the conditional
component.
6 Assign the same CODE value to each wire marker block, for example
XY01. This CODE value should not be the same as the one assigned to
the conditional component marker block.
7 Save the circuit template drawing.
Circuit Builder - How to | 1985
8 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
9 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
10 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
11 Find the optional component, for example CODE: PB02, COMMENTS:
Start, UI_PROMPT_LIST: Start.
12 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for the option that
would require the conditional insert. Multiple API calls can be used to
insert multiple components. For example:
(c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil "HPB11" #scl 8 nil)(c:ace_cb_insym "XY02" nil
"HMS21" #scl 8 nil)
Note the difference in the second call. Instead of passing the #xyz global
variable name that carries the XY coordinate of the main marker block,
it passes the "XY02" code name. This means that the "HMS21" symbol
will insert wherever marker block "XY02" is located in the inserted
template.
13 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for the option that
requires a wire trim or removal. For example:
(c:ace_cb_trim "XY01" nil) where XY01 is the CODE attribute value
assigned to each wire marker block.
Instead of passing the XY coordinate as the first argument, the "XY01"
code name is passed. It instructs Circuit Builder to find all marker blocks
with CODE attribute value "XY01" and with the target ORDER value and
trim or remove their underlying wires
NOTE See the API documentation for more information.
14 Save the spreadsheet.
Control the multi-pole insertion direction
The default build direction for a multi-pole component is down for horizontal
bus wires, and left to right for vertical bus wires. You can override the default
build direction.
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the multi-pole component.
2 Find the correct marker block for the component.
1986 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format _D={digit}, where 1=build
left to right, 2=build up, 4=build right to left, and 8=build down.
For example, if the template has a vertical 3-phase bus and the
disconnection means that marker block is located over the right-hand
wire, give its MISC1 attribute a value of "_D=4". It causes the child poles
of the multi-pole insert to move to the left to pick up the remaining two
bus wires.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
Control the bus wire spacing
You can set up a circuit template so the wire spacing between two or more
parallel bus wires is auto-adjusted. A marker block is positioned on each wire
and its CODE value references the (c:ace_cb_rung_spacing) API call in the
spreadsheet. The marker blocks with a common ORDER value are processed
as a group. One of the marked wires is designated as the "base" wire, meaning
that it is the one that does not move. The other marked bus wires in the group
are then positioned set distances away from the base wire.
Circuit Builder - How to | 1987
The base wire is determined in one of two ways:
The base wire is the marker block that has a MISC1 attribute with a value
of "_BASE".
If no MISC1 attribute has a _BASE value, the underlying wire that comes
closest to being colinear with the insertion point of the template is the
one that becomes the base wire.
A template can carry multiple groups of marker blocks indicating that the
underlying bus wires should auto-adjust. The CODE value can be the same
for all groups, but each group must have its own ORDER value.
Define the wire type
There are three ways to define the wire type.
On the marker block for the wire in the circuit template.
In the Circuit Builder spreadsheet circuit codes sheet.
Based on motor size selection.
NOTE The attribute value defined on the marker block overrides any value defined
in the spreadsheet.
Marker block method
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the wire.
2 Find the correct marker block for the wire.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format _WIRETYPE={layer
name}, for example, _WIRETYPE=BRN_10AWG.
1988 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
Spreadsheet method
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
4 Find the specific wire, for example CODE: WT01, and COMMENTS: Assign
motor wire type - phase 1.
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this wire. For
example, the last argument of this Set Wire type API call is used to
predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is defined.
Circuit Builder - How to | 1989
Before and after are shown:
Before: (c:ace_cb_set_wiretype #data 1 nil)
After:(c:ace_cb_set_wiretype #data 1 _WIRETYPE=BRN_10AWG)
NOTE See the API documentation for more information.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
Based on motor size selection
You can apply the minimum wire size for a selected motor load to the wire
type layer name. The value, which is extracted from the
ace_electrical_standards.mdb database, can be substituted for any @WSIZE@
string found in the _WIRETYPE= value. Use this variable in the MISC1
attribute on the wire marker block or in the spreadsheet as part of the wire
type API call.
Marker block method
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the wire.
2 Find the correct marker block for the wire.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format _WIRETYPE=@WSIZE@,
for example, _WIRETYPE=BRN_@WSIZE@.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
Spreadsheet method
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
1990 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
4 Find the specific wire, for example CODE: WT01, and COMMENTS: Assign
motor wire type - phase 1.
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this wire. For
example, the last argument of this Set Wire type API call is used to
predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is defined.
Before and after are shown:
Before: (c:ace_cb_set_wiretype #data 1 nil)
After:(c:ace_cb_set_wiretype #data 1 _WIRETYPE=BRN_@WSIZE@)
NOTE See the API documentation for more information.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
Define the wire type as no wire numbering
There are two ways to define the wire type and set it to no wire numbering.
On the marker block for the wire in the circuit template.
In the Circuit Builder spreadsheet circuit codes sheet.
NOTE The attribute value defined on the marker block overrides any value defined
in the spreadsheet.
Marker block method
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the wire.
2 Find the correct marker block for the wire.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format
_WIRENUMBERS=0;_WIRETYPE={layer name}.
_WIRENUMBERS=0 defines the layer as No Wire Numbering. Any
wire without this flag is created as a normal wire numbering layer by
default.
NOTE This flag applies only if the wire layer does not exist and is created
when the circuit is inserted.
_WIRETYPE={layer name} defines the layer name.
Circuit Builder - How to | 1991
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
Spreadsheet method
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
4 Find the specific wire, for example CODE: WT01, and COMMENTS: Assign
motor wire type - phase 1.
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this wire. For
example, the last argument of this Set Wire type API call is used to
predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is defined.
Before and after are shown:
Before: (c:ace_cb_set_wiretype #data 1 nil)
After:(c:ace_cb_set_wiretype #data 1
_WIRENUMBERS=0;_WIRETYPE=BRN_10AWG)
_WIRENUMBERS=0 defines the layer as No Wire Numbering. Any
wire without this flag is created as a normal wire numbering layer by
default.
NOTE This flag applies only if the wire layer does not exist and is created
when the circuit is inserted.
_WIRETYPE=BRN_10AWG defines the layer name.
NOTE See the API documentation for more information.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
1992 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Format the numeric tag of the motor symbol in a wire
number
You can include the motor symbol tag number assignment in connected wire
number assignments. It requires coordination between the motor symbol
insertion and the wire number insertion. The motor symbol must insert before
the wire number. The order of insertion is controlled by the ORDER attribute
value on the marker blocks within the circuit template drawing. The marker
block ORDER attribute value for the motor symbol must be a lower number
than the ORDER value of the marker block for the wire number in the circuit
template drawing. When the wire number is inserted, the motor tag value can
be incorporated in to the wire number.
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
4 Find the motor symbol, for example CODE: MTR03, COMMENTS: Motor
symbol, UI_PROMPT_LIST: 3ph motor.
There can be multiple selections within the group. For example, there is
a selection for the type of disconnecting means, and a selection to include
an auxiliary contact. Each selection is assigned a numerical value from
the UI_VAL field. The values are added together to determine the
appropriate action for this combination of selections. The sum is matched
to a value in the UI_SEL field. Once this match is made, the
COMMAND_LIST value, ANNOTATE_LIST value, and so on, are used to
insert and annotate the selections.
5 Edit the API call in the ANNOTATE_LIST column for this component.
For example, it might look like this with two API calls concatenated:
(c:ace_cb_anno #data 0)(c:ace_cb_save "@MOTOR_NUM@" "TAG1*" nil
1)
The second one, c:ace_cb_save, saves the TAG1 attribute value on the
motor in to memory under an index tag of @MOTOR_NUM@. This
value can be referenced when the subsequent wire number marker blocks
are processed.
NOTE See the API documentation for more information on c:ace_cb_save.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
Circuit Builder - How to | 1993
7 Find the marker blocks for the wire numbers that are tied to the motor
tag. These could be on the main circuit template or on a nested template
drawing. Open the circuit template drawing.
8 Find the correct marker block for the wire number.
9 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the @MOTOR_NUM@ in the format
where you want the motor tag value. For example,
_TAGFMT=@MOTOR_NUM@-%N or to predefine a wire number,
_TAGFMT=@MOTOR_NUM@-T1A.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
10 Save the circuit template drawings.
Format the numeric tag of the motor symbol into other
component tags
You can include the motor symbol tag number assignment in other
components in the circuit. It requires coordination between the motor symbol
insertion and the insertion of the other components. The motor symbol must
1994 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
insert before these other components. The order of insertion is controlled by
the ORDER attribute value on the marker blocks within the circuit template
drawing. The marker block ORDER attribute value for the motor symbol must
be a lower number than the ORDER values of the marker blocks for the other
components in the circuit template drawing. When the other components
are inserted, the motor tag value can be incorporated into the subsequent
component tags.
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
4 Find the motor symbol, for example CODE: MTR03, COMMENTS: Motor
symbol, UI_PROMPT_LIST: 3ph motor.
There can be multiple selections within the group. For example, there is
a selection for the type of disconnecting means, and a selection to include
an auxiliary contact. Each selection is assigned a numerical value from
the UI_VAL field. The values are added together to determine the
appropriate action for this combination of selections. The sum is matched
to a value in the UI_SEL field. Once this match is made, the
COMMAND_LIST value, ANNOTATE_LIST value, and so on, are used to
insert and annotate the selections.
5 Edit the API call in the ANNOTATE_LIST column for this component.
For example, it might look like this with two API calls concatenated:
(c:ace_cb_anno #data 0)(c:ace_cb_save "@MOTOR_NUM@" "TAG1*" nil
1)
The second one, c:ace_cb_save, saves the TAG1 attribute value on the
motor in to memory under an index tag of @MOTOR_NUM@. This
value can be referenced when the subsequent component marker blocks
are processed.
NOTE See the API documentation for more information on c:ace_cb_save.
6 Find the component you want the tag to follow the motor tag, for
example CODE: CAP01, COMMENTS: Power factor correction capacitor.
7 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this component.
For example, it might look like this:
(c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil "VCA113_1-" #scl 8 "%N=@MOTOR_NUM@")
Circuit Builder - How to | 1995
The last argument of this API call, %N=@MOTOR_NUM@, tells Circuit
Builder to use the TAG1 value from the motor, saved as
@MOTOR_NUM@, as the number part of the tag for this component.
For example, if the component tag format is defined on page 238 as
%S-%F-%N, the numeric part of the motor tag is used for the %N
part of the generated component tag.
You can also define this using a fixed _TAGFMT option. Using this
approach overrides the component tag format defined on page 238 for
the drawing. Some examples:
"_TAGFMT=%F@MOTOR_NUM@" - used with the component family
code string, %F.
"_TAGFMT=%S-@MOTOR_NUM@%F" - used with the SHEET_NAME
value of the drawing, %S.
"_TAGFMT=CA@MOTOR_NUM@" - used with a defined text prefix.
8 Repeat for each component that should base the tag value off the motor
tag value.
9 Save the spreadsheet.
NOTE It can also be done by defining the MISC1 attribute on the marker blocks
for each component as described in Format the numeric tag of the motor symbol
in a wire number on page 1993.
Link a child contact to the parent
As Circuit Builder dynamically builds the circuit, each component receives a
component tag. A child contact must link to a parent component to receive
the same component tag as the parent.
The parent and child components are automatically linked by Circuit Builder
if they each have the same default tag value. For example, the motor starter
coil and auxiliary contacts both have a default value M.
There can be more than one parent/child relationship within the overall circuit
with the same default tag. The overall circuit includes the main circuit template
and any branching or nested circuit templates. For example, a reversing motor
starter has two starter coils, forward and reverse. Each parent coil must link
to the correct child auxiliary contacts and power contacts but they might all
have the same default tag value, M. To accomplish the correct parent/child
links follow these steps.
1996 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
1 Open the circuit template drawings that contain the parent and child
marker blocks. There can be more than one circuit template drawing
involved, for example a main template with power contacts and a nested
template with the starter coils and interlocking auxiliary contacts.
2 Find the correct marker block for each component that requires a new
default tag link.
3 Edit the MISC1 attribute value adding _PRETAG={new default tag link}.
For example, add _PRETAG=MF for the forward motor coil and contacts,
and _PRETAG=MR for the reverse motor coil and contacts.
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon (:).
4 Save the circuit template drawings.
When Circuit Builder inserts the nested circuit containing the child
contacts, it matches these predefined tag values with the correct parent
coil.
Circuit Builder - How to | 1997
Map motor parameters to the motor symbol attributes
When a motor circuit is selected, a special motor setup/annotation function
is called. This special function is flagged by a marker block on the template
with a CODE value which maps to a line in the circuit codes sheet marked
"!MCC_CTRL" in the UI_TITLE field. This function references the
ace_electrical_standards.mdb file to determine full load current and wire size
values for a selected set of motor input parameters.
The values generated by this motor setup/annotation function are not
automatically written to attributes on the components or wire types on the
circuit. These values are saved as an indexed list in an AutoLISP global variable
called #data. Global means that the data is saved in memory and is available
while the Circuit Builder continues to construct the circuit. As Circuit Builder
processes subsequent marker blocks of the circuit, it can be set up to pull one
or more of these saved values from the global and push them out to attributes
on the components or used to format appropriate wiretype layer names
This motor setup/annotation must be flagged to happen early on. It is done
with an ORDER value which is set to a low number or 0. For example, if the
motor full load amps value is used to determine the main disconnect circuit
breaker sizing, this data must be in memory before the main disconnecting
means marker block is processed.
1998 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
The elements in the first sublist of the "#data" list are held in memory in the
following order. The values related to the motor are held in the first eight
elements. See the API documentation for a complete list of elements.
0 Motor Type
1 Power
2 Units
3 Voltage
4 Phase
5 Hertz (Hz)
6 Speed (RPM)
7 Full Load Amps (FLA)
NOTE Circuit Builder numbers this indexed list starting at 0 rather than 1.
There are two ways to map these values to the attributes on a component.
On the marker block for the motor, fuse, or circuit breaker symbol in the
circuit template drawing.
In the Circuit Builder spreadsheet circuit codes sheet.
NOTE The attribute value defined on the marker block overrides any value defined
in the spreadsheet.
Marker block method
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the motor, fuse, or circuit breaker symbol.
2 Find the correct marker block for the symbol.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format {attribute name}=@#@.
Replace the # with the appropriate index digit to map the correct
element. For example, to map the horsepower to the RATING2 attribute,
enter "RATING2=HP: @1@". To also map the full load amp value to the
RATING4 attribute, enter "RATING2=HP: @1@;RATING4=Full load: @7@
amps". Remember, the indexed list of values is zero based.
Circuit Builder - How to | 1999
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
Spreadsheet method
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
4 Find the motor symbol section, for example CODE: MTR03, COMMENTS:
Motor symbol, UI_PROMPT_LIST: 3ph motor.
There can be multiple selections within the group. For example, there is
a selection for the type of disconnecting means, and a selection to include
an auxiliary contact. Each selection is assigned a numerical value from
the UI_VAL field. The values are added to determine the appropriate
2000 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
action for this combination of selections. The sum is matched to a value
in the UI_SEL field. Once this match is made, the COMMAND_LIST value,
ANNOTATE_LIST value, and so on, are used to insert and annotate the
selections.
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this motor symbol.
For example, the last argument of this Insert Component API call is used
to predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is defined.
Before and after are shown:
Before:(c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil "HMO13" #scl 8 nil)
After:(c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil "HMO13" #scl 8 RATING2=HP: @1@)
NOTE See the API documentation for more information.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
Override the default tag format
There are two ways to override the drawing tag format for a component.
On the marker block for the component in the circuit template drawing.
In the Circuit Builder spreadsheet circuit codes sheet.
NOTE The attribute value defined on the marker block overrides any value defined
in the spreadsheet.
Marker block method
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the component.
2 Find the correct marker block for the component.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format _TAGFMT={format}, for
example, _TAGFMT=DISC-%N.
Circuit Builder - How to | 2001
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
Spreadsheet method
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
4 Find the specific component, for example CODE: Q001, COMMENTS:
Disconnecting means, UI_PROMPT_LIST: Disconnect switch and fuses.
There can be multiple selections within the group. For example, there is
a selection for the type of disconnecting means, and a selection to include
an auxiliary contact. Each selection is assigned a numerical value from
the UI_VAL field. The values are added to determine the appropriate
2002 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
action for this combination of selections. The sum is matched to a value
in the UI_SEL field. Once this match is made, the COMMAND_LIST value,
ANNOTATE_LIST value, and so on, are used to insert and annotate the
selections.
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this component.
For example, the last argument of this Insert Multi-pole Component API
call is used to predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra
is defined.
Before and after are shown:
Before: (c:ace_cb_multipole #xyz nil "HDS11F" 3 #scl 4 nil)
After: (c:ace_cb_multipole #xyz nil "HDS11F" 3 #scl 4
_TAGFMT=DISC-%N)
NOTE See the API documentation for more information.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
Override the default wire number format
There are two ways to override the drawing wire number format for a wire
number.
On the marker block positioned over the wire in the circuit template
drawing.
In the Circuit Builder spreadsheet circuit codes sheet.
NOTE The attribute value defined on the marker block overrides any value defined
in the spreadsheet.
Marker block method
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the wire number.
2 Find the correct marker block for the wire number.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format _TAGFMT={format}, for
example, _TAGFMT=%N-T1.
Circuit Builder - How to | 2003
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
Spreadsheet method
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
4 Find the specific wire number, for example CODE: WN01F, and
COMMENTS: Insert wire number on network, use drawing defaults, mark
it as fixed.
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this component.
For example, the last argument of this Insert Wire Number API call is
used to predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is
defined.
Before and after are shown:
Before: (c:ace_cb_wnum nil nil 1 nil)
2004 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
After:(c:ace_cb_wnum nil nil 1 _TAGFMT=%N-T1)
NOTE See the API documentation for more information.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
Predefine attribute values
There are three ways to predefine attribute values for a component.
On the marker block for the component in the circuit template drawing.
In the Circuit Builder spreadsheet circuit codes sheet.
Annotation presets on page 2007 - provides the ability to select which
attribute values to apply when the circuit is inserted.
NOTE An annotation preset value overrides the attribute value defined on the
marker block. The attribute value defined on the marker block overrides any value
defined in the spreadsheet.
Marker block method
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the component.
2 Find the correct marker block for the component.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format {attribute name}={attribute
value}, for example, DESC1=MOTOR.
Circuit Builder - How to | 2005
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
Spreadsheet method
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Open the circuit code sheet with the same name as the SHEET_NAME
value, for example SHEET_NAME: 3ph_H.
4 Find the specific component, for example CODE: PB01, COMMENTS:
STOP, UI_PROMPT_LIST: Push button - Standard.
There can be multiple selections within the group. For example, there is
a selection for the type of disconnecting means, and a selection to include
an auxiliary contact. Each selection is assigned a numerical value from
the UI_VAL field. The values are added to determine the appropriate
action for this combination of selections. The sum is matched to a value
in the UI_SEL field. Once this match is made, the COMMAND_LIST value,
ANNOTATE_LIST value, and so on, are used to insert and annotate the
selections.
2006 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
5 Edit the API call in the COMMAND_LIST column for this component.
For example, the last argument of this Insert Component API call is used
to predefine MISC1 coded values with nil when nothing extra is defined.
Before and after are shown:
Before: (c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil "HPB12" #scl 8 nil)
After: (c:ace_cb_insym #xyz nil "HPB12" #scl 8
DESC1=CONVEYOR;DESC2=SYSTEM RESET)
NOTE See the API documentation for more information.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
See also:
Predefine attribute values using annotation presets on page 2007
Predefine attribute values using annotation presets
Annotation presets allow you to:
Predefine description text, installation, location values for individual
components in the circuit.
Select which attribute values to apply to the circuit when it is built.
Edit the attribute values before the circuit is built.
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Open the ACE_CIRCS sheet.
3 Find the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, for example CATEGORY: 3ph
Motor Circuit and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
4 Assign a code value in the ANNO_CODE field if there isnt one, for
example ANNO_3M.
5 In AutoCAD Electrical, open the circuit template drawing listed in the
DWG_TEMPLATE field, for example ace_cb1_FVNR_H.dwg.
6 Open the ANNO_CODE sheet in the spreadsheet.
This sheet provides a link between the circuit you select (identified by
the ANNO_CODE value), a specific marker block (identified by its CODE
value), and a specific attribute on the marker block.
Circuit Builder - How to | 2007
7 Enter the ANNO_CODE value from earlier in the ANNO_CODE field of
a blank row, ANNO_3M.
For this example, you define some attribute values for the motor symbol.
8 In AutoCAD Electrical, find the marker block that defines the insertion
point for the motor symbol. Find the CODE attribute value, for example
MTR03.
9 In the spreadsheet, add a new line in the ANNO_CODE table for each
attribute you wish to predefine. For example:
ANNO_CODE = ANNO_3M. It is the value from the ACE_CIRCS sheet
for this circuit.
CODE = MTR03. It is the value from the CODE attribute on the marker
block.
ATTRIBUTE = LOC. It is the attribute name you want to predefine.
PROMPT = Motor - Location code. This is the text used on the
Annotation Presets on page 759 dialog box. This dialog box is displayed
if you select the Presets - List button when the circuit is inserted.
Default = FIELD. It is the attribute value to apply to the LOC attribute
when the motor symbol is inserted.
10 Repeat for each attribute value you want to predefine. The ANNO_CODE
and CODE values should be the same for each attribute on this motor
symbol.
11 Save and close the spreadsheet.
You are now ready to test the changes.
12 Click Schematic tab Insert Components panel Circuit Builder
drop-down Circuit Builder.
13 Select the circuit CATEGORY and TYPE, CATEGORY: 3ph Motor Circuit
and TYPE: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
14 Select the Presets button in the Special Annotation section.
15 Select the Lists button next to Presets.
The Annotation Presets dialog box displays. Any attributes with non-blank
values are selected by default and applied to the symbol when it is
2008 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
inserted. You can select which attribute values to apply or edit the values
as necessary.
16 Select OK.
17 On the Circuit Selection dialog box, select Insert.
The circuit is built and the attribute values are applied.
Predefine a wire number
Predefine a wire number on the wire number marker block on the circuit
template drawing.
1 Open the circuit template drawing that contains the marker block for
the wire number.
2 Find the correct marker block for the wire number.
3 Edit its MISC1 attribute value using the format _TAGFMT={wire
number}, for example, _TAGFMT=24COM.
Circuit Builder - How to | 2009
NOTE The MISC1 attribute value can contain multiple special text flags which
direct Circuit Builder to handle the component or underlying wire in a special
way. When you add new values, do not overwrite any other special flag values.
Separate each one with a semicolon.
4 Save the circuit template drawing.
NOTE To get a fixed wire number, you must adjust the API call in the spreadsheet
to indicate it. See the API documentation for more information.
Set circuit element defaults
The first sheet of the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ACE_CIRCS, defines circuit
categories, types, main templates, and associated circuit code sheet names.
These circuit code sheets include a default option for each circuit element.
For example, the circuit template has a marker block that references a main
disconnecting means in the circuit code sheet for the template. The circuit
code sheet lists four options:
Circuit Breaker
Fuses
Fused Disconnect
Disconnect Switch (non-fused)
2010 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
When the Circuit Configuration dialog box opens, and you select Main
Disconnecting Means from the Circuit Elements tree structure, the Fused
Disconnect option is selected. If you select Insert, instead of Configure, to
insert the circuit without user prompts, the Fused Disconnect is used for the
main disconnecting means.
If you always want a different option selected or used as the default, this value
can be changed.
1 Open the Circuit Builder spreadsheet, ace_circuit_builder.xls.
2 Find the circuit category and type in the ACE_CIRCS sheet, for example
Category: 3ph Motor Circuit and Type: Horizontal - FVNR - non reversing.
3 Find the value in the SHEET_NAME column, for example 3ph_H. Open
the worksheet by selecting on the 3ph_H tab.
4 Find the circuit element by looking at the values in the COMMENTS and
UI_TITLE columns. For example, COMMENTS: Disconnecting Means and
UI_TITLE: Main Disconnect.
Notice there are multiple options for this circuit element as listed in the
UI_PROMPT_LIST column. The current default option is indicated by an
X in the UI_DEF column.
5 Move the X in the UI_DEF column to the row containing the option
you want as the default, for example Circuit Breaker. Make sure that only
one row for the group contains an X.
6 Save the spreadsheet.
Set up component auto-sizing
Circuit Builder can calculate the rating for components in the circuit based
upon some multiple of the full load amp value of the motor or load. For
example, the electrical code standard might state that a disconnect switch
must be rated not less than 115% of the load amperage. An expected maximum
load of 28 amps would require a disconnect switch rated at not less than 115%
of 28 amps, or 32.2 amps. If standard switch ratings are 30 and 60 amps, a 60
amp switch would be selected.
Such an automatic calculation can be accomplished by creating a relationship
between the call in the ANNOTATE_LIST field value in the circuit codes sheet
on page 1940 of the circuit builder spreadsheet, and the MOTOR_I_* tables in
the electrical standards database on page 1949.
Circuit Builder - How to | 2011
Here is how it is defined:
The CODE value of the marker block on the inserted circuit template
drawing, points at a group of rows in the circuit codes sheet. These rows
define the types of components that can be inserted at the location of this
marker block.
The row for the inserted component, either the default component or the
component selected on the Circuit Configuration dialog box, contains an
ANNOTATION_LIST column value.
The ANNOTATE_LIST column value contains a call to the API function
c:ace_cb_anno2. This function includes a code argument like A1.
The code argument should match a code value in the MOTOR_I_DESC
table of the electrical standards database file.
Here is an example for a disconnect switch entry:
(c:ace_cb_anno2 nil A1 RATING1 0 nil)
In this example, A1 is the code to match in the MOTOR_I_DESC table
(for Disconnect switch non-fused), and RATING1 is the attribute on
the inserted disconnect switch symbol to receive the final calculated amp
value.
The MOTOR_I_CALC table also has a column of data with a label that
matches the code used in the C:ace_cb_anno2 call.
2012 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
The cell in the MOTOR_I_CALC table contains an expression using I to
represent the full load amps of the motor. This expression is evaluated
using the actual full load amps for the motor. The calculated value is used
to determine the value to assign to the attribute.
Valid operations are +-*/^. The ^ character is the exponential function.
For example, I^2 is I squared, while I^0.5 is the square root of I.
If-then-else statements are supported including one level of nested
statements. For example, (if (I > 400) then (I * 8) else (I * 11)) means the
calculated amp value is eight times FLA current for 0-400 amps and 11
times for greater than FLA of 400 amps. One level of nesting is supported.
(if (I >= 9.0) then (I * 1.25) else if (I < 2.0) then (I * 3.0) else (I * 1.67)
means the calculated value is set to (I * 1.67) if I is less than 9 but greater
or equal to 2.0 amps. If less than 2.0 amps it is (I * 3.0) and if greater than
or equal to 9.0 amps it is (I * 1.25).
Valid Boolean operations are >, <. >=. <=, =.
The MOTOR_I_MAP table contains a row with a matching code value,
such as A1.
The result of the calculation, made from the expression in the
MOTOR_I_CALC table, is compared to the MAX values in the
MOTOR_I_MAP table to determine the appropriate RATING value. In the
earlier example, the 28 amp motor load multiplied by 1.15 yields 32.2
amps minimum for A1. This means that a match is made on the record
with a MAX value of 60 and yields a 60A switch rating.
The RATING value is assigned to the attribute specified in the
c:ace_cb_anno2 call, for example RATING1.
Define an optional catalog assignment to the component by adding a value
in the DEFAULT field in the MOTOR_I_MAP table. The format is
Circuit Builder - How to | 2013
MFG={manufacturer};CAT={catalog}. For example, an A3 entry for 15A
time-delay fuses might look like the following example:
MFG=BUSSMAN;CAT=KTK-R-15
When a component has multiple calculated values such as a disconnect switch
with fuses, the two RATING attributes for the component are semicolon
delimited, as shown in this example:
(c:ace_cb_anno2 nil A7 RATING1;RATING2 nil 0)
The MOTOR_I_MAP table contains corresponding semicolon delimited values
in the RATING column.
NOTE See the API documentation for more information on the Circuit Builder API
calls.
Stretch and connect wiring from a nested template
A marker block is placed at or near the end of a wire on the circuit template
that indicates to Circuit Builder that the wire should try and connect to a
nearby wire. The marker block should be placed at or near the end of the wire
that must stretch.
There are two options that can be used in the MISC1 attribute value.
n is the number of wires to skip over before connection is at-
tempted. If the _WIRESKIP flag is missing or set to 0, Circuit
_WIRESKIP=n
Builder stretches and connects to the first wire it encounters. If
the value is 1, it skips over one wire before trying to make a
connection.
n is the number of trap distance units to search for a wire
connection. To see the trap distance value for a drawing, look
_MAXTRAPCOUNT=n
on the Drawing Properties dialog box, Drawing format tab. The
2014 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
trap distance cannot be set. It is calculated from the drawing
scale.
NOTE If this value is not defined on the marker block, Circuit
Builder uses a distance value equal to 200 times the trap distance
value of the drawing.
The CODE value of the marker block must tie in to the
(c:ace_cb_stretch_wire_connect #xyz #misc1) API call in the spreadsheet. The
values on the MISC1 attributes are used for the #misc1 argument.
Circuit Builder - How to | 2015
2016 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
NOTE If the marked wire has a terminal at its end, Circuit Builder stretches the
wire and moves the terminal. It stretches based on the origin of the connected
terminal rather than the end of the wire.
Build your own symbols
Build your own symbols
You can use the Symbol Builder to create an AutoCAD Electrical symbol or to
convert existing non-AutoCAD Electrical symbols. This utility builds an
AutoCAD Electrical symbol by either adding AutoCAD Electrical attributes to
Build your own symbols | 2017
the geometry of the symbol or by converting text entities to AutoCAD Electrical
attributes.
You can also use AutoCAD attribute definition and editing commands to do
the same thing. Use this tool to quickly pick and place attributes. It tracks
what attributes are present and checks your work to make sure that any
AutoCAD Electrical required attributes are not omitted. For this exercise, you
create a symbol and add AutoCAD Electrical attributes to the new geometry.
Symbol Builder works in the Block Editor environment. You can add or modify
the geometry of the symbol using standard AutoCAD commands within this
environment.
Create a parent schematic symbol
In this exercise, you create a power supply using the Symbol Builder tool.
NOTE If you exit out of the Symbol Builder, restart it, and on the Select
Symbol/Objects dialog box, click Select objects and select any graphics and
attributes you added so far. You can then resume from where you left off.
1 In an AutoCAD drawing, draw a rectangle on the drawing.
NOTE You can also create and modify the graphics for the symbol in the
Block Editor environment.
2 Click Schematic tab Other Tools panel Symbol Builder drop-down
Symbol Builder.
3 In the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box, Attribute template section,
browse to the Library path
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\jic125
4 In the Attribute template section, choose Symbol: Horizontal Parent.
2018 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
5 In the Attribute template section, choose Type: Generic.
6 In the Select from drawing section, click Select objects and select the
rectangle.
7 Select OK.
Add attributes
In this part of the exercise, you insert some AutoCAD Electrical attributes from
the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor. You are not limited to these attributes,
and you can include your own user-defined attributes on the AutoCAD
Electrical block files.
NOTE The TAG1 attribute is the only one required for a parent schematic symbol.
The other attributes in the Required section are expected on a parent schematic
symbol, however the symbol is recognized as a parent symbol without them.
1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible,
Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Palette Visibility Toggle.
2 Select the TAG1 attribute.
3 Select the Properties tool to launch the Insert/Edit Attributes dialog
box.
4 Change the height to 0.125 and Justify to Center.
5 Enter PS as the Value. It is the default code used as the %F value of the
tag format (such as CR , PB, LT)
6 Select OK.
7 Click the Insert Attribute tool.
8 Select an insertion point for the attribute.
NOTE You can also right-click and select Insert Attribute or drag the attribute
to insert it.
Build your own symbols | 2019
9 Select DESC1, click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert it below
TAG1.
10 Repeat to insert the INST and LOC attributes above TAG1.
11 Select MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE. Click the Insert Attribute tool, and
insert them near the center of the rectangle.
NOTE If the CAT and ASSYCODE attributes are not listed they are inserted
with MFG as a group.
12 Repeat to insert the FAMILY attribute near the center of the rectangle.
13 With FAMILY still highlighted in the Symbol Builder Attribute
Editor, select the Properties tool. Enter PS as the Value and OK. This
assigns the %F value to the FAMILY attribute inserted.
Add wire connection attributes
You can define wire connection points and terminal text for the library symbol.
When you add a wire connection, you select the style, the direction the wire
connects from, and whether to include the optional TERMxx and TERMDESCxx
attributes. In this exercise, wire connection attributes are inserted at the left,
bottom, and right side of the symbol.
1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible,
2020 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Palette Visibility Toggle.
2 Expand the Wire Connection section of the Symbol Builder Attribute
Editor.
3 Expand the Direction/Style list and select Others to launch the Insert
Wire Connections dialog box.
4 On the Insert Wire Connections dialog box, select Terminal Style: Screw.
5 Select Connection Direction: Left.
6 Check Use this configuration as default. This directs Symbol Builder to
use the current Terminal Style and Scale as the default in the drop-down
list.
7 (Optional) Enter L1 as the TERM01 value. This sets L1 as the default
terminal pin number when the symbol is used.
8 (Optional) Select TERMDESC01 in the Pin Information section and click
Delete. This directs Symbol Builder not to insert the optional
TERMDESCxx attribute with the wire connection attribute.
9 Click Insert and select in the center of the left-hand side of the rectangle
as shown. The wire connection attribute, X4TERM01, and the terminal
pin attribute, TERM01, are inserted.
Build your own symbols | 2021
10 Back on the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, expand the Wire Connection
list and select Bottom/Screw.
11 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the terminal in
the bottom center of the rectangle.
12 Select Right/Screw from the Wire Connection Direction/Style list.
13 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the terminal in the
center of the right-hand side of the rectangle.
14 In the Pins section, enter GND in the TERM02 value, and L2 in the
TERM03 value.
2022 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Finishing the parent symbol
1 Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Done.
2 Click Base Point: Pick point and select the center of the rectangle.
3 Select Wblock. Wblock creates the symbol .dwg file, while Block creates
the symbol for this drawing file only.
4 Enter the Name and file path or keep the default. AutoCAD Electrical
provides a default name for the new symbol based on the attribute
template selected. Avoid changing the first four letters of the file name
and limit the total length to 32 characters.
5 (Optional) If you are going to add the symbol to the icon menu at a later
time using the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1269, check Icon image. Enter
the image name and folder.
6 (Optional) Click Details to see the Symbol Audit on page 371 dialog box
listing potential issues with your symbol.
7 Select OK.
8 Select Close Block Editor from the block editor toolbar.
9 (Optional) Select Yes to insert the symbol on the drawing and select a
location. If you place the component on an existing wire, the wire breaks.
The component tag is assigned.
Additional options
The additional options for creating a symbol listed are not used for this
example, but you can use them when creating your own symbol.
Optional Attributes: The attributes listed in this section are allowed on a
parent symbol. You can also add attributes to the Required or Optional
list using the following steps.
1 Select the Add Attribute tool to launch the Insert/Edit Attributes
dialog box.
2 Enter the attribute name as the Tag value.
3 Enter all property values.
Build your own symbols | 2023
4 Click Insert to insert the attribute or OK to add it to the list without
inserting it.
Link Lines: Inserts Link Line attributes so the program can draw dashed
link lines between a parent symbol and its related child contact. It requires
special attributes at the point where the dashed line connects to the symbol.
1 Expand the Link Lines section.
2 Select a direction from the Direction list.
3 Select the Insert Link Lines tool.
4 Select a location for the Link Line attribute.
RATING or POS sections: You can add up to 12 Rating and Position
attributes. If the attribute template contains a RATING1 or POS1 attribute,
or you add one, these sections are available on the Symbol Builder Attribute
Editor.
1 Expand the RATING or POS section.
2 Select the Add Next tool.
3 Pick an insertion point.
Convert Text to Attribute dialog box: If you selected existing text entities
from the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box, or added text while in the
Block Editor environment, this option converts existing text entities to
AutoCAD Electrical attributes in the same location as the original text.
1 Select the Convert Text to Attribute tool from the Symbol
Builder toolbar to launch the dialog box.
2 Select a text entry in the list and click the arrow pointing at the
attribute name.
3 Repeat for all text entities.
4 Click Done. The text entity is converted to the attribute. The text
value becomes the default value for the attribute.
2024 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Convert text: If you selected existing text entities from the Select
Symbol/Objects dialog box, or added text while in the Block Editor
environment, this option converts a single text entity to an AutoCAD
Electrical attribute in the same location as the original text.
1 Select an attribute on the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor.
2 Select the Convert Text tool.
3 Select the text entity. The text entity is converted to the attribute.
The text value becomes the default value for the attribute.
Audit Symbol: At any time you can audit on page 371 the symbol to find
any potential issues with your symbol and symbol name.
Create a schematic terminal symbol
In this exercise, you create a schematic terminal using the Symbol Builder
tool.
NOTE If you exit out of the Symbol Builder, restart it, and on the Select
Symbol/Objects dialog box, click Select objects and select any graphics and
attributes you added so far. You can then resume from where you left off.
1 In an AutoCAD drawing, draw a rectangle on the drawing.
NOTE You can also create and modify the graphics for the symbol in the
Block Editor environment.
2 Click Schematic tab Other Tools panel Symbol Builder drop-down
Symbol Builder.
3 In the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box, Attribute template section,
browse to the Library path
Build your own symbols | 2025
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\jic125
4 In the Attribute template section, choose Symbol: Horizontal Terminal.
5 In the Attribute template section, choose Type: Terminal with wire
number.
6 In the Select from drawing section:, click Select objects and select the
rectangle.
7 Select OK.
Add attributes
In this part of the exercise, you insert some AutoCAD Electrical attributes from
the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor. You are not limited to these attributes,
and you can include your own user-defined attributes on the AutoCAD
Electrical block files.
NOTE The TAGSTRIP attribute is the only one required for a schematic terminal.
The other attributes in the Required section are expected on a schematic terminal,
however the symbol is recognized as a schematic terminal without them.
1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible,
Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Palette Visibility Toggle.
2 Select the TAGSTRIP attribute.
3 Select the Properties tool to launch the Insert/Edit Attributes dialog
box.
4 Change the height to 0.125 and Justify to Center.
5 Select OK.
6 Click the Insert Attribute tool.
2026 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
7 Insert the attribute above the rectangle.
8 Select WIRENO, click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert it above
TAGSTRIP. Use the Properties tool to change it to Justify = Center.
9 Select MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE. Click the Insert Attribute tool, and
insert them near the center of the rectangle.
NOTE If the CAT and ASSYCODE attributes are not listed they are inserted
with MFG as a group.
Add wire connection attributes
You can define wire connection points for the library symbol. When you add
a wire connection, you select the style and the direction the wire connects
from. In this exercise, wire connection attributes are inserted at the left, right,
top, and bottom of the terminal so that it can be inserted in either horizontal
or vertical wires.
1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible,
Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Palette Visibility Toggle.
2 Expand the Wire Connection section of the Symbol Builder Attribute
Editor.
3 Select Left/None.
NOTE If the default terminal style is not None, select Others and change the
default style to None. This wire connection style contains attributes only.
Build your own symbols | 2027
4 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the wire
connection in the center of the left-hand side of the rectangle. Use the
Midpoint OSnap to insert the wire connection attribute in the middle of
the line.
5 The wire connection insertion remains active until you press Enter. Press
R{spacebar} and insert the wire connection in the center of the
right-hand side of the rectangle.
6 Press T{spacebar} and insert the wire connection in the center of the
top of the rectangle.
7 Press B{spacebar} and insert the wire connection in the center of the
bottom of the rectangle. Press Enter.
Finishing the terminal symbol
1 Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Done.
2 Click Base Point: Pick point and select the center of the rectangle.
3 Select Wblock. Wblock creates the symbol .dwg file, while Block creates
the symbol for this drawing file only.
4 Enter the Name and file path or keep the default. AutoCAD Electrical
provides a default name for the new symbol based on the attribute
template selected. Avoid changing the first four letters of the file name
and limit the total length to 32 characters.
One-line symbols follow the same naming convention as schematic
parent and child symbols. For convenience the one-line symbols provided
have a 1- suffix. However, the symbol name does not define the symbol
2028 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
as a one-line symbol. This is defined by the WDTYPE attribute on page
335 value of 1- on the symbol, or a 1-1 on a one-line bus-tap symbol.
5 (Optional) If you are going to add the symbol to the icon menu at a later
time using the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1269, check Icon image. Enter
the image name and folder.
6 (Optional) Click Details to see the Symbol Audit on page 371 dialog box
listing potential issues with your symbol.
7 Select OK.
8 Select Close Block Editor from the block editor toolbar.
9 (Optional) Select Yes to insert the symbol on the drawing and select a
location. If you place the terminal on an existing wire, the wire breaks.
The terminal tag is assigned.
Create a one-line parent symbol
In this exercise, you create a one-line circuit breaker parent using the Symbol
Builder tool.
NOTE If you exit out of the Symbol Builder, restart it, and on the Select
Symbol/Objects dialog box, click Select objects and select any graphics and
attributes you added so far. You can then resume from where you left off.
1 In an AutoCAD drawing, draw the symbol graphics.
NOTE You can also create and modify the graphics for the symbol in the
Block Editor environment.
2 Click Schematic tab Other Tools panel Symbol Builder drop-down
Symbol Builder.
3 In the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box, Attribute template section,
browse to the Library path where the one-line symbols are stored:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125\1-
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\jic125\1-
4 In the Attribute template section, choose Symbol: Vertical Parent.
Build your own symbols | 2029
5 In the Attribute template section, choose Type: (CB) Circuit breakers.
6 In the Select from drawing section, click Select objects and select the
graphics.
7 Select OK.
Add attributes
In this part of the exercise, you insert some AutoCAD Electrical attributes from
the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor. You are not limited to these attributes,
and you can include your own user-defined attributes on the AutoCAD
Electrical block files.
The TAG1 and WDTYPE attributes are the only required attributes for a one-line
parent symbol. The other attributes in the Required section are expected on
a one-line parent symbol, however the symbol is recognized as a one-line
parent symbol without them.
The WDTYPE on page 335 attribute value must have a value of 1- for a
one-line symbol or 1-1 for a one-line bus-tap on page 709 symbol.
1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible,
Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Palette Visibility Toggle.
2 Select the TAG1 attribute.
3 Select the Properties tool to launch the Insert/Edit Attributes dialog
box.
4 Change the height to 0.125 and Justify to Center.
The value is predefined as CB since the Circuit breaker template was
selected. It is the default code used as the %F value of the tag format (such
as CR , PB, LT)
5 Select OK.
6 Click the Insert Attribute tool.
7 Select an insertion point for the attribute.
2030 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
NOTE You can also right-click and select Insert Attribute or drag the attribute
to insert it.
8 Select WDTYPE, click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert it.
The WDTYPE attribute has a value of 1- and is invisible by default. It
is required to identify the symbol as a one-line symbol.
9 Select DESC1, click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert it below
TAG1.
10 Repeat to insert the INST and LOC attributes above TAG1.
11 Select MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE. Click the Insert Attribute tool, and
insert them near the center of the rectangle.
NOTE If the CAT and ASSYCODE attributes are not listed they are inserted
with MFG as a group.
12 Repeat to insert the FAMILY attribute near the center of the rectangle.
Add wire connection attributes
You can define wire connection points for the library symbol. When you add
a wire connection, you select the style, the direction the wire connects from,
and whether to include the optional TERMxx and TERMDESCxx attributes.
In this exercise, wire connection attributes are inserted at the top and bottom
of the symbol.
1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible,
Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Palette Visibility Toggle.
2 Expand the Wire Connection section of the Symbol Builder Attribute
Editor.
3 Expand the Direction/Style list and select Top/None.
Build your own symbols | 2031
This style contains just the wire connection attributes with no graphics.
Select Others to display the Insert Wire Connections dialog box for
selecting other styles.
4 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the wire
connection attributes. The wire connection attribute, X2TERM01, and
the terminal pin attribute, TERM01, are inserted.
5 Back on the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor, expand the Wire Connection
list and select Bottom/None.
6 Select the Insert Wire Connection tool and insert the wire
connection attributes. The wire connection attribute, X8TERM02, and
the terminal pin attribute, TERM02, are inserted.
Finishing the one-line parent symbol
1 Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Done.
2 Click Base Point: Pick point and select the center of the symbol.
3 Select Wblock. Wblock creates the symbol .dwg file, while Block creates
the symbol for this drawing file only.
4 Enter the Name and file path or keep the default. AutoCAD Electrical
provides a default name for the new symbol based on the attribute
template selected. Avoid changing the first four letters of the file name
and limit the total length to 32 characters.
NOTE One-line symbols follow the same naming convention as schematic
parent and child symbols. For convenience the one-line symbols provided
have a 1- suffix. However, the symbol name does not define the symbol
as a one-line symbol.
5 (Optional) If you are going to add the symbol to the icon menu at a later
time using the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1269, check Icon image. Enter
the image name and folder.
6 (Optional) Click Details to see the Symbol Audit on page 371 dialog box
listing potential issues with your symbol.
2032 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
7 Select OK.
8 Select Close Block Editor from the block editor toolbar.
9 (Optional) Select Yes to insert the symbol on the drawing and select a
location. If you place the component on an existing wire, the wire breaks.
The component tag is assigned.
See also:
Create a parent schematic symbol on page 2018
Convert a non-AutoCAD Electrical block
1 Click Schematic tab Other Tools panel Symbol Builder drop-down
Symbol Builder.
2 Browse to the existing block to select the symbol to create or edit.
3 In the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box, Attribute template section:
Browse to the Library path for example
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\jic125
4 In the Attribute template section: Choose Symbol: Horizontal Parent for
example.
5 In the Attribute template section: Choose Type: Generic for example.
6 Select OK.
7 Convert existing attribute or text objects to AutoCAD Electrical attributes.
8 Add wire connections on page 362 as needed.
9 Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Done.
A default symbol name is supplied which you can keep or change as
needed depending on the symbol type and symbol naming conventions
on page 294
Build your own symbols | 2033
Converting attribute definition or text objects
If the existing symbol contains attribute or text objects you can convert these
to the expected attributes for the symbol type.
1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible,
Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Palette Visibility Toggle.
2 Select the Convert Text to Attribute tool to open the dialog box.
All the attributes and text objects contained in your non-AutoCAD
Electrical block are in the left-hand list. The AutoCAD Electrical attribute
names are in the right-hand list.
3 Select an existing attribute/text from the left-hand list. Click the arrow
next to the attribute in the right-hand list.
4 Repeat for each non-AutoCAD Electrical attribute or text object you want
to convert.
5 Select Done.
Create a panel footprint
A panel footprint symbol can be in either of two general forms: a to-scale
physical representation of the device or a generic wiring diagram representation
whose main purpose is to show wire connection annotation information.
The procedure for creating a panel footprint is like that of creating a schematic
symbol with the following differences:
Panel footprint symbols do not have to carry the wire connection attributes
that schematic symbols almost always carry.
There are no parent/child versions of a symbol for panel footprint symbols.
Some of the attribute names are different. A panel symbol must have the
P_TAG1 or P_TAGSTRIP attribute rather than the TAG1 or TAGSTRIP
attribute.
2034 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
The symbol block naming for the panel footprint does not follow the
special naming convention. The first four or five characters of the block
name for a panel symbol is not as critical as it is for schematic symbols.
In this example, you take geometry (either geometry you just drew, existing
geometry, or a vendor representation) and convert it to an AutoCAD Electrical
panel footprint using the Symbol Builder.
1 Click Schematic tab Other Tools panel Symbol Builder drop-down
Symbol Builder.
2 In the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box, Attribute template section,
browse to the Library path
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\jic125
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\jic125
3 In the Attribute template section, choose Symbol: Panel Footprint.
4 In the Attribute template section, choose Type: Generic.
5 In the Select from drawing section, click Select objects and select the
existing objects or an existing block.
6 Select OK.
Build your own symbols | 2035
Add attributes to the symbol
In this part of the exercise, you insert some AutoCAD Electrical attributes from
the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor. You are not limited to these attributes
and you can include your own user-defined attributes on the AutoCAD
Electrical block files.
NOTE The P_TAG1 attribute is the only one required for a panel footprint symbol.
The other attributes in the Required section are expected on a panel footprint,
however the symbol is recognized as a panel footprint without them.
1 If the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor is not visible,
Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Palette Visibility Toggle.
2 Select the P_TAG1 attribute.
3 Select the Properties tool to launch the Insert/Edit Attributes dialog
box.
4 Change the height to 0.125, Justify to Center, and Visible.
5 Select OK.
6 Click the Insert Attribute tool.
7 Insert the attribute above the symbol graphics.
NOTE You can also right-click and select Insert Attribute or drag the attribute
to insert it.
8 Select DESC1 and DESC2, click the Insert Attribute tool, and insert
them below the P_TAG1. Use the Properties tool to change them to Height
= 0.125, Justify = Center, and Visible.
2036 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
9 Insert the LOC, INST, MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE attributes.
NOTE If the CAT and ASSYCODE attributes are not listed they are inserted
with MFG as a group.
Finishing the panel symbol
1 Click Symbol Builder tab Edit panel Done.
2 Click Base Point: Pick point and select the insertion point for the graphics.
3 Select Wblock. Wblock creates the symbol .dwg file, while Block creates
the symbol for this drawing file only.
4 Enter the Name and file path or keep the default. AutoCAD Electrical
provides a default name for the new symbol based on the attribute
template selected.
Build your own symbols | 2037
5 (Optional) If you are going to add the symbol to the icon menu at a later
time using the Icon Menu Wizard on page 1269, check Icon image. Enter
the image name and folder.
6 (Optional) Click Details to see the Symbol Audit on page 371 dialog box
listing potential issues with your symbol.
7 Select OK.
8 Select Close Block Editor from the block editor toolbar.
9 (Optional) Select Yes to insert the symbol on the drawing and select a
location.
Additional Options
The additional options for creating a symbol listed are not used for this
example, but you can use them when creating your own symbol.
Optional Attributes: The attributes listed in this section are allowed on a
panel footprint. You can also add attributes to the Required or Optional
list using the following steps.
1 Select the Add Attribute tool to launch the Insert/Edit Attributes
dialog box.
2 Enter the attribute name as the Tag value.
3 Enter all property values.
4 Click Insert to insert the attribute or OK to add it to the list without
inserting it.
RATING section: You can add up to 12 Rating attributes. If the attribute
template contains a RATING1 attribute, or you add one, this section is
available on the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor.
1 Expand the RATING section.
2 Select the Add Next tool.
3 Pick an insertion point.
2038 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Convert Text to Attribute dialog box: If you selected existing text entities
from the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box, or added text while in the
Block Editor environment, this option converts existing text entities to
AutoCAD Electrical attributes in the same location as the original text.
1 Select the Convert Text to Attribute tool from the Symbol
Builder toolbar to launch the dialog box.
2 Select a text entry in the list and click the arrow pointing at the
attribute name.
3 Repeat for all text entities.
4 Click Done. The text entity is converted to the attribute. The text
value becomes the default value for the attribute.
Convert text: If you selected existing text entities from the Select
Symbol/Objects dialog box, or added text while in the Block Editor
environment, this option converts a single text entity to an AutoCAD
Electrical attribute in the same location as the original text.
1 Select an attribute on the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor.
2 Select the Convert Text tool.
3 Select the text entity. The text entity is converted to the attribute.
The text value becomes the default value for the attribute.
Audit Symbol: At any time you can audit on page 371 the symbol to find
any potential issues with your symbol.
Adding attributes using templates
An alternative to using the Symbol Builder to add attributes to the panel
footprint, is to use an attribute template to add attributes automatically. You
can have certain attributes added to any footprint automatically at footprint
insertion time. The templates are located
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\Autodesk\Acade {version}\Libs\panel\
Build your own symbols | 2039
Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Autodesk\Acade
{version}\Libs\panel\
You can set up to have visible attributes added to any footprint automatically
at footprint insertion time. There are five attribute template drawings:
component footprints wd_ptag_addattr_comp.dwg
terminal with terminal number wd_ptag_addattr_trm.dwg
terminal with wire number as terminal number wd_ptag_addattr_wtrm.dwg
balloons wd_ptag_addattr_itemballoon.dwg
terminal footprints (when inserted by Level/Sequen-
cing tools)
Wd_ptag_addattr_pnltermstrip.dwg
When a panel footprint is inserted, the following steps are performed if the
appropriate attribute template exists.
1 Find the center of the footprint by collecting and averaging the objects
that make up the footprint.
2 Insert the attribute template at the calculated center of the footprint.
3 Make sure there are no duplicate attributes. If duplicate attributes are
found, the attribute from the footprint is kept.
4 Re-block the added attributes with the inserted footprint.
5 Add the schematic data to the footprint. The data is added as attribute
data if the target attribute exists. If the target attribute does not exist, the
data is added as invisible xdata.
Create a Symbol Builder attribute template
Symbol Builder provides some family attribute templates. Each template
contains the required and optional attributes for a certain type of symbol.
Based on the options selected on the Select Symbol/Objects dialog box in
Symbol Builder, an attribute template is used. The attributes on the template
are listed in the Symbol Builder Attribute Editor making it easy to insert them
on your symbol.
2040 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
AutoCAD Electrical does not provide an attribute template for every type of
symbol. Consider creating your own if you expect to create a number of new
symbols. There are three basic steps to creating a Symbol Builder attribute
template.
NOTE Wire connection attributes are not included in the symbol attribute
templates but are in separate wire connection templates on page 2042.
1 Create a drawing file following the naming convention
AT_{symbol}_{type}.dwg containing the AutoCAD Electrical attribute
definitions.
2 (Optional) Add the xdata and indexed attributes which tell the Symbol
Builder Attribute Editor how to handle each attribute.
3 (Optional) Add the symbol type to the _FAMILY_DESCRIPTION table
in the catalog database file.
Attribute template naming convention
Attribute templates follow the naming convention, AT_{symbol}_{type}. The
{symbol} and {type} values appear in the lists on the Select Symbol / Objects
on page 353 dialog box. The selections from these lists direct Symbol Builder
to the appropriate attribute template.
The {symbol} value appears in the Symbol list in the Select Symbol/Objects
dialog box. Certain codes are recognized by Symbol Builder, such as HP for
Horizontal Parent. You can use an existing recognized code or use the full
text, such as AT_Horizontal Parent_{type}.dwg.
The {type} value appears in the Type list in the Select Symbol/Objects dialog
box. You can also map abbreviations for the {type} in the
_FAMILY_DESCRIPTION table of the catalog database, default_cat.mdb.
Indexed attributes and xdata
An attribute template can contain an attribute definition that can be indexed.
For example, AutoCAD Electrical allows up to 12 Rating attributes. If the
attribute template contains an attribute RATING(x) this attribute can be
indexed in Symbol Builder.
Build your own symbols | 2041
Certain optional xdata directs the attribute display in the Symbol Builder
Attribute Editor. Use the Xdata Editor on page 1734 to add or modify the xdata
on an attribute definition.
Possible values "Required" or "Optional". The default value is Re-
quired if the xdata is not present.
VIA_WD_GROUP
The value provides an attribute description inside the Symbol Builder
Attribute Editor.
VIA_WD_TOOLTIP
The value defines a group of attributes to insert together. The value
lists all the attributes which are inserted along with the attribute with
VIA_WD_MULTIATT
this xdata. The attributes listed are not displayed in the Symbol
Builder Attribute Editor. For example, if you want DESC2 and DESC3
inserted when you insert DESC1, add this xdata with the value
DESC2,DESC3 to the DESC1 attribute definition.
NOTE MFG, CAT, and ASSYCODE are a default group. To insert them
separately, add this xdata to the MFG attribute with a blank value.
The value provides the maximum number of times to index an attrib-
ute such as RATING. The default value is 12 if the xdata is not
present.
VIA_WD_INDXMAX
The value provides the display order. VIA_WD_SEQ
Symbol type
Edit the _FAMILY_DESCRIPTION table in the catalog database,
default_cat.mdb, to map the symbol name type value to a description. This
description is used in the Type list on the Select Symbol / Objects on page 353
dialog box. For example, if the attribute template name is AT_HP_PS.DWG
but you want Power Supply shown in the list on the dialog box, add an
entry with PS in the Family column, and Power Supply in the Description.
Creating a custom wire connection style
Symbol Builder inserts a wire connection template drawing when adding a
wire connection to your symbol. The list of wire connection styles is built
dynamically based on the template drawings found in the symbol library path.
The wire connection template name indicates that it is a wire connection
template, the wire connection type, and direction.
2042 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
AutoCAD Electrical comes with some schematic wire connection styles. If
additional styles are needed, create the wire connection templates for a new
style. To create a complete style, create a wire connection template for each
wire direction. To add a new schematic style, create the following wire
connection template drawings.
BB?11.dwg
BB?12.dwg
BB?13.dwg
BB?21.dwg
BB?22.dwg
BB?23.dwg
BB?31.dwg
BB?32.dwg
BB?33.dwg
The ? is replaced with the next available digit. AutoCAD Electrical allows
up to ten styles using the digits 0-9. You can create them using new drawings
or by copying a set of existing wire connection template drawings to the
appropriate names and modifying as needed.
Starting a wire connection template from a new drawing
1 Start a blank new drawing.
2 Draw the graphics for the wire connection.
3 Use the AutoCAD ATTDEF command to add the wire connection attribute
definition. The insertion point of the attribute definition is the location
AutoCAD Electrical uses to connect the wire. The wire connection attribute
tag is X?TERM01. The "?" character position is used to identify the
preferred wire connection direction:
1: wire connects to the attribute from the right
2: wire connects to the attribute from above
4: wire connects to the attribute from the left
8: wire connects to the attribute from below
Build your own symbols | 2043
0: special for motor connections that radiate from a circle
4 (Optional) Add the TERM01 attribute definition.
5 (Optional) Add the TERMDESC01 attribute definition.
6 (Optional) Add a custom drawing property to define the style description.
This value is the text displayed in the terminal style list in Insert Wire
Connections dialog box.
Select File Drawing Properties.
Select the Custom tab.
Select Add.
Enter Terminal style for the custom property name.
Enter the style description for the value.
Select OK to save the drawing property.
7 Save the drawing to the appropriate library folder following the wire
connection template naming convention.
Wire connection template naming convention
First two characters are BB.
Optional characters which indicate the symbol type for this wire
connection.
Parent or child schematic symbol Blank
Panel footprint or nameplate PTWN
Schematic terminal with terminal number STTN
Schematic terminal following the wire number STWN
Panel terminal PTWN_NOTERM
One or two characters indicating the terminal style. It is a single number,
0 through 9, for schematic symbols. For a panel symbol, the single number
is followed by an underscore.
2044 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Last two characters are digits that indicate the wire direction.
Radial, wire connects from an angle 00
Left and top 11
Left 12
Left and bottom 13
Top 21
Top, left, bottom, and right 22
Bottom 23
Right and top 31
Right 32
Right and bottom 33
Supplied wire connection templates
Attributes in the template Terminal Style Symbol Type Template Name
X?TERMn, TERMn None Schematic parent or
child
BB012, BB021, BB023,
BB032
X0TERMn None Schematic parent or
child
BB000
X?TERMn, TERMn Screw Schematic parent or
child
BB111 to B133
X?TERMn, TERMn Small Screw Schematic parent or
child
BB211 to BB233
Build your own symbols | 2045
Attributes in the template Terminal Style Symbol Type Template Name
X?TERMn, TERMn Circle, number
inside
Schematic parent or
child
BB311 to BB333
X?TERMn, TERMn Square, number
inside
Schematic parent or
child
BB411 to BB433
X?TERMn, TERMn, DESCA01,
DESCB01, TAGA01
Fixed PLC Schematic parent or
child
BB511 to BB533
X?TERM01, TERM01 None Schematic terminal
with terminal number
BBSTTN012,
BBSTTN021,
BBSTTN023,
BBSTTN032
X?TERM01 None Schematic terminal
following wire number
BBSTWN012,
BBSTWN021,
BBSTWN023,
BBSTWN032
X?TERMn, TERMn, TERMDESCn,
WIRENOn
One wire number Panel footprint BBPTWN0_12,
BBPTWN0_21,
BBPTWN0_23,
BBPTWN0_32
X?TERMn, TERMn, TERMDESCn,
WIRENOn
One wire number Panel footprint BBPTWN1_12,
BBPTWN1_21,
BBPTWN1_23,
BBPTWN1_32
X?TERMn, TERMn, TERMDESCn,
WIRENOn, WIRENOnA
Two wire num-
bers
Panel footprint BBPTWN2_12,
BBPTWN2_21,
BBPTWN2_23,
BBPTWN2_32
WIRENOL, WIRENOR, TERM,
TERMDESCL, TERMDESCR
No levels Panel terminal, no
levels
BBPTWN_NOTERM0_12,
BBPTWN_NOTERM0_21,
BBPTWN_NOTERM0_23,
BBPTWN_NOTERM0_32
2046 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Attributes in the template Terminal Style Symbol Type Template Name
WIRENOL, WIRENOR, L01PINL,
L01PINR, TERM
One level termin-
al
Panel terminal, one
level
BBPTWN_NOTERM1_12,
BBPTWN_NOTERM1_21,
BBPTWN_NOTERM1_23,
BBPTWN_NOTERM1_32
WIRENOL, WIRENOR, L01PINL,
L01PINR, TERM, L02WIRENOl,
Two level termin-
al
Panel terminal, two
levels
BBPTWN_NOTERM2_12,
BBPTWN_NOTERM2_21,
L02WIRENOR, L02PINL, L02PINR,
L02TERM
BBPTWN_NOTERM2_23,
BBPTWN_NOTERM2_32
WIRENOL, WIRENOR, L01PINL,
L01PINR, TERM, L02WIRENOl,
Three level ter-
minal
Panel terminal, three
levels
BBPTWN_NOTERM3_12,
BBPTWN_NOTERM3_21,
L02WIRENOR, L02PINL, L02PINR, BBPTWN_NOTERM3_23,
BBPTWN_NOTERM3_32 L02TERM, L03WIRENOL,
L03WIRENOR, L03PINL, L03PINR,
L03TERM
The ? is replaced with the appropriate wire connection direction number
on page 321 and the n is replaced with the two digit sequential number. If
your template contains only one wire connection attribute, always use 01.
The 01 is replaced with the next available value when the wire connection
template is inserted using Symbol Builder.
Add your own symbols, circuits, and commands
to the icon menu
AutoCAD Electrical supplies two default icon menus: one for schematic symbols
and the other for panel symbols. Each menu is driven by a text file. AutoCAD
Electrical defaults to icon menu ACE_<standard>_MENU.DAT (where
<standard> = JIC, IEC, GB, HYD, JIS, PID, or PNEU) for schematic symbols
and ACE_PANEL_MENU.DAT for panel symbols. These menu files are located
in
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country
code}\Support\
Add your own symbols, circuits, and commands to the icon menu | 2047
Windows Vista:
C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical
{version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\
You modify or expand the icon menus by editing the underlying icon menu
text file. You can use a generic text editor and edit it manually or you can use
the AutoCAD Electrical Icon Menu Wizard.
Use the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box to select the function to be performed
when the icon is selected from the icon menu.
Add component: Inserts a symbol
Add circuit: Inserts a prebuilt circuit. This causes AutoCAD Electrical to
insert and explode the .dwg name supplied.
Add new submenu: Starts a new submenu.
Add command: Performs a command. Use Command for inserting
three-phase schematic symbols and panel footprints.
Add components to the icon menu
The Icon Menu Wizard can be used to add or modify icons for both the
schematic and panel symbol libraries.
1 Create an AutoCAD Electrical compatible library symbol. For schematic
symbols, follow the guidelines regarding the symbol ".dwg" file naming
convention on page 294 and required attributes on page 315.
2 Click Schematic tab Other Tools panel Icon Menu Wizard.
3 In the Select Menu File dialog box, select to modify the schematic menu
file, and click OK.
4 In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, select Add Component to add
a new icon to the menu.
NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select Add icon
Component.
2048 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Three pieces of information are needed for the new icon button.
5 On the Add Icon - Component dialog box, specify the image file name
and graphic to appear in the icon button. The image name can be
manually typed into the edit box. You can browse to an existing .sld or
.png file to assign to the icon, use an image file that matches the active
drawing name, use an image file that matches a picked block on the
drawing, or use an image with the same name as the block name entered
for the block name.
NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library (instead of
individual <slide>.sld files). Manually enter these as "library name(slide name)".
For example, "S1(hpb11)."
If you have not created the slide image and want to have it created
automatically from the current screen image, select Create PNG from
current screen image. The Icon Menu Wizard runs the AutoCAD MSLIDE
command on your current screen image to create the .png and .sld file.
If the file does not exist, then Create PNG from the current screen image
is selected by default. If you do not want to create the image from the
current drawing's displayed image, switch it off. If you want to redo an
existing image, click this switch on.
6 Specify the block name to insert on the icon. The symbol's file name can
be typed into the edit box or you can browse for an existing WBlocked
".dwg" file to assign to the icon, insert the full active drawing as a block,
or select an existing block on the current drawing.
7 Click OK.
Add your own symbols, circuits, and commands to the icon menu | 2049
The new menu button appears in the menu and the text you entered for
the icon label appears in the tooltip or in the list if you set the viewing
option to either Icon with text or List view.
8 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test your new
symbol insert.
Add an icon menu page
You can add new menu pages to the AutoCAD Electrical icon menu, and then
populate them with your own custom symbols. Each new page can have icon
selections that cascade down to other new menu pages. Once you click OK,
your trigger icon and new submenu page are added.
1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, select Add New submenu to
add a new icon to the menu.
NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select New Submenu.
The Create New Submenu dialog box appears. Here you can select the
function that will be performed when the icon is selected from the icon
menu.
Three pieces of information are needed to trigger the new menu page.
2 On the Create New Submenu dialog box, specify the image file name and
.sld or .png graphic to appear in the icon button. The image name can
be manually typed into the edit box. You can browse to an existing .sld
or .png file to assign to the icon, use an image file that matches the active
drawing name, use an image file that matches a picked block on the
2050 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
drawing, or use an image file with the same name as the block name
entered for the block name.
NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library (instead of
individual <slide>.sld files). Manually enter these as "library name(slide name)".
3 Specify the submenu's title.
4 Click OK.
5 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test your new
symbol insert.
Add an icon to trigger a command
An icon can be configured to trigger an AutoCAD command, trigger an
AutoCAD Electrical command, or run a program. For example, "Rectangle"
can be typed into the edit box so that every time you click the box, it runs
the AutoCAD Rectangle command.
1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, click Add Command.
NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select Add icon
Command.
2 On the Add Icon - Command dialog box, specify the name to appear on
the icon and the image file to use on the icon button.
3 Specify the command to execute when the icon button is selected.
Click List to select from a list of AutoCAD Electrical Commands for Panel
and Schematic multi-pole symbol inserts. This makes it easier for you to
build the appropriate command to insert a multi-pole symbol or a panel
symbol. To see the command line parameters for a specific AutoCAD
Electrical command, select the command in the list and the parameters
display at the right. If quotation marks are shown, then enclose the
parameter value within quotation marks.
Add your own symbols, circuits, and commands to the icon menu | 2051
NOTE If you select an API command that requires parameters you must
manually enter the additional parameters as indicated. Commands that require
parameters should be inside of parenthesis. If you use one of the AutoCAD
commands from the list, no parenthesis are needed. For example, to add an
icon that inserts a black flush push button, Allen-Bradley, catalog number
800T-A2A, with no rotation, select the command WD_INFP from the list.
When you return to the Command dialog box, you must enter in the rest of
the parameters.
"family" is used for the catalog file lookup table name
"mfg" is used for the footprint lookup
"cat" is the actual catalog number
"assycode" is the catalog number assembly code (often blank)
"footprint" is the library symbol name
WD_INFP "PB11" "AB" "800T-A2A" "" "AB/ABPB3"
4 Click OK.
Add circuits to the icon menu
Add Circuit is the same as Insert Command except that the block file is made
up of more than one AutoCAD Electrical block definitions and related wire
lines.
1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, click Add Add circuit.
NOTE You can also right-click in empty space and select Add icon Add
circuit.
Three pieces of information are needed for the new icon button.
2 On the Add Existing Circuit dialog box, specify the image file name and
.sld or .png graphic to appear in the icon button. The image name can
be manually typed into the edit box. You can browse to an existing .sld
or .png file to assign to the icon, use an image file that matches the active
drawing name, use an image file that matches a picked block on the
drawing, or use an image file with the same name as the block name
entered for the block name.
2052 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library (instead of
individual <slide>.sld files). Manually enter these as "library name(slide name)".
3 Specify the circuit name to insert on the icon. The symbol's file name
can be typed into the edit box or you can browse for an existing WBlocked
".dwg" file to assign to the icon or insert the full active drawing as a block.
4 Click OK.
The new menu button appears in the menu.
5 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test your new
symbol insert.
Change the icon's image
There are times when you might want to change the image associated with
an icon menu choice. The AutoCAD Electrical Icon Menu Wizard provides a
quick, easy way to reassign or reshoot a slide image. Slides can be saved as
individual files in the AutoCAD Electrical search path or they can be
maintained inside of a library of slide files called the slide library.
NOTE If you make custom slides or slide libraries for the menu, copy them to the
same subdirectory as the menu file since AutoCAD Electrical looks for menu slides
in the active icon menu file's directory.
1 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box, right-click an icon button to edit
and select Properties.
2 On the Properties dialog box, specify the image file name and .sld or .png
graphic to appear in the icon button. The image name can be manually
typed into the edit box. You can browse to an existing .sld or .png file to
assign to the icon, use an image file that matches the active drawing
name, use an image file that matches a picked block on the drawing, or
use an image file with the same name as the block name entered for the
block name.
If you have not created the .png image and want to have it created
automatically from the current screen image, select Create PNG from
current screen image. The Icon Menu Wizard runs the AutoCAD MSLIDE
command on your current screen image to create the .png and .sld file.
If the file does not exist, then Create PNG from current screen image is
selected by default. If you do not want to create the image from the
current drawing's displayed image, switch it off. If you want to redo an
existing image, click this switch on.
Add your own symbols, circuits, and commands to the icon menu | 2053
NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library (instead of
individual <slide>.sld files). Manually enter these as "library name(slide name)".
3 Click OK.
The new menu button appears in the menu.
4 Select the appropriate Insert Component command and test your new
symbol insert.
Edit the DAT file with a text editor
There may be times when you want to bypass the Icon Menu Wizard and edit
the menu DAT file directly. It is important to maintain the menu file structure,
otherwise your menu may not activate properly. An AutoCAD Electrical menu
".dat" file is a text file that can be viewed and edited with any text editor (ex:
WordPad or Notepad). See Overview of the icon menu file on page 1300.
Best practices for icon menu changes
We recommend that you create your own icon menu and leave the AutoCAD
Electrical icon menu intact. This provides you with easier migration when
upgrading to the next version of AutoCAD Electrical. You can set up the
AutoCAD Electrical icon menu system so that you can flip back and forth
between the default ACE_<standard>_MENU.DAT (such as
ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT) and your own "my_menu.dat."
1 Copy the standard menu into a new file name instead of creating the file
from scratch. Open the new DAT file with a text editor and remove
everything except for the top portion of the file (shown below).
**M0
D0
JIC: Schematic Symbols
NOTE The line D0 is only needed if the menu must be compatible with
AutoCAD Electrical versions prior to 2008.
Rename the title line to indicate that this is your very own personal menu
file.
2 Add a line like the following in the ACE_<standard>_MENU.DAT file.
My schematic menu|mymenu.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu
"my_menu.dat")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0)
2054 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
NOTE Make sure this text is all on one line.
3 In your new "my_menu.dat" file, add a line like the following one so that
you can jump back to the default AutoCAD Electrical icon menu.
Default AutoCAD Electrical menu|back2wd.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu
"ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0)
The result should be:
**M0
D0
My Menu: My Companies Symbols
AutoCAD Electrical menu|back2wd.sld|$C=(c:wd_loadmenu
"ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT")(c:wd_insym_go2menu 0)
4 In the AutoCAD Electrical default icon menu, click the new "My menu"
entry.
Your menu should immediately appear and remains the default for
subsequent component inserts. If you want to go back to the AutoCAD
Electrical default menu, click the "AutoCAD Electrical menu" button you
added to your custom menu. AutoCAD Electrical flips back to the default
icon menu and it now remains the default for subsequent inserts.
Configure projects for various drawing standards
AutoCAD Electrical has multiple configuration options so that you can
configure your drawings in a manner that fits your needs. You can configure
drawings for IEC standard or automatically override family tag codes.
Configure for IEC standard
Below is a list of configuration options (both project properties and
drawing-specific properties) that are most commonly used when dealing with
the IEC drawing standard and a description of each.
Project Properties
Project Properties are configured by right-clicking on the project name in the
Project Manager and selecting Properties. The options configured here are
project-wide options, such as the paths to symbol libraries, or drawing default
options for new drawings that are created in the selected project. The drawing
Configure projects for various drawing standards | 2055
options defined in the Project Properties dialog box can also be applied to any
drawing in the project if needed.
Project Settings Tab
AutoCAD Electrical contains two specific IEC-type
symbols, IEC2 and IEC4. The main difference
Schematic Libraries
between these libraries is the size of the text associ-
ated with them.
IEC2 symbols have a text size of 2.5 for the
main text items such as Component Tag, Install-
ation, Location, Component Description, and
so on.
IEC4 symbols have a text size of 3.5 for the
Component Tag and a text size of 2.7 for Install-
ation, Location, Component Description, and
so on.
AutoCAD Electrical contains one IEC-specific icon
menu file: ACE_IEC_MENU.DAT.
Schematic Icon Menu File
Components Tab
In IEC you may want your components to be
tagged with Sheet Number, Family Code, fol-
Component TAG Format
lowed by a number that is either sequential or ref-
erence-based. To do this, in the Tag Format edit
box, enter: %S%F%N where %S = the sheet
number, %F = the family code defined for the
component being inserted and %N = the number-
ing scheme for the active drawing (either sequential
or reference-based).
For sequential numbering, you can enter a starting
number to use as a starting component number.
For reference-based numbering, you can use one
of the following numbering formats:
X-Y Grid
X Zones
Reference Number
2056 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Components Tab
Defines most of the specific tagging options to
conform to the IEC tagging mode. Select the option
that best fits your needs:
Component TAG Options
Combined Installation/Location Tag Mode:
Uses the combined installation/location tag for
interpreting component tag names. For ex-
ample, 100CR relay contact marked with loca-
tion code PNL1 is interpreted as being associ-
ated with a different relay coil than relay con-
tact -100CR marked with location code PNL2.
If this setting is not selected, both contacts are
associated with the same parent relay coil, -
100CR.
By selecting this option, your compon-
ent tags are automatically prefixed with
the =, +, and - where applicable.
Suppress dash when first character of tag:
Suppresses any single dash character prefix in
an IEC tag that does not have a leading Install-
ation/Location prefix (for example, "-K101"
dash is suppressed to "K101" but "+LOC1-K101"
remains unchanged).
When switched OFF, it automatically
adds a single dash character to an IEC
tag that does not already have a single
leading dash prefix and does not have
a leading Installation/Location prefix.
For example, tag "K101" becomes "-
K101" but "+LOC1-K101" remains un-
changed.
NOTE This suppression takes place auto-
matically in reports; and takes place
graphically only when a component is in-
serted, edited, or retagged.
Format Installation/Location into tag: Specifies
to exclude the Installation and Location code
values as part of the tag when displaying. For
Configure projects for various drawing standards | 2057
Components Tab
example, if this is not on, a tag might show up
as K16 in the Surf dialog box. But if selected,
the tag might show up +AAA-K16 (where AAA
is the location).
Suppress Installation/Location in tag when
match drawing default: Suppresses Location
and Installation values on components if they
match the drawing default values.
Suppress Installation/Location in tag on reports:
Specifies to exclude Installation and Location
values as part of the tag when displayed in re-
ports.
Upon insert: automatic fill Installation/Location
with drawing default or last used: Fills the In-
stallation and Location edit boxes on the In-
sert/Edit component dialog box and the attrib-
utes on the block with drawing default or last
used values (if no drawing default).If not selec-
ted, these edit boxes and attributes are not
filled in and are assumed.
Cross-reference Tab
In IEC, you may want to configure your cross-refer-
encing text to display the Sheet Number - Refer-
Cross-reference Format
ence Number. To do this, in the Same Drawing
edit box, enter %S-%N (or click the %S-%N
button). You can also define the format of the cross-
referencing text that references other drawings in
the Between Drawings edit box.
Select this if you want to suppress IEC prefixes. Suppress Installation/Location codes when
matching the drawing defaults
NOTE You must run the Component Cross-refer-
ence command to update any existing cross-refer-
encing text.
2058 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Cross-reference Tab
In IEC, it is common to display a representation of
the type of child component (Normally Open,
Component Cross-reference Display
Normally Closed or Form-C contact) in either a
graphical or table format. If you select the graphical
(nontable) format, you can define details of the
graphical format by clicking Setup.
Styles Tab
In IEC, it is sometimes preferable to display wire
connections as tee markers instead of connection
Wire Style
dots. To do this, in the Wire Tee section, select the
appropriate angle tee marker from the list.
Drawing Format Tab
In IEC, the most common ladder orientation is Ho-
rizontal. In the Ladder Defaults section, configure
how to display your horizontal ladders.
Ladder Defaults
Defines the type of referencing that is used to re-
place the %N value for component tag and wire
Format Referencing
number formats. In IEC, the most commonly used
format is X Zones.
NOTE If you want AutoCAD Electrical to place the
labels for the X-Y Grid or X Zones referencing style,
use the appropriate command from the Insert
Ladder toolbar.
X-Y Grid: All referencing is tied to an X-Y grid
system of numbers and letters along the left-
hand side and top of the drawing.Set your
drawing's vertical and horizontal index numbers
and letters, spacing, and origin in the X-Y grid
setup dialog box.
Configure projects for various drawing standards | 2059
Drawing Format Tab
TIP Use negative spacing values for Hori-
zontal or Vertical if you want to change
the X-Y grid system's origin to be other
than the upper left-hand corner of the
drawing
X Zones: Similar to X-Y Grid, but there is not a
Y-axis. Set your drawing's horizontal labels,
spacing, and origin on the X Zones setup dialog
box.
TIP Use negative zone spacing value if
you want the zone reference origin to be
at the right side of the drawing.
Scale for IEC drawings is normally set to mm full
size.
Scale
Drawing Properties
Drawing Properties are configured by either right-clicking on the drawing
name in the Project Manager and selecting Properties Drawing Properties,
or by selecting Properties Drawing Properties. The options configured here
are only applied to the drawing that they were configured on.
NOTE Options that are duplicated on the Drawing Properties and Project Properties
dialog boxes are not described in this section.
Drawing Settings Tab
Defines Installation and Location codes that are
used for drawing defaults when placing compon-
IEC-Style Designators
ents on the drawing and no override Installation or
Location values are given on the specific compon-
ent. These values are used when the Combined In-
stallation/Location tag mode option is selected
(described previously in Project Properties section).
2060 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Automatically override family tag codes
A components family name can be overridden at insertion time, during a
later edit, or automatically using the wd_fam.dat mapping file. The wd_fam.dat
file overrides the family tag code of library symbols by mapping the codes to
new values. The tag code of a symbol is used in generating the tag-ID of
inserted components, such as the PB of tag-ID PB101.
AutoCAD Electrical searches for this mapping file in the following order:
1 User subdirectory
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\{username}\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical {version}\{release}\{country
code}\Support\User\
Windows Vista:
C:\Users\{username}\AppData\Roaming\Autodesk\AutoCAD Electrical
{version}\{release}\{country code}\Support\User\
2 Active project's .wdp file subdirectory
3 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options Files Support Files
Search Path
Depending on how you want to override component family names, you can
move the wd_fam.dat file into the various locations mentioned above.
To always substitute a new family value for all projects you create, place
the file in the User folder. (option 1)
To use AutoCAD Electrical defaults most of the time but sometimes override
them with project-specific defaults, place the file in the project folders for
the project you want to override. You can have different defaults for each
project. (option 2)
If you want a default override from the AutoCAD Electrical default values,
but sometimes want a project override to the global override, you will want
to use option 3 and 2. Place the file somewhere in the AutoCAD support
path, like C:\Program Files\Autodesk\Acade 200x\Acade, and then
when you want to override these values, place the file in the project folder.
Configure projects for various drawing standards | 2061
Switch JIC and IEC standards
You can have projects that require working in the JIC standard and other
projects that require the IEC standard. To switch from one standard to another
change:
Schematic library folders
Schematic icon menu
Component tagging options
The library folders and icon menu are project settings. The component tagging
options are on a per-drawing basis and must be applied to each drawing.
Project settings
1 Click Project tab Project Tools panel Manager.
2 Right-click on the project name in Project Manager.
3 Select Properties.
4 Select the Project Settings tab.
5 Expand the Schematic Libraries section.
6 Remove any folder names you no longer want and add any that you
need. For example, remove the JIC folder and add the IEC library folder.
NOTE AutoCAD Electrical searches for a symbol in the order the folders are
listed.
7 Expand the Schematic Icon Menu File section.
8 Remove the menu you do not want and add the menu you need. For
example, remove the ACE_JIC_MENU.DAT file and add the
ACE_IEC_MENU.DAT file.
9 Click OK.
2062 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Drawing settings - change as a project setting
Component tagging options can be changed as a project setting and applied
to a group of drawings.
1 Click Project tab Project Tools panel Manager.
2 Right-click on the project name in Project Manager.
3 Select Properties.
4 Select the Components tab.
5 In the Component TAG Options section, check the Combined
Installation/Location tag mode option for IEC tagging, uncheck it for JIC
tagging.
If using IEC tagging, set any of the other tagging options.
6 Highlight all the drawings in Project Manager you wish to apply the
project settings to.
7 Right-click and select Properties Apply Project Defaults.
NOTE When the project settings are applied to a drawing, all settings are applied,
not specific ones.
Drawing settings - change a single drawing
Component tagging options can be changed on a per-drawing basis.
1 Click Project tab Project Tools panel Manager.
2 Highlight the drawing in Project Manager that you wish to change.
3 Right-click and select Properties Drawing Properties.
4 Select the Components tab.
5 In the Component TAG Options section, check the Combined
Installation/Location tag mode option for IEC tagging, uncheck it for JIC
tagging.
If using IEC tagging, set any of the other tagging options.
Configure projects for various drawing standards | 2063
6 Click OK.
NOTE You can change the component tagging options on the active drawing by
selecting Drawing Properties.
See also:
Configure for IEC standard on page 2055
Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical
Autodesk Vault allows you to keep a history of your design changes. You can
review how your designs have progressed and rollback to a previous version
if necessary. Vault also acts as a central shared secured repository of drawings
and data with the ability to search for required information across multiple
drawings and projects.
The AutoCAD Vault add-in works within AutoCAD Electrical, adding data
management tools to the interface. Through the AutoCAD Vault add-in, you
can add files to a vault, and check files in and out. The add-in works with
both DWG and image files. In AutoCAD Electrical, you work on one project
at a time. The project file (.wdp) lists all the drawings that are part of a project.
When you make a change in one drawing, all files related to that drawing
automatically update.
Perform vault tasks with the Project Manager
When working with AutoCAD Electrical and Autodesk Vault, you check out
projects or individual drawings from a vault location to edit. You can perform
all vault tasks within the Project Manager when you are logged into the vault.
You can also manage the relationships between a project file and its dependents
in the vault, while standard project management operations continue to be
available.
NOTE Access to vault folders depends upon the permissions you are granted. You
cannot see files or folders that you do not have permissions for viewing.
AutoCAD Vault ARX adds vault features to the Project Manager once logged
into the Vault. The vault commands are available by right-clicking on a project
2064 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
or drawing within the AutoCAD Electrical Project Manager. You can use the
Project Manager to:
Log in and out of the vault
Upon initial start-up of AutoCAD Electrical, you are not logged into the
vault. You must log into Autodesk Vault to work with projects in the vault.
You can also log into the vault using the File Vault menu
Check projects in and out of the vault
The most basic requirement of the vault is that you never work directly
on a file in the vault. You must check out the project to the working folder
on your local drive to edit it. When you finish working on the project, you
must check the project back into the vault.
When a project file and its related drawing files are checked out of a vault,
only the files that are not currently checked out are downloaded. If the
working copy of a file is older than the version in the vault, you are
prompted to replace the working copy. If the working copy is currently
checked out, it is not replaced.
TIP If you want others to view updates you made to a project and you want
to continue modifying the project, select the Keep Checked Out option on the
Check In dialog box. This checks in the updates you made to the project and
keeps the project checked out to you.
NOTE You must have all references of a project file downloaded to your
working folder to edit the project file.
View the status of files in a design
The status icons indicate the status of your local files as compared to the
same files in the vault. You can tell when the local copy is in sync with
the vault and when it is not. The tooltip for each status icon describes the
state of the file and suggests the next logical step. The status of a local file
is updated when it is saved to disk.
NOTE The vault status icons are only available in the list view and only appear
when you are logged into the vault.
Setup for single user vs. multiple users
You can perform vault operations on the entire project or individual drawing
files listed within the project in AutoCAD Electrical. However, in a
multiple-user design environment, you can choose to check out and edit
Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical | 2065
individual files as they are needed rather than checking out the entire project
at once while still maintaining drawing file dependencies and versions. After
you change the files and check them back into the vault, the associated files
simultaneously update.
Use the Project Manager to perform all vaulting operations. In AutoCAD
Electrical, you can select a file (or multiple files) within a project to:
Check in (all)
Check out (all)
Get latest (all)
Workflow overview
1 Start AutoCAD Electrical.
2 Log into Vault.
3 In a single user environment, if you did not set a working folder yet, start
Autodesk Vault Explorer and set a working folder on your local computer
and then switch back to AutoCAD Electrical.
In a multiple-user design environment, set the working folder on a shared
network resource for the entire project team. This allows simultaneous
access for all users on the same dataset and maintains the data consistency.
4 Open a project you want to add to the vault.
5 Add the opened project to the vault using the Check In or Check In Folder
command.
6 Use the Open from Vault or Check Out command to open and check out
the file from the vault.
7 To work on more files in the project, check out multiple files to the
working folder using the Check Out All command in the Project Manager.
8 When you finish modifying the files, check them back into the vault
using the Check In All command in the Project Manager. All related files
update.
Best practices for vault commands
Below are the suggested workflows for using the most common vault
commands with AutoCAD Electrical.
Open from vault
2066 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Use Open from the Vault to access files in the vault for viewing or editing. To
modify a file from the vault, the file must be checked out to you and worked
on from your local drive. You must be logged into the Autodesk Data
Management Server to open and check out a file.
1 In the Project Manager, select Open Project from Vault from the project
selection menu.
2 In the Select file dialog box, navigate to the project definition file, and
then select it. To maintain the relationship between the drawing files
that are defined in the project file, you must check out all files specified
in a project file when opening a project from Vault.
3 Click Open.
Get latest version
Get Latest Version retrieves a read-only copy of the most recent design data
that is checked in. You cannot modify it until you check it out using Autodesk
Vault Explorer or the Vault add-in for AutoCAD-based products.
1 In the Project Manager, select a file.
2 Right-click and select:
Get Latest Version to get the most recent version of the selected project
file.
Get Latest Version for All to get the most recent version of the selected
project file and all of the related files.
3 In the Get Latest Version dialog box, click OK.
The most recent versions of the selected files are downloaded from the
vault. If the working copy of a file is newer than the most recent version
of the file in the vault, you are prompted to chose either losing changes
made to the current working copy or to not get the latest version of that
file.
4 Click Settings to get the parents and children of the selected file.
Get previous version
Get Previous Version retrieves a past version of a file or a project and places
a read-only copy in your working folder. Historical versions can never be
modified. You can only create a new version of a file.
Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical | 2067
1 In the Project Manager, right-click a file or project, and then click Get
Previous Version.
2 In the Get Previous Version dialog box, select a version of the file or
project to retrieve.
3 If the file has parents and children to get, click Settings, and then specify
which related files are retrieved as well.
4 Click OK.
A read-only copy of the file is placed in the local working folder. You can
view the file but you cannot modify it. To modify the file, you must check
it out.
Create a project version
Project versions are controlled by project file (.wdp) versions. The project file
acts as the parent for all drawings in the project and each version of the .wdp
is associated to the latest versions of the drawing at that instance. You can
edit individual drawings of a project and create versions of the drawings as
needed. When you want to take a project snapshot (create a project version),
check out the .wdp and check it back in.
Even if the .wdp is not modified, if any drawings have newer versions, a newer
version of the .wdp is created, associating all newer drawing versions.
TIP Use Vault Explorer to examine the relationship between versions of the project
file and corresponding drawings.
Roll back to a previous project version
You can roll back to a previous project version using Vault Explorer, restoring
the project file (.wdp) and all associated drawing and project configuration
files to a previous version.
1 Close the project and drawings in AutoCAD Electrical.
2 Using Vault Explorer, examine the .wdp file and corresponding drawing
versions.
3 Select the desired .wdp file.
4 Click Get Previous Version.
2068 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
Automatically check in drawings
Some operations in AutoCAD Electrical (such as project-wide or reporting
tools) cause Vault to automatically check out all affected drawings. These
drawings can be automatically checked in when modifications are complete.
When asked whether to check the file in, click Yes or Yes to All. If you do not
want to be prompted to check in your drawings since you want the check-in
to happen automatically, in the Options dialog box, select Check In dialog
on auto check in.
When files are checked in, comments are automatically added to help identify
and distinguish between the versions of the files that are automatically created.
You can modify the comments as desired during check-in unless you
suppressed the Check In dialog box.
Shared sandbox guidelines
A shared workspace is a working folder located on a shared server for all users
to access. The shared workspace configuration can be used with:
Autodesk Vault
Autodesk Vault Explorer
AutoCAD Vault Add-in
Microsoft Vault Add-in
You can choose to work in a local or shared working folder according to your
design requirements. A shared working folder is highly recommended for the
AutoCAD Electrical environment, especially in a multi-user situation, because
it enables you and your design team to keep all files up-to-date.
To use a shared workspace, the system administrator should preset a consistent
working folder for all project members to use. Assign the working folder
location to the root level ($) of the vault. A shared working folder cannot be
assigned to a subfolder.
NOTE If Inventor add-in clients will access the same vault, do not enforce a shared
working folder. If Inventor and AutoCAD Electrical are sharing the same vault, the
vault administrator cannot enforce the shared working folder. Each AutoCAD
Electrical user must set the working folder individually to point to a common
network drive.
Rules For Using Shared Working Folders
Use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical | 2069
Using a shared workspace means multiple users may be working on the same
files. All your vault operations are protected as long as you log into the vault
before working on the files. The following guidelines will help prevent you
from overwriting the changes made by someone else, and vice versa.
1 Remain logged into the vault at all times. You can use the Vault auto
login option so you are automatically logged into the vault when
AutoCAD Electrical starts.
2 If a file is currently checked out to another user, you cannot perform the
following operations:
Get Latest Version
Get Previous Version
Check Out
3 You cannot check out a file that is currently opened for read-write by
another user.
4 You can still check out a file that is opened for read only by another user.
5 You can open a file in read only when it is currently checked out to
someone else using the same working folder.
6 Ensure that the drawings are checked back into the vault after you finish
working on them so they are available to other users who need to modify
them.
2070 | Chapter 24 Advanced Productivity
AutoCAD Electrical
Commands
AutoCAD Electrical Commands
Commands
These topics are called from within the command itself. If you do not find all
the information you need, look further in the Help.
3 Phase Wire Numbers on page 1015
Add Attribute on page 925
Add Connector Pins on page 1188
Add/Edit Internal Jumper on page 906
Add/Edit Power Source/Load Levels on page 1708
Add Geometry on page 1700
Add Rung on page 1004
Add Table to Catalog Database on page 209
Add Wire Connections on page 1701
Adjust In-Line Wire/Label Gaps on page 1038
Align on page 851
Associate Terminals on page 1098
Autodesk Inventor Professional Export on page 1563
25
2071
Automatic Report Selection on page 1538
Bend Wire on page 960
Block Replacement on page 1705
Break Apart Terminal Associations on page 1099
Cable Markers on page 974
Change Attribute Justification on page 920
Change Attribute Layer on page 912
Change Attribute Size on page 923
Change/Convert Wire Type on page 288
Change Cross-reference to Multiple Line Text on page 929
Check/Repair Gap Pointers on page 1728
Check/Trace Wire on page 1728
Child Location/Description Update on page 931
Circuit Builder on page 757
Clean Drawing Utility on page 1727
Component Cross-reference on page 861
Conduit Marker (From/To List) on page 1667
Conduit Marker (Pick) on page 1667
Conduit Marker Report on page 1674
Continue Surfer on page 1229
Convert Block to Destination Arrow on page 1686
Convert Block to Source Arrow on page 1686
Convert Ladder on page 1006
Convert Text to Attribute Definition on page 1685
Convert Text to Wire Number on page 1685
Convert to Schematic Component on page 1682
Copy/Add Component Override on page 866
2072 | Chapter 25 AutoCAD Electrical Command
Copy Assembly on page 1608
Copy Catalog Assignment on page 1330
Copy Circuit on page 777
Copy Component on page 823
Copy Footprint on page 1605
Copy Installation Code on page 1625
Copy Group Code on page 1625
Copy Level Assignments on page 1652
Copy Location Code on page 1625
Copy Mount Code on page 1625
Copy Project on page 168
Copy Terminal Block Properties on page 1100
Copy Wire Number on page 1037
Copy Wire Number (In-Line) on page 1038
Create/Edit Wire Type on page 282
Create New Drawing on page 182
Create New Project on page 167
Cross-reference Check on page 862
Delete Component on page 849
Delete Connector Pins on page 1189
Delete Footprint on page 849
Delete Project on page 203
Delete Wire Gap on page 996
Delete Wire Numbers on page 1046
Destination Signal Arrow on page 1050
Drawing Audit on page 1733
Drawing Properties: Components on page 238
AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 2073
Drawing Properties: Cross-references on page 244
Drawing Properties: Drawing Format on page 247
Drawing Properties: Drawing Settings on page 235
Drawing Properties: Styles on page 1054
Drawing Properties: Wire Numbers on page 1017
Edit Component on page 794
Edit Conduit Marker on page 1667
Edit Footprint on page 1609
Edit Jumper on page 1101
Edit Language Database File on page 1244
Edit Selected Attribute on page 911
Edit Wire Number on page 1031
Edit Wire Sequence on page 1070
Edit User Table Data on page 904
Electrical Audit on page 1730
Electrical Standards Database Editor on page 736
Export to Spreadsheet on page 1542
Fan In/Out Destination on page 1061
Fan In/Out - Single Line Layer on page 1062
Fan In/Out Source on page 1060
Find/Edit/Replace Component Text on page 915
Find/Replace Terminal Text on page 916
Find/Replace Wire Numbers on page 1025
Fix Wire Numbers on page 1029
Fix/UnFix Component Tag on page 927
Flip Wire Gap on page 996
Flip Wire Number on page 1040
2074 | Chapter 25 AutoCAD Electrical Command
Footprint Database File Editor on page 1638
Hide Attribute (Single Picks) on page 918
Hide Attribute (Window/Multiple) on page 918
Hide/Unhide Cross-Referencing on page 860
Hide Wire Numbers on page 1046
Icon Menu Wizard on page 1272
IEC Tag Mode - Update on page 207
In-Line Wire Labels on page 963
Insert 22.5 Degree Wire on page 953
Insert 45 Degree Wire on page 953
Insert 67.5 Degree Wire on page 953
Insert Balloon on page 1644
Insert Component on page 789
Insert Component (Catalog List) on page 826
Insert Component (Equipment List) on page 835
Insert Component (Panel List) on page 841
Insert Connector on page 1192
Insert Connector from List on page 1218
Insert Angled Tee Markers on page 1068
Insert Dot Tee Markers on page 1068
Insert/Edit Boundary Box Assignment on page 1659
Insert/Edit Panel Level Assignment (for components) on page 1660
Insert/Edit Panel Level Assignment (for terminal strips) on page 1654
Insert Footprint (Catalog List) on page 1599
Insert Footprint (Equipment List) on page 1603
Insert Footprint (Icon Menu) on page 1591
Insert Footprint (Manual) on page 1596
AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 2075
Insert Footprint (Manufacturer Menu) on page 1588
Insert Footprint (Schematic List) on page 1580
Insert Hydraulic Components on page 1716
Insert Ladder on page 1000
Insert Panel Assembly on page 1607
Insert P&ID Components on page 1721
Insert PLC (Full Units) on page 640
Insert PLC (Parametric) on page 636
Insert Pneumatic Components on page 1711
Insert Reference Arrow - From on page 896
Insert Reference Arrow - To on page 896
Insert Saved Circuit on page 787
Insert Splice on page 1225
Insert Stand Alone Cross-reference on page 892
Insert Terminal (Manual) on page 1596
Insert Terminal (Panel List) on page 845
Insert Terminal (Schematic List) on page 1581
Insert Terminal Strip Representation on page 1653
Insert WBlocked Circuit on page 787
Insert Wire on page 953
Insert Wire Gap on page 996
Insert Wire Numbers on page 1012
Interconnect Components on page 957
Language Conversion on page 1244
Link Catalog Number on page 1697
Link Components with Dashed Lines on page 895
Link Description on page 1697
2076 | Chapter 25 AutoCAD Electrical Command
Link Item Number on page 1697
Link Installation Code on page 1697
Link Location Code on page 1697
Link Manufacturer on page 1697
Link PLC Address Description on page 1697
Link Rating on page 1697
Link Split Tag on page 1697
Link Terminal Number on page 1697
Link User on page 1697
List Signal Code on page 898
Location Box on page 937
Location Symbols on page 935
Make Xdata Visible on page 1568
Map Attributes from Old to New on page 1682
Mark/Verify Drawings on page 1242
Mark Component to Pass Power on page 1709
Migration Utility on page 144
Missing Level/Sequence Assignments on page 1474
Modify Symbol Library on page 939
Move Circuit on page 778
Move Component on page 851
Move Connector Pins on page 1191
Move/Show Attribute on page 918
Move Wire Number on page 1035
Multiple Cable Markers on page 988
Multiple Insert (Icon Menu) on page 790
Multiple Insert (Pick Master) on page 825
AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 2077
Multiple Wire Bus on page 956
Next Project Drawing on page 1231
Panel Bill of Materials Report on page 1469
Panel Component Report on page 1473
Panel Component Exception Report on page 1471
Panel Configuration on page 1570
Panel Nameplate Report on page 1477
Panel Terminal Exception Report on page 1478
Panel Terminal Strip Report on page 1662
Panel Terminal Strip Swap Wire Text on page 1650
Panel Wire Connection Report on page 1479
Pin List Database Editor on page 1337
PLC Database File Editor on page 650
PLC Database Migration Utility on page 665
PLC I/O Wire Numbers on page 1016
Power Load Check Report on page 1710
Previous Project Drawing on page 1231
Project Manager on page 157
Project Properties: Components on page 222
Project Properties: Cross-references on page 230
Project Properties: Drawing Format on page 233
Project Properties: Project Settings on page 218
Project Properties: Styles on page 232
Project Properties: Wire Numbers on page 226
Project-Wide Utilities on page 1033
Project-Wide Update/Retag on page 1238
Promis.e Conversion on page 1679
2078 | Chapter 25 AutoCAD Electrical Command
Publish to Web on page 1247
Push Description Down on page 917
Push Description Up on page 917
Rebuild/Freshen Project Database on page 211
Recalculate Wire Size on page 773
Remove Component Override on page 867
Remove Level/Sequencing Assignment on page 1649
Rename Attribute on page 924
Rename Panel Layers on page 278
Rename Schematic Layers on page 278
Renumber Ladder Reference on page 1238
Report Format File Setup - Missing Level/Sequence Assignments on page
1490
Report Format File Setup - Panel Bill of Material on page 1483
Report Format File Setup - Panel Component on page 1488
Report Format File Setup - Panel Component Exception on page 1486
Report Format File Setup - Panel Nameplate on page 1494
Report Format File Setup - Panel Terminal Exception on page 1496
Report Format File Setup - Panel Wire Connection on page 1499
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Bill of Material on page 1501
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Cable From/To on page 1503
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Cable Summary on page 1505
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Component on page 1519
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Component Wire List on page 1510
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Connector Details on page 1512
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Connector Plug on page 1514
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Connector Summary on page 1517
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Missing Bill of Material on page 1521
AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 2079
Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC/IO Address and Descriptions
on page 1525
Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC I/O Component Connection
on page 1508
Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far on page
1532
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Terminal Numbers on page 1527
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Terminal Plan on page 1529
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire From/To on page 1524
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire Label on page 1534
Report Format File Setup - Wire Annotation Exception on page 1492
Resequence Item Numbers on page 1646
Retag Components on page 928
Reverse Connector on page 1185
Reverse/Flip Component on page 854
Revise Ladder on page 1006
Rotate Attribute on page 919
Rotate Connector on page 1184
RSLogix 500 Export to Spreadsheet on page 689
Save Circuit to Icon Menu on page 785
Schematic Bill of Material Report on page 1441
Schematic Cable From/to Report on page 1445
Schematic Cable Summary Report on page 1444
Schematic Component Report on page 1453
Schematic Component Wire List Report on page 1447
Schematic Connector Details Report on page 1449
Schematic Connector Plug Report on page 1450
Schematic Connector Summary Report on page 1452
2080 | Chapter 25 AutoCAD Electrical Command
Schematic Database File Editor on page 833
Schematic Missing Bill of Material Report on page 1455
Schematic PLC I/O Address and Descriptions Report on page 1457
Schematic PLC I/O Component Connection Report on page 1446
Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far Report on page 1461
Schematic Terminal Numbers Report on page 1459
Schematic Terminal Plan Report on page 1460
Schematic Wire From/To Report on page 1456
Schematic Wire Label Report on page 1463
Scoot on page 850
Set Wire Type on page 290
Settings Compare on page 256
Show Footprint Sequencing Assignments on page 1650
Show Links on page 1701
Show Missing Catalog Assignments on page 1333
Show Signal Paths on page 898
Show Terminal Associations on page 1099
Show Terminal Strip Sequencing Assignments on page 1650
Show Wire Sequence on page 1065
Show Wires on page 1009
Signal Error/List Report on page 1056
Source Signal Arrow on page 1051
Special Explode on page 1694
Split PLC Module on page 853
Split Connector on page 853
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility on page 680
Squeeze Attribute/Text on page 921
AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 2081
Stretch Attribute/Text on page 921
Stretch Connector on page 1186
Stretch PLC Module on page 852
Stretch Wire on page 959
Surfer on page 1229
Swap/Update Block on page 344
Swap Connector Pins on page 1190
Swap Wire Numbers on page 1037
Symbol Builder on page 353
Tag Child on page 1694
Tag Child - Form C on page 1694
Tag Child - N.C. on page 1694
Tag Child - N.O. on page 1694
Tag Nameplate on page 1696
Tag Panel Component on page 1696
Tag Panel Terminal - Terminal Number on page 1696
Tag Panel Terminal - Wire Number on page 1696
Tag PLC on page 1694
Tag Schematic Component on page 1694
Tag Schematic Terminal - Terminal Number on page 1694
Tag Schematic Terminal - Wire Number on page 1694
Tag Schematic Terminal - Wire Number Change on page 1694
Terminal: Erase Internal/External Connections on page 1108
Terminal: Mark External Connections on page 1108
Terminal: Mark Internal Connections on page 1108
Terminal: Show Internal/External Connections on page 1108
Terminal List (From File) on page 1110
2082 | Chapter 25 AutoCAD Electrical Command
Terminal List (Manual Picks) on page 1110
Terminal Properties Database Editor on page 1175
Terminal Renumber (Pick Mode) on page 1106
Terminal Renumber (Project-Wide) on page 1107
Terminal Strip Editor on page 1120
Terminal Strip Table Generator on page 1167
Title Block Setup on page 1256
Title Block Update on page 1253
Toggle Angled Tee Markers on page 1069
Toggle NO/NC on page 857
Toggle Wire Number In-Line on page 1017
Trim Wire on page 958
Unlink on page 1701
Unhide Attribute (Window/Multiple) on page 919
Unhide Wire Numbers on page 1046
Unity Pro Export on page 701
Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet on page 695
Update from Project Scratch Database on page 210
Update from Spreadsheet on page 1549
Update Signal References on page 894
Update Stand-alone Cross-reference on page 894
Update Symbol Library WD_M Block on page 272
Update to New WD_M Block, No Changes on page 271
Update to New WD_M Block, Values, Layers on page 271
Update to New WD_PNLM Block, No Changes on page 271
Update to New WD_PNLM Block, Values, Layers on page 271
User Defined Attribute List on page 1551
AutoCAD Electrical Commands | 2083
View/Edit Component Sequence on page 1651
Wire Annotation Exception Report on page 1476
Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint on page 1631
Wire Arrows for Reference Only on page 790
Wire Color/Gauge Labels on page 962
Wire/Conduit Routing Report on page 1675
Wire Number Leader on page 1036
Xdata Editor on page 1735
X-Y Grid Setup on page 250
X Zones Setup on page 249
Zip Project on page 202
2084 | Chapter 25 AutoCAD Electrical Command
Index
_LISTBOX_DEF table 1330
_PINLIST database table 1339
@MOTOR_NUM@ (motor symbol
tags) 1994, 1996
1 pole circuit breaker symbols 482
1-line circuits 9, 751, 754, 757
1-line symbols 339
1-phase ladders 1002
1-phase motor symbols 520
2+ pole circuit breaker symbols 487
3 -phase ladders 1002
3 Phase Wire Numbering dialog
box 1016
3-phase buses 1011
3-phase motor symbols 521, 705, 1940
3-phase transformer symbols 503
3-phase wires 956957, 1016
3-position selector switches 476
3-voltage-phase switch symbols 588
3D designs 1561
4-position selector switch symbols 478
A
A plug switch symbols 435
Access databases
cable conductor database 994
PLC database format 678
accessories 1155
ace_electrical_standards.mdb file 731,
762
ace_plc.mdb file 1939
active power indicator symbols 595
Add Attribute dialog box 926
Add Catalog Record dialog box 1318
Add Existing Circuit dialog box 1285
Add Footprint Record dialog box 1643
Add Geometry tool 1701
Add Icon - Command dialog box 1280
Add Icon - Component dialog box 1278
Add New Table to MDB dialog box 210
Add Record dialog box 830
Add Spare Wires dialog box 1672
add-on jumpers 11011102
Add/Modify Associations dialog
box 1092
addresses
exporting data 1546
I/O component reports 1459, 1527
PLC database information 648
PLC I/O points 672
PLC modules 643
ae_electrical_standards.mdb files 764
AE2LADDER command 1007
AE3PHASEWIRENO command 1016
AEADDCATALOGTABLE command 210
AEAIPEXPORT command 1564
AEATTJUSTIFY command 921
AEATTLAYER command 913
AEATTRIBUTE command 926
AEATTSIZE command 924
AEAUDIT command 1733
AEAUDITDWG command 1734
AEAUTOREPORT command 1540
AEBLK2SCH command 1684
AEBLOCKREPLACE dialog box 1705
AEBOUNDARYBOX command 1660
AEC_CIRCS sheet 1974
AECABLEMARKER command 979, 983,
985, 987
AECHILDLOCUPDATE command 933
AECIRCBUILDER command
Circuit Configuration dialog
box 761
Circuit Selection dialog box 759
Select Motor dialog box 762
AECOMPONENT command
Add Record dialog box 1318
Component Annotation from External
File dialog box 813
Component Catalog Lookup dialog
box 1320
Index | 2085
Edit Entry dialog box 1080
Edit Multi-Connection Sequence
Terminal Symbol dialog
box 1076
Edit PLC I/O Point dialog box 672
Edit Record dialog box 1318
Insert Component dialog box 794
Insert/Edit Child Component - IEC
dialog box 823
Insert/Edit Child Component dialog
box 820
Insert/Edit Component dialog
box 801, 806
Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog
box 1088
Option - Tag Format Family Override
dialog box 812
Panel Tag List dialog box 811
Parts Catalog dialog box 1315
Tags in Use dialog box 810
AECOMPONENTCAT command 828,
830
AECOMPONENTPNL command 842,
845
AECOMPONENTQ command 838, 840
AECONDUITMARKER command 1671
1672
AECONDUITMARKERLIST
command 1671
AECONDUITMARKERRPT
command 1364, 1675
AECONNECTOR command 1197, 1199
AECONNECTORLIST command 1215
AECONVERTWIRETYPE command 290
AECOPY2SYMLIB command 272
AECOPYGROUPCODE command 1628
AECOPYINSTcommand 1628
AECOPYLEVEL command 1653
AECOPYLOC command 1628
AECOPYMOUNTCODE command 1628
AECOPYOVERRIDE command 867
AEDESTINATION command 1051
AEDWGCFG command 258259, 261
AEECDS2ACADEDWG command 1690
AEEDITATT command 911
AEEDITCOMPONENT command
Add Record dialog box 1318
Add/Modify Associations dialog
box 1092
Component Annotation from External
File dialog box 813
Connector Pin Numbers in Use dialog
box 1201
Edit Record dialog box 1318
Insert/Edit Child Component dialog
box 820, 823
Insert/Edit Component dialog
box 801, 806
Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog
box 1088
Option - Tag Format Family Override
dialog box 812
Panel Tag List dialog box 811
Parts Catalog dialog box 1315
Pin Numbers in Use dialog box 817
Ratings Defaults dialog box 857
Select Description for AutoCAD
Electrical Language Table
dialog box 815
Select Description Text Format dialog
box 816
Tags in Use dialog box 810
Terminal Block Properties dialog
box 1095
AEEDITCONDUITMARKER
command 1671
AEEDITFOOTPRINT command 1613
AEEDITWIRENO command 1033
AEEDITWIRESEQUENCE
command 1073
AEEXPLODE command 1694
AEEXPORT2SS command
Component Data Export dialog
box 1543
Export to Spreadsheet dialog
box 1542
General Data Export dialog
box 1544
Panel Layout Data Export dialog
box 1547
2086 | Index
Panel Terminals Data Export dialog
box 1548
PLC I/O Address/Description Export
dialog box 1546
PLC I/O Connection Export dialog
box 1545
PLC I/O Header Information Export
dialog box 1545
Terminal Data Export dialog
box 1549
Update Drawings per Spreadsheet
Data dialog box 1550
AEFANIN command 1063
AEFANINDEST command 1062
AEFANINSRC command 1061
AEFINDCOMPTEXT command 915916
AEFINDTERMTEXT command 917
AEFINDWIRENO command 1026
AEFIXTAG command 928
AEFLIP command 854
AEFOOTPRINT command
Component Catalog Lookup dialog
box 1320
Din Rails dialog box 903
Footprint dialog box 1598
Insert Footprint dialog box 1595
Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit
dialog box 1613
AEFOOTPRINTCAT command 1600
AEFOOTPRINTDB command 1639
1640, 1643
AEFOOTPRINTEQ command 1603
AEFOOTPRINTMAN command 1598
AEFOOTPRINTMFG command 1588,
1591
AEFOOTPRINTQ command 838
AEFOOTPRINTSCH command 1581,
1586
AEFORMATFILE command
Report Format File Setup - Missing
Level/Sequence Assignments
dialog box 1492
Report Format File Setup - Panel Bill
of Materials dialog
box 1486
Report Format File Setup - Panel
Component dialog
box 1490
Report Format File Setup - Panel
Component Exception dialog
box 1488
Report Format File Setup - Panel
Nameplate dialog box 1496
Report Format File Setup - Panel
Terminal Exception dialog
box 1499
Report Format File Setup - Panel Wire
Connection dialog
box 1501
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Bill of Material dialog
box 1503
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Cable From/To dialog
box 1505
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Cable Summary dialog
box 1508
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Component dialog
box 1521
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Component Wire List dialog
box 1512
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Connector Details dialog
box 1514
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Connector Plug dialog
box 1517
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Connector Summary dialog
box 1519
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Missing Bill of Material
dialog box 1524
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
PLC I/O Address and
Descriptions dialog
box 1527
Index | 2087
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
PLC I/O Component
Connection dialog
box 1510
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
PLC Modules Used So Far
dialog box 1534
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Terminal Numbers dialog
box 1529
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Terminal Plan dialog
box 1532
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Wire From/To dialog
box 1525
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Wire Label dialog box 1537
Report Format File Setup - Wire
Annotation Exception dialog
box 1494
AEGEOMETRY command 1701
AEIMPORTDB command 211
AEINTERNALJUMPER command 907
AEJUMPER command 1104, 1106
AELADDER command 1002
AELANG command 1244
AELANGDB command 1245
AELISTSIG command 898
AELOCATIONSYMBOL command 937
AEMAPATT command 1684
AEMARKVERIFY command 1243
AEMENUWIZ command
Add Existing Circuit dialog
box 1285
Add Icon - Command dialog
box 1280
Add Icon - Component dialog
box 1278
Create Circuit dialog box 1283
Create New Submenu dialog
box 1288
Icon Menu Wizard dialog box 1275
Properties - Circuit dialog box 1296
Properties - Command dialog
box 1293
Properties - Component dialog
box 1291
Properties - Main Menu dialog
box 1288
Properties - Submenu dialog
box 1298
AEMIGRATION command
Migration Review dialog box 149
Migration Utility dialog box 146
AEMTEXT2ATT command 1685
AEMULTI command
Insert Component dialog box 794
Insert/Edit Child Component dialog
box 820, 823
AEMULTIBUS command 957
AEMULTICABLE command 989, 993,
1370
AEP2E command 1679, 1681
AEPANELCONFIG command 280
Format - Schematic Layout Wire
Connection Annotation
dialog box 1574
Panel Balloon Setup dialog
box 1645
Panel Drawing Configuration and
Defaults dialog box 1572
AEPANELLEVEL command 1659, 1662
AEPANELREPORT command
generating reports 1361
Missing Level/Sequence Assignments
dialog box 1476
Panel Bill of Material Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1372
Panel Bill of Materials dialog
box 1471
Panel Component Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1377
Panel Component dialog box 1474
Panel Component Exception Data
Fields to Report dialog
box 1374
Panel Component Exception dialog
box 1473
Panel Missing Level/Sequence
Assignments Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1379
2088 | Index
Panel Nameplate Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1383
Panel Nameplate dialog box 1478
Panel Terminal Exception Data Fields
to Report dialog box 1385
Panel Terminal Exception dialog
box 1479
Panel Wire Annotation Exception
Data Fields to Report dialog
box 1381
Panel Wire Connection Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1388
Panel Wire Connection dialog
box 1481
Wire Annotation Exception dialog
box 1477
AEPANELTERMINAL command 1619
AEPANELTERMINALSCH
command 1583, 1586
AEPASSPWR command 1710
AEPINLISTTABLE command 1337, 1339,
1341
AEPLC command 643
AEPLCDB command
Module Box Dimensions dialog
box 655
Module Specifications dialog
box 664
New Module dialog box 659
PLC Database File Editor 654
PLC Selection dialog box 654
Prompts at Module Insertion Time
dialog box 665
Select Terminal Information dialog
box 657
Style Box Dimensions dialog
box 662
Terminal Block Settings dialog
box 661
AEPLCP command
Module Layout dialog box 639
PLC Parametric Selection dialog
box 638
AEPLCWIRENO command 1017
AEPOWERLOADLEVELS command 1709
AEPOWERLOADREPORT
command 1710
AEPROJECT command
about 167
Batch Plotting Options and Order
dialog box 1235
Copy Project dialog box 169
Create New Drawing dialog box 185
Create New Project dialog box 168
Cross-Reference Table Data Fields to
Display dialog box 1435
Drawing List Data Fields to Display
dialog box 1365
Drawing List Display Configuration
dialog box 188
Drawing List Report dialog box 207
Edit Cross-Reference Symbol Mapping
dialog box 882
Graphical Cross-Reference Format
Setup dialog box 873
Properties dialog box 221
Select Drawings to Process dialog
box 212
Table Cross-Reference Format Setup
dialog box 879
Task List dialog box 209
Update Title Block dialog box 1256
Wire Numbers tab 1025
AEPROJUPDATE command 1240
AEPROPERTIES command
codes for replaceable
parameters 255
Define Layers dialog box 278
Drawing Settings dialog box 238
Edit Cross-Reference Symbol Mapping
dialog box 882
Wire Numbers tab 1021
AEPUBLISH2WEB command 1247, 1249
AEREBUILDDB command 211
AERENAMELAYER command 279
AERENAMEPANELLAYER command 279
AERENUMBERLADDER command 1008
AERESEQUENCE command 1647
AERETAG command 929
AEREVISELADDER command 1007
AERMOVERRIDE command 868
Index | 2089
AEROUTINGREPORT command
Wire Conduit Routing Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1434
Wire/Conduit Routing Report dialog
box 1676
AERSLOGIX command 690691
AESAVECIRCUIT command 787
AESAVEDCIRCUIT command 788
AESAXREF command 894
AESCHEMATICDB command 834835
AESCHEMATICREPORT command
Bill of Material Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1390
Cable From/To Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1398
Cable Label Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1399
Cable Summary Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1392
Component Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1415
Component Wire List Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1405
Connector Details Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1408
Connector Plug Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1410
Connector Summary Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1412
generating reports 1361
Location Code Selection for From/To
Reporting dialog box 1466
Missing Bill of Material Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1416
PLC Component Connection Data
Fields to Report dialog
box 1403
PLC I/O Address and Descriptions
Data Fields to Report dialog
box 1423
PLC Modules Used So Far Data Fields
to Report dialog box 1428
Schematic Bill of Material dialog
box 1444
Schematic Cable From/To dialog
box 1446
Schematic Cable Summary dialog
box 1445
Schematic Component dialog
box 1455
Schematic Component Wire List
dialog box 1449
Schematic Connector Details dialog
box 1450
Schematic Connector Plug dialog
box 1452
Schematic Connector Summary dialog
box 1453
Schematic Missing Bill of Material
dialog box 1456
Schematic PLC I/O Address and
Descriptions dialog
box 1459
Schematic PLC I/O Component
Connection dialog
box 1447
Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far
dialog box 1463
Schematic Terminal Numbers dialog
box 1460
Schematic Terminal Plan dialog
box 1461
Schematic Wire From/To dialog
box 1457
Schematic Wire Label dialog
box 1464
Terminal Numbers Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1425
Terminal Plan Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1431
Wire From/To Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1421
Wire Label Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1432
AESETUPTITLEBLOCK command 1257
1259
AESHOWLINK command 1701
AESHOWSIG command 899
AESHOWXDATA command 1569
AESHOWXREFTABLE command 1437
AESIGNALERRORREPORT
command 1057
2090 | Index
AESOURCE command 1053
AESPLIT command 854
AESPLITPLC command 854
AESS2PLC command
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility 684
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Setup
dialog box 688
AESURF command 1231
AESWAPBLOCK command 346347,
349
AESYMBUILDER command
Attribute Editor 361
Convert Text to Attribute dialog
box 368
Insert Wire Connections dialog
box 365
Insert/Edit Attributes dialog box 362
Save Symbol dialog box 371
Select SymbolObjects dialog
box 355
Symbol Audit dialog box 372
Symbol Configuration dialog
box 356
AETERMDBEDITOR command 1176
1177, 1179
AETERMINALPNL command 846847
AETERMINALSTRIP command 1654
AETERMINALSTRIPREPORT
command 1663
AETERMLIST command 11121113
AETERMLISTFROMFILE command 1112
1113
AETERMRENUM command 1108
AETRIM command 959
AETSE command
Associate Terminals dialog box 1158
Cable Information tab 1137
Catalog Code Assignment tab 1133
Edit Terminal dialog box 1150
Edit/Delete Jumpers dialog
box 1160
Insert Accessory dialog box 1155
Insert Spare Terminal dialog
box 1154
Layout Preview tab 1144
Reassign Terminal dialog box 1151
Renumber Terminal Strip dialog
box 1152
Select Row Cell Styles dialog
box 1161
Terminal Strip Definition dialog
box 1122
Terminal Strip Selection dialog
box 1121
Terminal Strip tab 1127
Terminal Strip Table dialog
box 1164
Toggle Installation Codes dialog
box 1157
Toggle Location Codes dialog
box 1156
AETSEGENERATOR command
Terminal Strip Table
Generator 1170
Terminal Strip Table Settings dialog
box 1146
AEUDA command 1554
AEUNITYPRO command 702
AEUNITYPROSS command 700
AEUNLINK command 1702
AEUPDATEIECTAG command 208
AEUPDATESIGREF command 895
AEUPDATESYMLIB command 940
AEUSERTABLE command 905
AEUTILITIES command 1236
AEVIEWCOMPSEQ command 1652
AEWBCIRCUIT command 788
AEWIREANNOTATION command 1633,
1635
AEWIRECOLORLABEL command 963
AEWIRECONN command 1701
AEWIRENO command 1013, 1015, 1029
AEWIRETYPE command 287
AEXDATA command 1736
AEXREF command 862
AEXREFCHECK command 864
AEXYGRID command 252
AEXZONE command 250
AEZIPPROJECT command 203
Alert dialog box 273
alignment
components 849, 851
Index | 2091
justified text 920921
Allen-Bradley PLCs 688
alternate environment settings 292
amp meters 442, 595
angled tee connections 1065
angled tee markers 10691070
angled wires 955, 961
Annotation Presets dialog box 759
annotations
Circuit Builder circuits 731
circuits 759
converting non-Electrical
blocks 1682, 1684
cross-reference symbols 888
I/O points 670
importing from external files 813
pins 1343
predefined symbol annotations 342
presets 759
ratings 856857
reports 1468, 1477, 1494
schematic wire information 1633,
1635
swapping terminal strip text 1651
terminal strips 1113
wire annotation exceptions 1381
wire connections 1574
wires 1381, 1477, 1494
annunciation symbols 629
archiving projects 202
arrow symbols
converting non-Electrical
symbols 1687
cross-reference arrow symbols 896
897
destination signal arrows 1049
illustrated 454, 628
inserting 1051, 1053
naming conventions 307
project-wide changes 1236
source signal arrows 1049
styles 1050, 1054, 1056
assemblies 16071609
ASSEMBLYCODE field 1341
Assign Wire Numbering Formats by Wire
Layers dialog box 1029
assigning
catalog information 13261327,
1331
level assignments 1653, 1659, 1662
missing assignment reports 1476,
1492
missing catalog information 1334
missing level/sequence
assignments 1379, 1476,
1492
pins automatically 1918
sequencing assignments 1650, 1652
Associate Terminals dialog box 1158
associations
adding 1098
breaking 1100
editing 1098
terminals 1088, 1092, 10981099,
1127, 1158
Attribute Editor 361
attributes
adding to non-Electrical
entities 1692, 1694, 1696
1697, 1700
Attribute Editor 361
blocks 925926
child components 331
child location codes 931, 933
circuits 19821983, 2001, 2007
converting non-Electrical
blocks 1682, 1684, 2034
converting text to 367368, 1685
converting Xdata to 1569
copying codes 1625, 1628
COPYTAG attribute 340
cross-references 331
editing 362, 911, 939940
fixed component tags 927928
footprint attributes 339, 1568
hiding 919
hydraulic symbols 339
in-line wire labels 331
inserting 357, 362
justification 920921
ladders 1000
layers 912913
2092 | Index
link lines 366
linking to title blocks 1261
location boxes 939
location codes 931, 939
location mark symbols 935, 937
mapping 343, 346, 1704
miscellaneous attributes 342
missing 372
moving 849, 918
moving to other layers 912913
multi-line text 930
non-AutoCAD Electrical 341342
P&ID symbols 339
parametric build connectors 331
parent components 331, 931, 933
PLC I/O symbols 331
predefined annotations 342
project-wide changes 1236
ratings 856857
renaming 925
rotating 919
schematic symbols 331
splices 331
splitting tag names 308
TAG1 attribute 331
TAG2 attribute 332
target attributes for wire
information 16301631
templates 353, 1607, 2042
terminal symbols 331, 1939
text size 923924
text styles 921
title blocks 1253, 1259
updating 931, 933
user-defined 15501551, 1554
WD_M blocks 270
WDTYPE attribute 339
wire connections 331, 363, 365
wire signal symbols 331
Xdata 17351736
auditing
drawings 10, 1726, 1728, 1730,
17331734
symbols 369, 372
AutoCAD
inserting blocks in PLC
modules 659
scripts 1237
AutoCAD Electrical
commands 2084
Migration Utility 142144
new features 7, 11, 114, 120, 127
online help 3, 6
Vault ARX 171
AutoCAD Electrical Migration Utility
dialog box 146
AutoCAD Electrical Publish to Web -
Banner, Title Text, Options dialog
box 1249
Autodesk Inventor Professional
exporting data for Cable &
Harness 1561, 15631564
importing data from 1206, 1208,
1215
spreadsheet structure 1217
Autodesk Inventor Professional Export
dialog box 1564
Autodesk Vault
advanced techniques 2070
collaborative design and 171
AutoLISP
circuit attribute assignments 1983
linking expressions to title
blocks 1259
mapping values to title blocks 1266
running routines 659
automatic fill feature 931
automatic pin assignments 1918
Automatic Report Selection dialog
box 1540
automatic reports 15371538, 1540
automatic schematic/panel updates 1574
automatic wire numbering 1012
B
backing up projects 202
ball valves 442
balloons
about 1644
Index | 2093
inserting 16441645
resequencing item numbers 1646
1647
banners (web pages) 1249
batch plotting 1233
Batch Plotting Options and Order dialog
box 1235
batch report generation 1537
battery symbols 444, 595, 617
beacon light symbols 536, 538
bell symbols 444, 617
bending wires 961
bi-directional updates 1574
Bill of Material Data Fields to Report dialog
box 1390
Bill of Materials (BOM)
adding part numbers to
components 13261327
copying 1331
equipment lists and 835
fields in reports 1372, 1390
missing catalog assignments 1334
missing data in reports 1416, 1456,
1524
multiple catalogs 1333
multiple part numbers 808, 1332
performing checks 1332
reports 1440, 1444, 1456, 1471,
1486, 1503, 1524
Bill of Materials reports
about 1440
formatting 1486, 1503
generating 1444, 1471
blank lines in reports 1361
Block Editor 353
Block Replacement dialog box 1705
blocks
adding geometry to 1701
attributes 339, 925926
balloons 16441645
catalog table data 1311
changing symbol appearance 341
converting arrow symbols 1687
converting non-Electrical
blocks 1682, 1684, 2034
converting Xdata to attributes 1569
creating 350
editing library symbols 939940
exploding 1694
footprint attributes 1568
footprint lookup files 16381639
inserting in PLC modules 659
mapping and replacing 17041705
marker blocks 19721973
nameplates 1648
naming conventions 294, 307
PLC terminal blocks 661
splitting 849, 853854
substituting symbols 340
swapping 343344, 346347, 349
Symbol Builder 353
terminal blocks 1095, 1115
updating 343344, 346347, 349
user-defined attributes 1550
values 925926
WD_M blocks 270
BOM (Bill of Materials)
adding part numbers to
components 13261327
copying 1331
equipment lists and 835
fields in reports 1372, 1390
missing catalog assignments 1334
missing data in reports 1416, 1456,
1524
multiple catalogs 1333
multiple part numbers 808, 1332
performing checks 1332
reports 1440, 1444, 1456, 1471,
1486, 1503, 1524
borders on report tables 1352
boundary boxes
level codes 1660
sequences 1660
branches 1561
break symbols 1199, 1208
BREAK value 678
breakers 482, 487
breaking
connectors 1199, 1208
reports into sections 1348, 1361
terminal associations 1100
2094 | Index
terminal tables 1119
terminals after modules 657
bridge rectifier symbols 622
build direction 1987
Build of Materials (BOM)
adding part numbers to
components 13261327
equipment lists and 835
fields in reports 1372, 1390
missing catalog assignments 1334
missing data in reports 1416, 1456,
1524
multiple catalogs 1333
multiple part numbers 808, 1332
performing checks 1332
reports 1440, 1444, 1456, 1471,
1486, 1503, 1524
bus-tap symbols 307, 312
buses
3-phase 956957
multiple 1203
spacing 957, 1988
buzzer symbols 444, 617
C
Cable & Harness (Inventor) 1561
cable conductor database 994
Cable From/To Data Fields to Report dialog
box 1398
Cable From/To reports
about 1440
formatting 1505
generating 1446
Cable Insert/Edit Data Fields to Display
dialog box 1370
Cable Insert/Edit dialog box 993
Cable Label Data Fields to Report dialog
box 1399
cable markers
about 969
cable conductor database 994
colors 994
database 994
editing 993
inserting 794, 970, 979, 983, 985,
987989, 993
multiple 988989, 993
naming conventions 307
shields 996
source and destination
markers 1930
symbols 449, 623
updating 993
Cable Summary Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1392
Cable Summary reports
about 1440
formatting 1508
generating 1445
cables
cable conductor database 994
colors 994
exporting data for Cable &
Harness 1561
fanning wire markers 10581063
importing occurrences from
Inventor 1206, 1208
label data in reports 1399
marker symbols 449, 623, 969
multiple cables 1370
report data fields 1370, 1392, 1398
reports 1440, 14451446, 1505,
1508
source and destination
markers 1930
tags 993
terminal information 1137
capacitive switch symbols 564
capacitor symbols 448, 622
Catalog Code Assignment tab (Terminal
Strip Editor) 1133, 1137
catalog information
assigning to components 1326
1327, 1331
cable markers 979, 983, 985, 987,
993
component data 801, 806
editing footprint lookup files 1639
missing catalog assignments 1334
multi-connection sequences 1080
Index | 2095
multiple BOM part numbers 808
multiple part numbers 1623
part numbers 1332
pin lists 1341
PLC modules 638, 643
terminal catalog codes 1088, 1133
tracking changes to 1241
updating child codes 933
Catalog Lookup File dialog box 222
catalog tables
creating 1320
families 1320
structure 1324
Catalog Values dialog box 1327
catalogs
adding components 1311
adding records 1318
adding tables 210
assigning information to
components 13261327,
1331, 1334
catalog lookup files 197, 221222
copying information from
projects 1326, 1331
database structure 1324
database tables 1330
default MFG values 1330
editing 1311, 1315, 1318
family tables 1311
inserting components from 827
inserting footprints from 15981600
installing manufacturer
content 1324
linking to web pages 1324
LISTBOX_DEF table 1330
lookup tables 1320
migrating 142
miscellaneous 1326
missing assignments 1334
moving files 1312
multiple catalogs 1312, 1326, 1333,
1980
opening 1315
project-specific 1326
subcatalog entries 1361
tables 1311
CATEGORY field 148, 668
cblcolor.dat file 994
cells (terminal tables) 1161
Change Attribute Size dialog box 924
Change Attribute/Text Justification dialog
box 921
Change/Convert Wire Type dialog
box 290, 953
checking
attributes 372
Bill of Materials 1332
cross-references 862, 864
projects in or out 2070
wires 1010
Child Contact and Panel Update from
Schematic Parent dialog
box 933
child-parent relationships
about 353
attributes 331332
child cable markers 970
editing child components 820, 823
inserting child components 820,
823
location codes 931, 933
CIP (Customer Involvement Program) 6
circuit breakers 393, 482, 487, 491
Circuit Builder
about 739
adding new circuits 1967
AEC_CIRCS sheet 1974
AutoLISP and 1983
build direction 1987
bus wire spacing 1988
child contacts 1998
circuit codes sheet 1976
Circuit Configuration dialog
box 761
Circuit Selection dialog box 759
circuit templates 1972
conditional insertion 1986
configuring circuits 744
customizing circuits 705, 1940,
1979
defaults 2011
energy savings 8
2096 | Index
inserting circuits 741
mapping motor parameters 2001
MCC database 731
mcc.mdb files 731
motor symbol tags in wire
numbers 1994
multi-pole insertion 1987
multiple catalogs 1980
new features 9
power feed circuits 8
predefining attribute values 1982,
2007
Select Motor dialog box 762
spreadsheets 1980
stretching and connecting
wiring 2017
tag format 2003
testing circuits 1978
trimming wires 1985
wire numbers 2005, 2010
wire types 1991
circuit code sheets 1976
Circuit Configuration dialog box 761
Circuit Scale dialog box 788
Circuit Selection dialog box 759
circuit templates 1972, 1979
circuits
about 777
adding 1967
AEC_CIRCS sheet 1974
annotations 759
attributes 19821983, 2007
build direction 1987
bus wire spacing 1988
child contacts 1998
Circuit Builder 705, 1940
circuit codes sheet 1976
circuit templates 1979
conditional components 1986
configuring 744, 761
copying 778
defaults 2011
dual one-line circuits 757
icons 1283, 1285, 1296, 2055
inserting 741, 759, 781, 788, 794
mapping motor parameters 2001
marker blocks 19721973
motor symbol tags in wire
numbers 1994
moving 778
multi-pole insertion 1987
multiple catalogs 1980
one-line circuits 751, 754
options 1974
power feed circuits 745, 747, 750
referencing existing 776
reusing 787
saving 780, 787
selecting 759
stretching and connecting
wires 2017
tag formats 2003
templates 1972
testing 1978
trimming wires 1985
WBlocked circuits 781, 788
wire numbers 2005, 2010
wire types 1991
cleaning drawings 1728
clients
client-specific libraries 204, 206
client-specific title blocks 205
project setup 207
subdirectories 204
clocks 595
CODE attribute 1972, 1976
codes
copying values to
components 1625, 1628
drawing parameters 255
family codes 1311
filtering reports 1348
level codes 1660
COILPINS field 1341, 1918
coils
checking 862, 864
pin assignments 1341
collaboration
collaborative design 171
Vault setup 2070
Index | 2097
colors
cable markers 979, 983, 985, 987,
993
cables 994
wires 1027, 1029
columns (database tables) 736
columns (report tables) 1352
comma-delimited files
exported component data 1543
exported panel layout data 1547
exported PLC data 15451546
exported terminal data 15481549
exporting 1542, 1544
updating drawings with data 1550
commands
adding icons for 1272, 1280, 1304
adding to submenus 1288
AutoCAD Electrical commands 2084
Conduit Marker commands 104
Conversion commands 103
Extra Libraries commands 105
icon properties 1293
list of 2084
Main Electrical commands 81, 92
Panel Layout commands 96
Power Check commands 105
Ribbon interface 7
submenu properties 1298
triggering with icons 2055
Vault commands 2070
comments 1242
Compare Drawing and Project Settings
dialog box 257
comparing project settings 256257
Component Annotation dialog box 1684
Component Annotation from External File
dialog box 813
Component Catalog Lookup dialog
box 1320
Component Cross-Reference dialog
box 862
Component Data Export dialog
box 1543
Component Data Fields to Report dialog
box 1415
Component Exception reports
about 1468
formatting 1488
generating 1473
Component Reference Listing dialog
box 864
Component reports
about 1440, 1468
fields in 1415
formatting 1521
generating 1455, 1466
subcatalog entries 1361
component tables 1311
component tags
settings 225
WD_M block attributes 270
Component Wire List Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1405
Component Wire List reports
about 1440
fields in 1405
formatting 1512
generating 1449
components
adding symbols to icon
menus 1270, 1272, 1275,
1278, 1304, 2055
adding to catalogs 1311
alignment 849, 851
annotations 813
attributes 849, 911, 918919
balloons 16441645
catalog data 801, 806, 13261327,
1331
catalog lookup tables 1320
catalogs of 1315, 1318
checking coils or contacts 862, 864
child components 331, 820, 823
conditional components 1986
copying 824
copying code values to 1625, 1628
cross-references 801, 806, 859, 862,
865
data fields for reports 1377, 1415
deleting 849850
descriptions 814, 918
2098 | Index
duplicates 1726
editing 801, 806
equipment lists 832835
exceptions in reports 1374
exporting data 1543
extracting 989, 993
family codes 1311
fence crossing points 825826
flipping or reversing 854855
hydraulic 1716
icon properties 1291
importing from Inventor 1206,
1208
inserting 790, 794, 824826
inserting from catalogs 827828
inserting from equipment lists 840
inserting from panel lists 840842,
845
installation codes 801, 806
interconnecting components 958
jumpers 906907
layers 278
location codes 801, 806, 931, 939
location mark symbols 935, 937
lookup files 832835
manipulating 849
moving 849, 852
multiple catalogs 1312
naming conventions 307
panel components 15791581
parent components 331
part numbers 13261327
peer-to-peer relationships 1915
pin numbers 817
pins 801, 806
PLC database information 678
ratings 801, 806, 856857
removing sequencing 1650
reports 1440, 1455, 1468, 1473
1474, 1488, 1490, 1521
scooting 849, 851
settings 225
signals 898899
spacing 1587
splitting 849, 853854
stretching 849, 852
surfing 1229
swapping contact states 858
switches 801
tables 1311
tags 801, 806, 810812, 927929
terminals 1081
text 914916
updating 343344, 346347, 349,
933
Components tab (Drawing Properties
dialog box) 240
Components tab (Properties dialog
box) 225, 2062
conditional components 1986
conditionally trimming wires 1985
Conduit Marker Data Fields to Display
dialog box 1364
Conduit Marker Report dialog box 1675
Conduit Marker Setup dialog box 1671
Conduit Marker toolbar 104
conduit markers
about 1666
data fields for reports 1364
editing 1667, 1671
inserting 1667, 1671
reports 16741676
scale 1671
support files 1673
conduits
about 1666
reports 16751676
routing data for reports 1434
size 1671
spare wires 1672
support files 1673
tags 1671
configuration
dual one-line circuits 757
naming conventions 307
one-line circuits 754
panel drawings 1570, 1572
power feed circuits 747, 750
settings lists 258
connections
angled tee wiring connections 1065
attribute information 16301631
Index | 2099
customizing 2047
direct-to-terminal wire
connections 1065
displaying 1110
erasing connection codes 1110
exporting data 1545
from/to reports 1457, 1525
interconnecting components 958
level/routing wire connections 1065
multi-connection sequences 1076,
1080
PLC modules 639
reports 1403, 1447, 1468, 1481,
1501, 1510
schematic attributes 331
schematic wire connections 1065
sequencing 1065, 1067, 1073, 1076
stretching wires 2017
symbols 350
tee markers 10691070
templates 363
wire connections 365
wire tools 361
Connector Details Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1408
Connector Details reports
about 1440
fields in 1408
formatting 1514
generating 1450
plug and jack options 1361
Connector Layout dialog box 1199
Connector List tab (Connector Selection
dialog box) 1215
Connector Pin Numbers in Use dialog
box 1201
Connector Plug Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1410
Connector Plug reports
about 1440
fields in 1410
formatting 1517
generating 1452
pin charts 1361
Connector Selection dialog box 1215
Connector Summary Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1412
Connector Summary reports
about 1440
fields in 1412
formatting 1519
generating 1453
connectors
adding pins to 1189
breaking 1199, 1208
connector lists 1215
data fields in reports 1408
deleting pins 1190
fixed spacing 1184
importing 1215, 1217
in-use pin numbers 1201
inserting 1081, 1184, 1197
keyboard shortcuts 1184
layout 1199, 1208
lists 1215
moving pins 1191
multi-connection sequences 1076,
1080
naming conventions 307
no wirenumber changes
symbols 418, 421, 550
pin numbers 11911192, 1201
plug report data 1410, 1452, 1517
point-to-point tools 1182
reports 1440, 1450, 14521453,
1514, 1517, 1519
reversing 1184, 1186
rotating 11841185
sequencing 1076
splices 1226
splitting 849, 853854, 1188
stretching 1187
summary report data 1412, 1453,
1519
swapping pins 1191
symbols 418, 421422, 425, 550,
553
types of 1197, 1208
wire crossings 1184
wirenumber changes symbols 422,
425, 553
2100 | Index
constraints 1115
contacts
checking 862, 864
contact states 858
contact switch symbols 588
Form C contacts 876
graphical cross-references 871, 873
pin lists 13351337, 1339, 1341
skipping during
cross-referencing 861
symbols 394, 507
table cross-references 876, 879, 882
types of 1343
updating 933
continuing surf sessions 1229
Conversion toolbar 103
Convert promis.e Project dialog
box 1681
Convert Text to Attribute Definition dialog
box 1685
Convert Text to Attribute dialog box 368
Convert VIA ECDS or Jr. Project to
AutoCAD Electrical dialog
box 1690
convertible contact pin
annotations 1343
converting
geometry to Electrical-aware
blocks 1692, 1694, 1696
1697, 1700
lines 288
lines to wire connections 1692,
1694, 16961697, 1700
mapping non-Electrical
blocks 1682, 1684
non-Electrical arrow symbols 1687
non-Electrical objects 2034
non-intelligent ladders 10061007
promis.e files 16781679, 1681
replacing blocks 17041705
text to attributes 367368, 1685
text to other languages 1244
text to wire numbers 1686
VIA drawings 1688, 1690
wires to other types 288, 290, 953
Copy Active Drawing Settings To dialog
box 272
Copy Installation/Location/Mount/Group
to Components dialog
box 1628
Copy Level Assignments dialog
box 1653
Copy Project Step 1 - Select Existing
Project to Copy dialog box 169
copying
attributes 272, 347
catalog information 1326, 1331
circuits 778
code values to components 1625,
1628
database tables 733
icons 1272
migration options 147
panel assemblies 1609
panel footprints 1606
PLC modules 649
projects 153
properties 1100
sequencing 1653
wire numbers 1038
COPYTAG attribute 340
costs per kwh 772
count (components) 1332
counter relay symbols 512
coupling device symbols 614
Create New Circuit dialog box 1283
Create New Drawing dialog box 185
Create New Project dialog box 168
Create New Submenu dialog box 1288
Create/Edit Wire Type dialog box 287,
953
CRM tables 1311
Cross-Reference Component Override
dialog box 867
Cross-Reference tab (Properties dialog
box) 2062
Cross-Reference Table Data Fields to
Display dialog box 1435
cross-references
about 859
advanced techniques 1915
Index | 2101
annotations 888
attributes 331
checking coils or contacts 862, 864
child components 820, 823
child location codes 931, 933
component data 801, 806
component setup 865
creating 862
dashed lines 896897
destination symbols 859
displaying 866
drawing properties 862
drawing setup 865
formatting 866
graphical formats 871, 873
hiding 860
inserting 794
multi-line text 930
naming conventions 307
overriding 867
processing 859
project properties 862
project setup 865
project-wide changes 1240
removing overrides 865, 868
reports 859, 1435, 1437
settings 232, 245, 865, 867868
skipping contacts 861
source symbols 859
stand-alone symbols 452, 887888,
894895
surfing on reports 860
symbols 626
tables 876, 879, 882883
text format 870
visibility 860
WD_M block attributes 270
Cross-References tab (Drawing Properties
dialog box) 245
Cross-References tab (Properties dialog
box) 232
CSV files
component spreadsheet data 1579
external component lists 197
importing 1217
current converter symbols 595
current protection relay symbols 510
current switch symbols 588
current transformer symbols 498
Customer Involvement Program 6
customizing
attribute templates 2042
circuits 705, 1940
icon menus 2055
migrating older customization
files 144
panel footprints 2040
ribbon 108
symbols 2018
terminals 2029
wire connections 2047
D
dashed lines
attributes 366
cross-references 896897
point-to-point tools 1182
reference arrows 896897
DAT files
alternate icon menu files 1300
editing 1275, 1304, 2055
icon menu files 1288
locking 1275
Data Fields to Display dialog box 1437
data imports 1206, 1208
databases
cable conductor database 994
catalog databases 808, 13111312,
1324, 1330
change-tracking tables 1241
Circuit Builder 731
copying tables 733
deleting tables 733
ECDS conversions 1688, 1690
editing tables 736
electrical standards database 1979
electrical standards database
editor 731, 738
exporting data to 15421549
footprint lookup files 1638
2102 | Index
importing catalog information
from 1326, 1331
importing connector data 1217
language translation tables 1244
1245
merging 142
migrating 142
motor lookup database 764
moving files 1312
opening tables 732
pin lists 13351337, 1339, 1341
PLC database 1939
rebuilding 211
scratch databases 211
terminal properties 11751177,
1179
user data 904905
DC motor symbols 523
de-rating factors 772
debugging projects 1726, 1728, 1730,
17331734
default libraries 310
default_cat.mdb files 1311
default.grp files 197
default.inst files 197
default.loc files 197
default.mnt files 197
default.wdt files 1253
Define Layers dialog box 278
deleting
components 849850
database tables 733
drawings 156
jumpers 1160
location mark symbols 935
marker blocks 1972
pins from connectors 1190
projects 203204
title blocks 1258
tracking deleted objects 1241
wire gaps 997
wire numbers 1048
deployment 1923
description defaults files 197
descriptions
adding 814
exporting data 1546
formatting 816
language tables 815
moving 918
multiple descriptions 1253
reports 1459, 1527
symbols 350
tracking changes to 1241
translating 1244
updating 933, 1256
destination arrows 1687
destination markers
adding 1059
advanced techniques 1930
fanning 1058
layers 10591060, 10621063
styles 10591060, 1062
destination signal arrows 10491051,
1687
destination wire signal symbols 307, 331
destinations
cross-reference symbols 859, 894
895
listing codes 1057
terminals 1127
toggling installation codes 1157
toggling location codes 1156
tracking changes to codes 1241
devices
box symbols 451, 625
operating symbols 601
diac diode symbols 622
Din Rail dialog box 903
din rails
about 902
inserting 903
diode symbols 448, 622
direct-to-terminal wire connections 1065
direction
build direction 1987
symbols 602603
directories 197
disconnect 1 pole symbols 491
disconnects 393, 489, 491
Display tab (Connector Selection dialog
box) 1215
Index | 2103
Display tab (Insert Connector dialog
box) 1197
displaying
attributes 919
cross-references 860, 866
drawings 186
missing catalog assignments 1334
sequencing 1067, 1650
terminal associations 10981099
terminal connections 1110
terminal strips 1112
wire numbers 1048
wires 1010
dividers 1155, 1197, 1208
dot tee markers 1069
dragging icons on menus 1272
Drawing Audit dialog box 1734
Drawing Format tab (Drawing Properties
dialog box) 249
Drawing Format tab (Properties dialog
box) 235, 2062
Drawing List Data Fields to Display dialog
box 1365
Drawing List Display Configuration dialog
box 188
Drawing List Report dialog box 207
Drawing Properties dialog box
codes for replaceable
parameters 255
Components tab 240
Cross-References tab 245
Drawing Format tab 249
Drawing Settings tab 238, 2062
Styles tab 247
Wire Numbers tab 244
Drawing Settings tab (Drawing Properties
dialog box) 238, 2062
drawing shapes 1595, 1598
drawing standards 221, 2062, 2064
drawings
adding to projects 152
archiving 202
auditing 1726, 1728, 1730, 1733
1734
batch plotting 1233
cleaning 1728
comments in 1242
creating 182
cross-references 865
defaults 218
description 156
displaying 186
generating 679680, 684, 688
grouping in projects 156
inserting reports into 1348, 1352,
1361
moving to another 1232
previewing 156
processing 212
project-wide changes 1240
properties 218
publishing as DWF files 1249
publishing to the Web 1247, 1249
removing 156
reordering 156
reports 207, 1365
settings 238, 249
surfing 1229
task list of changes 209
templates 261
title blocks 1253
tracking changes 12411242
unavailable files 213
updating 1256
updating with imported data 1550
WD_M blocks 270
dual one-line circuits 757
dual power feed circuits 750
duplex receptacle symbols 450, 624
duplicate numbers 1726, 1728, 1734
duplicate tags 1726, 1728, 1734
DWF files
exporting 1249
publishing web pages 1247
DXF files 1249
E
earth symbols 444, 617
ECDS to AutoCAD Electrical
conversions 1688, 1690
Edit Attribute dialog box 911
2104 | Index
Edit Catalog Record dialog box 1318
Edit Child Component dialog box 820,
823
Edit Component - IEC dialog box 806
Edit Component dialog box 801
Edit Conduit/Wire Way Label dialog
box 1671
Edit Cross-Reference Symbol Mapping
dialog box 882
Edit dialog box 834, 1177, 1339
Edit Entry dialog box 1080
Edit Footprint Record dialog box 1643
Edit Language Lookup File dialog
box 1245
Edit Miscellaneous and Non-AutoCAD
Electrical Attributes dialog
box 342
Edit Multi-Connection Sequence Terminal
Symbol dialog box 1076
Edit PLC I/O Point dialog box 672
Edit PLC Module dialog box 643
Edit Record dialog box 830, 835, 1179,
1341
Edit Report dialog box 259, 1354
Edit Terminal dialog box 1150
Edit Terminal Jumpers dialog box 1106
Edit User Table Data dialog box 905
Edit Wire Connection Sequence dialog
box 1073
Edit/Delete Jumpers dialog box 1160
editing
attributes 361362, 911
cable colors 994
cable conductor database 994
cable markers 979, 983, 985, 987,
993
catalogs 1311, 1315, 1318
child components 820, 823
components 801, 806
conduit markers 1667, 1671
cross-reference symbol mapping
tables 882
database tables 736
footprint lookup files 16381640,
1643
footprints 1609, 1613, 1619
icon menu properties 2055
icon menus 1272, 1275, 1304
ladders 10031008
language database tables 1245
marker blocks 1973
multi-connection sequences 1076,
1080
multi-line text 930
part numbers 1331
pin lists 1336, 1339, 1341
pin numbers 1182, 1192
PLC database 654
PLC modules 643, 664
records 830
reports 1354
retagging components 929
RSLogix data 691
schematic lookup files 833835
sequencing 1067, 1073, 1652
signal arrows 1050
spreadsheet data 1542
symbols 341342, 939940
terminal associations 1098
terminal jumpers 1102, 1106, 1160
terminal strips 1110, 1127
terminals 654, 1088, 1092, 1095,
1150, 1177, 1179, 1609,
1613, 1619
text 914917
user-defined attributes 15501551,
1554
wire jumper assignments 906907
wire numbers 10301031, 1033,
1045
wire types 287
Xdata 17351736
effect symbols 605
Electrical Audit dialog box 1733
Electrical Database Builder 1688, 1690
electrical standards database 762, 1979
electrical standards database editor 731,
738
electrolytic symbols 622
electronic symbols 448, 622
enclosure light symbols 444
end barriers 1155
Index | 2105
energy flow 604
energy savings 8
ENV files 292
environment files 150, 292
equipment lists
BOM data and 835
inserting components from 835,
837838, 840
inserting footprints from 1601,
1603, 1605
schematic lookup files 832835
equipotential bond symbols 617
error checking 1726, 1728, 1730, 1733
1734
error reports
component exceptions 1374, 1473,
1488
cross-references 859
exception reports 1468
signal reports 1057
symbol audits 369, 372
terminal exceptions 1385, 1479,
1499
wire annotation exceptions 1381,
1477, 1494
Excel files
din rails 902
exporting component data 1543
exporting panel layout data 1547
exporting PLC data 15451546
exporting spreadsheet data 1542,
1544
exporting terminal data 15481549
importing 1217, 1542
mapping to blocks 17041705
PLC database content 678
reports 1348
RSLogix data 689691
structure 1217
updating drawings with data 1550
exception reports
auditing drawings 1733
component exceptions 1374, 1473,
1488
cross-references 859
terminal exceptions 1385, 1479,
1499
types of 1468
wire annotation exceptions 1381,
1477, 1494
excluding contacts 861
expanding catalog tables 1311
exploding blocks 1694
Export to Spreadsheet dialog box 1542
exporting
comma-delimited files 15421549
component data 1543
data for Cable & Harness 1561,
15631564
database files 15421549
DWF files 1249
panel layout data 1547
PLC data 15451546
reports 1348
RSLogix data 688691
spreadsheet data 15421549
terminal data 15481549
Unity Pro data 694695, 700702
web pages 1247, 1249
external codes 1361
external component files 197
external connections 1110
external destinations 11561157
external jumpers 11011102
Extra Libraries toolbars 105
extra wire numbers 1009
extracting
components 989, 993
wires 989, 993
F
families
family tables in catalogs 1311, 1320
family tag code map files 197
family type naming
conventions 307
overriding family tags 2062
overriding tags 812
Fan-In/Fan-Out Signal Destination dialog
box 1062
2106 | Index
Fan-In/Fan-Out Signal Source dialog
box 1061
Fan-In/Out Single Line Layer dialog
box 1063
fanning markers in or out
about 1058
advanced techniques 1930
destination markers 1059, 1062
layers 10591060, 1063
source markers 1059, 1061
styles 10591060
fault symbols 607
fence crossing points 825826
fields
BOM data in reports 1372, 1390,
1416
cable data in reports 1370, 1392,
13981399
catalog tables 1324, 1330
component data in reports 1377,
1415
conduit marker fields in
reports 1364
connector data in reports 1408,
1410, 1412
cross-reference data 1435, 1437
drawing file data in reports 1365
missing level/sequence
assignments 1379
nameplate data in reports 1383
pin lists 1339, 1341
PLC data in reports 1403, 1423,
1428
report format files 14821483
selecting for reports 1361
terminal data in reports 1425, 1431
terminal strip tables 1164
title blocks 1262
wire data in reports 1388, 1405,
1421, 1432, 1434
file formats
project files 202
web formats 1247
files
copying into projects 153
migrating 142
processing 213
Files Unavailable for Processing dialog
box 213
filtering
catalog records 1324
contact types 1343
report data 1348
Find or Replace Wire Numbers dialog
box 1026
Find/Edit/Replace (drawing or project)
dialog box 915
Find/Edit/Replace Component Text dialog
box 916
Find/Replace Terminal Text dialog
box 917
finding
drawings 915
projects 915
terminal property information 1175
text 914917
wire number text 10251026
fixed component tags 927928
fixed resistor symbols 448, 622
fixed spacing 1184, 1197, 1199, 1208
fixed wire numbers 1009, 10301031,
1033
Fixed/Unfix Component Tag dialog
box 928
flashing beacon light symbols 536
flipping
components 854855
connectors 1186
wire gaps 997
wire numbers 1040
float/level switch symbols 588
flow
energy flow symbols 604
flow switch symbols 431
flow switches 588
symbols 604
folders 142
following signals 898899
fonts 1236
foot switch symbols 435, 588
Footprint Database File Editor 1639
1640, 1643
Index | 2107
Footprint dialog box 1598
Footprint Lookup dialog box 1640
footprint lookup files 197, 16381640,
1643
footprint_lookup.mdb files 1638
footprints
attribute templates 1607
attributes 339, 1568
automatic updates 1574
catalog lookup tables 1320
configuration 1572
copying 1606
copying panel assemblies 1609
creating with Symbol Builder 2040
din rails 902903
displaying sequencing 1650
editing 1609, 1613, 1619
extracting footprint lists 840842,
845847
inserting 1581, 1583, 1586, 1596
inserting from catalogs 15981600
inserting from equipment lists 838,
1601, 1603, 1605
inserting from icon menus 1587,
1591, 1595
inserting from vendor menus 1588,
1591
inserting manually 1595, 1598
inserting panel assemblies 1608
inserting with spreadsheet
data 15791580
layers 275
level assignments 1653, 1659, 1662
lookup database file editor 1639
lookup files 1576, 16381640, 1643
mapping 1576
naming conventions 307
reports 1468
sequencing 1652
spacing 1587
types of symbols 353
wire information 16301631, 1633,
1635
Xdata 1569
Force Attribute/Text to a Different Layer
dialog box 913
force symbols 602603
Form C contacts 876
Format - Schematic Layout Wire
Connection Annotation dialog
box 1574
format files
about 1482
defining 1483
missing level/sequence assignments
reports 1492
panel bill of materials reports 1486
panel component exception
reports 1488
panel component reports 1490
panel nameplate reports 1496
panel terminal exception
reports 1499
panel wire annotation exception
reports 1494
panel wire connection reports 1501
schematic bill of material
reports 1503
schematic cable from/to
reports 1505
schematic cable summary
reports 1508, 1510
schematic component reports 1521
schematic component wire list
reports 1512
schematic connector details
reports 1514
schematic connector plug
reports 1517
schematic connector summary
reports 1519
schematic missing bill of material
reports 1524
schematic PLC I/O address and
descriptions reports 1527
schematic PLC I/O component
connection reports 1510
schematic PLC used so far
reports 1534
schematic terminal numbers
reports 1529
2108 | Index
schematic terminal plan
reports 1532
schematic wire from/to reports 1525
schematic wire label reports 1537
formatting
cross-references 866, 870
description text 816
reports 14821483
wire annotations 1574, 1635
wire numbers 1027, 1029
frequency meter symbols 595
frequency relay symbols 514
from/to reports
cable data 1398, 1446, 1505
controlling sequencing 1065
location codes in 1466
types of 1440
wire data 1421, 1457, 1525
fuse switch symbols 494
fuses 390, 494
fusible disconnect symbols 489
G
gaps
auditing drawings 1730
wire gaps 997
gate valves 442
gauge
gauge label files 197
labels 962963
wires 1027, 1029
General Data Export dialog box 1544
generating
automatic reports 1537
reports 1348, 1361, 14401441,
14681469, 1538, 1540
terminal strip tables 1164
generator symbols 524
generic device box symbols 451, 625
geometry
adding to blocks 1701
converting to Electrical-aware
blocks 1692, 1694, 1696
1697, 1700
exploding blocks 1694
footprint lookup files 1638
global search and replace 914917
globe valves 442
graphic cross-references 871, 873, 876,
879, 882
graphic layers 280
graphic terminal layout 1144
Graphical Cross-Reference Format Setup
dialog box 873
green design 8
grids
I/O variables 700
terminal grid 654
X Zone grid 250
X-Y Grid 252
ground symbols 444, 617
grounding conductors 772
group codes
copying 1628
group code files 197
groups 156
GRP files 197
H
hardware files 700
HCRM values 1311
header information (PLC) 1545
headers in reports 1361
heater element symbols 622
help 3, 6
hiding
cross-references 860
wire numbers 1048
horizontal ribbon 106
horn symbols 444, 617
hour meter symbols 595
HTML files 1247
hydraulic symbols
attributes 339
inserting 794, 1716
libraries 315
naming conventions 307
Index | 2109
I
I/O modules
address and descriptions
reports 1423, 1459, 1527
advanced techniques 1939
annotating points 670
connection reports 1447, 1510
editing points 669, 672
exporting connection data 1545
exporting data for Unity Pro 701
702
I/O parametric build symbols 307
importing RSLogix data 688691
importing Unity Pro data 694695,
700
inserting points 669
PLC address database
information 648
PLC modules 639
schematic attributes 331
types of reports 1440
I/O variables
exporting 701702
Unity Pro data 700
Icon Menu Wizard
about 1270, 1272, 1275
circuit icons 1283, 1285, 1296
command icons 1280, 1293
component icons 1278, 1291
icon properties 1272
menu properties 1288
submenus 1288, 1298
Icon Menu Wizard dialog box 1275,
2055
icon menus
about 1270
adding circuits 780, 1283, 1285,
1296
adding commands 1280, 1293
adding components 1278, 1291
adding icons 1272
advanced techniques 2055
alternate files 1300
best practices 2055
customizing 2055
editing 1304
file structure 1304
footprint display syntax 1643
icon properties 1272
inserting panel footprints
with 15871588, 1591,
1595
locking menus 1275
menu properties 1288
migrating 2055
pages 2055
preferences 221
settings 1275
sharing with multiple users 1923
submenus 1288, 1298
icons
adding to menus 1270, 1272, 1275
changing images 2055
creating 1270, 1272, 1275
IEC mode
cable markers 983, 987
child components 823
component tags 208
configuring projects for 2062, 2064
drawing settings 238
editing components 806
IEC symbols 466
inserting components 806
IEC Tag Mode Update dialog box 208
IEC tags
new drawings 185
updating 208
illuminated push buttons 467
illuminated selector switches 387
importing
catalog information 1326, 1331
connector data 1217
data for I/O drawings 684, 688
RSLogix data 688691
spreadsheet data 1542, 1550
Unity Pro data 694695, 700
in-line components
PLC database information 678
PLC-generated drawings 688
wiring 678
2110 | Index
in-line wire labels
illustrated 415
inserting 794
schematic attributes 331
symbols 544
in-line wire markers
about 964
naming conventions 307
in-line wire numbers 1017, 1040
in-use pin numbers 1201
incrementing wire numbers 1045
inductive switch symbols 562
information lines 1253
Insert Accessory dialog box 1155
Insert Component dialog box 794
Insert Connector dialog box 1197
Insert Destination Code dialog box 1051
Insert dialog box 840
Insert Footprint dialog box 1595
Insert Ladder dialog box 1002
Insert Panel Wiring Diagram Terminal
Strip Representation dialog
box 1654
Insert Spare Terminal dialog box 1154
Insert Wire Color/Gauge Labels dialog
box 963
Insert Wire Connection dialog box 365
Insert/Edit Attributes dialog box 362
Insert/Edit Cable Marker (2nd+ wire of
cable) - IEC dialog box 987
Insert/Edit Cable Marker (2nd+ wire of
cable) dialog box 985
Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent Wire) -
IEC dialog box 983
Insert/Edit Cable Marker (Parent Wire)
dialog box 979
Insert/Edit Child Component - IEC dialog
box 823
Insert/Edit Child Component dialog
box 820
Insert/Edit Component - IEC dialog
box 806
Insert/Edit Component dialog box 801
Insert/Edit Conduit/Wire Way Label dialog
box 1671
Insert/Edit Panel Level Assignment
Component dialog box 1662
Terminal Strip dialog box 1659
Insert/Edit Terminal Symbol dialog
box 1088
inserting
attributes 357, 362
balloons 16441645
break symbols 1199, 1208
cable markers 970, 979, 983, 985,
987989, 993
child components 820, 823
circuits 741, 759, 781, 788
components 790, 794, 824, 1581
components from catalog lists 827
828
components from equipment
lists 835, 837838, 840
conditional components 1986
conduit markers 1667, 1671
connectors 1081, 1184, 1197
cross-reference arrow symbols 896
897
destination wire markers 1059
footprints 1579, 1581, 1583, 1586,
1596, 1606
footprints from catalogs 15981600
footprints from equipment
lists 838, 1601, 1603, 1605
footprints from icon menus 1587,
1591, 1595
footprints from vendor
menus 1588, 1591
footprints manually 1595, 1598
footprints with spreadsheet
data 1580
gauge labels 963
hydraulic components 1716
ladder rungs 1005
ladders 9991000, 1002
link line attributes 366
location boxes 939
location codes 931
multi-connection sequences 1080
multiple components 794
nameplates 16481649
Index | 2111
one-line circuits 751
P&ID symbols 1721
panel assemblies 1608
part numbers 1331
PLC I/O points 669
PLC modules 638, 640
pneumatic components 1711
power feed circuits 745
prompts during 665
reports into drawings 1348, 1352,
1361
signal arrows 1051, 1053
source wire markers 1059
spacers 1199, 1208
spacing inserted items 1587
spare terminals 1154
splices 1226
stand-alone cross-reference
symbols 888, 894
tee markers 1069
terminal accessories 1155
terminal strip tables 1119, 1165
terminal strips 1116, 1654
terminals 1081, 1088, 1583, 1586
WBlocked circuits 781, 788
WD_M blocks 270, 273
WD_PNLM blocks 273
wire connections 363, 365
wire jumpers 906907
wire labels 962963
wire numbers 1009, 1012
wire tags 1013, 1015
wire way labels 1671
wires 955957, 1182
installation
manufacturer content 1324
network deployment 1923
symbol libraries 309
installation codes
cable markers 979, 983, 985, 987,
993
child components 820, 823
component data 801, 806
copying 1628
installation code files 197
location boxes 939
multi-connection sequences 1080
PLC I/O points 672
PLC modules 643
terminal strips 1115
toggling 1157
tracking changes to 1241
updating 933
instrumentation 442, 595
insulating relay symbols 514
interconnecting components 958
internal codes 1361
internal connections 1110
internal destinations 11561157
internal jumpers
terminal jumpers 11011102
wire jumpers 906907
Inventor
exporting data for Cable &
Harness 1561, 15631564
importing data from 1206, 1208
invisible extended entity data
(Xdata) 15681569, 17351736
item number balloons
about 1644
inserting 16441645
resequencing 16461647
Item Numbering Setup dialog box 226
item numbers
balloons 1644, 1646
per-part numbers 226
settings 226
J
jacks
jack connector pin symbols 307
report options 1361
JIC standard 2064
JIC symbols 378
JPEG files 1247
Jr. Projects 1688, 1690
jumper charts 1120, 1144
jumpers
add-on 11011102
charts 1120, 1144
deleting 1160
2112 | Index
editing 1102, 1106, 1160
external 11011102
internal 11011102
terminal jumpers 11011102, 1104,
1106, 1127
terminal strip assignments 1119
wire jumpers 906907
justified text 920921
K
key switch symbols 588
kwh energy loss 772
L
labels
cable labels 1399
gauge labels 962963
LINEx labels 1262
reports 1440
wire labels 962963, 1464, 1537
X-Y Grid 252
ladder schematics 1182, 1576
ladders
about 999
attributes 1000
converting non-intelligent
ladders 10061007
defaults 1000
format settings 235, 249
inserting 9991000, 1002
ladder master line references 307
line reference numbers 10061007
moving 1004
naming conventions 307
phases 1002
PLC-generated drawings 684, 688
project-wide changes 1240
renumbering 1003, 1008
resizing 1003
rungs 1002, 10041005, 1007
spacing 1000, 1002, 1004
tracking changes to reference
numbers 1241
WD_M block attributes 270
Language Conversion dialog box 1244
language tables
descriptions 816, 1244
editing 1245
opening 815
language translation 1244
last-used assignments 1326
latch relay coils 395
latching device symbols 612
layers
about 275
attribute assignment 341, 912913
component block layers 278
configuring for export 1563
exporting wire data to Cable &
Harness 1561
fanning markers 10591063
footprints 275
moving text to other 913
multi-wire layers 1930
nameplate layers 280
non-text graphic layers 280
panel layers 275, 280
renaming 275, 279
report tables 1352
schematic layers 275
settings 235, 249
WD_M block attributes 270
wire layers 281282, 287, 962963,
1027, 1029, 1236
wire number layers 278, 1009
Layout Preview tab (Terminal Strip
Editor) 1144
Layout tab (Connector Selection dialog
box) 1215
Layout tab (Insert Connector dialog
box) 1197
layouts
about 1565
automatic updates 1574
batch plotting 1233
configuration 1570, 1572
editing 1609, 1613, 1619
exporting data 15471548
footprint lookup files 1638
item number balloons 16441645
Index | 2113
level assignments 1653, 1659, 1662
level/routing wire connections 1065
nameplates 353, 1648
naming conventions 307
relationships to schematic
drawings 1576
reports 1468
resequencing item number
balloons 1647
sequencing assignments 1650, 1652
surfing references 1229
tag lists 811
tagging 1697
templates 1607
tools 1566
wire annotation format 1574
Xdata 15681569
leaders
wire leaders 962
wire numbers 1037
LED light symbols 534
level assignments
boundary boxes 1660
components 1662
copying 1653
displaying 1650
missing assignments 1379, 1468,
1476, 1492
removing 1650
reports 1468, 1476, 1492
terminal strips 1659
Level Code Edit - Boundary Box dialog
box 1660
level codes 1653
level switches 431
level/routing wire connections 1065
lever switch symbols 588
libraries
changing symbol appearance 341
client-specific 204, 206
default 309310
editing symbols in 939
hydraulic symbols 315
installing 309
multiple 309
P&ID symbols 315
paths 309
preferences 221
substituting symbols 340
Library Swap -- All Drawing dialog
box 347
library symbols
attributes 356, 361
auditing 369, 372
changing appearance 341
client-specific 204205
converting existing 1682
COPYTAG attribute 340
creating 350, 353, 355
default 310
editing attributes 939940
editing text 939940
family types 307
hydraulic 315
layers and 341
location 309
multiple 309
naming conventions 294, 307
P&ID 315
predefined annotations 342
saving 369, 371
schematic attributes 331
splitting tag names 308
substituting 340
swapping blocks 343344, 346347,
349
Symbol Builder 353
TAG1 attribute 331
TAG2 attribute 332
text size 940
types 353
updating blocks 343344, 346347,
349
light dependent electronics symbols 622
limit switches 427, 557
line reference numbers 10061007
linear direction 602
lines
blank lines in reports 1361
link lines 361, 366
PLC module boxes 655, 662
wire number leader lines 962
2114 | Index
LINEx labels 1262
link lines
attributes 366
cross-references 896897
dashed 896897
point-to-point tools 1182
tools 361
Link Schematic tools 1700
link symbols 1701
linking
catalogs to web pages 1324
displaying links 1701
replacing text with Electrical-aware
entities 1692, 1694, 1700
title block attributes 1261
title block information 1262
unlinking symbols 1702
list of commands 2084
loads 17081710
wires 772
Location Box dialog box 939
location boxes 939
Location Code Selection for From/To
Reporting dialog box 1466
location codes
cable markers 979, 983, 985, 987,
993
child components 820, 823
component data 801, 806
copying 1628
from/to reports 1466
inserting 931
location boxes 939
location code files 197
location mark symbols 935, 937
multi-connection sequences 1080
PLC I/O points 672
PLC modules 643
terminal strips 1115
toggling 1156
tracking changes to 1241
updating child codes 931, 933
location mark symbols 307, 935, 937
Location Symbols dialog box 937
locations of files 197
locking icon menu files 1275
lookup files
footprint lookup files 16381640,
1643
inserting components 840
schematic lookup files 832835
loudspeaker symbols 629
M
magnetic effect symbols 605
magnetic switch symbols 567
Main Electrical toolbars 81, 92
manufacturers
catalog tables 1311
inserting footprints from vendor
menus 15871588, 1591
installing additional content 1324
MFG fields 1330
pin lists 1341
PLC database information 648
PLC modules 638, 643
sorting catalog databases by 1315
updating 933
mapping
AutoLISP values to title blocks 1266
block replacements 17041705
contact mapping
cross-references 871, 873,
876, 879
data for import 688
editing symbol mapping tables 882
imported Inventor data
properties 1206, 1208
ladder diagrams to panel
layouts 1576
non-Electrical blocks 1682, 1684
title block attributes 1261
title blocks information 1262
wire labels 962963
wire list data to Inventor Cable &
Harness 1561
Mark and Verify dialog box 1243
marker blocks 19721973
marking changes 12411242
MARKVERIFY table 1241
master test pilot lights 408
Index | 2115
MAXNC attribute 1335
MAXNO attribute 1335
MAXNONC attribute 1335
MCC database 731
mcc.mdb files 731
MDB files
exporting 15421549
importing 1217
location 197
measurement units 1332
mechanical controls 611612, 614
mechanical footprints
attributes 1568
Xdata 1569
mechanical resonance relay symbols 514
menus
adding symbols to 935, 937, 1270
alternate icon menus 1300
command properties 1293
icon menus 1270, 1272, 1275,
1591, 1595
main menu properties 1288
renaming 1288
sharing with multiple users 1923
submenus 1288, 1298
vendor icon menus 15871588,
1591
Merge Utility 142
Merge/Copy Options dialog box 147
merging databases 142
merging files during migration 142, 147
meters 442, 595
MFG fields 1311
microphone symbols 629
migrating
merge options 147
Migration Utility 142
PLC database 148, 668
settings and customizations 144
Migration Review dialog box 149
Migration Utility
about 142
settings 143144, 146, 149
minimum active power relay
symbols 514
minimum impedance relay symbols 514
mirroring wire numbers 1040
MISC_CAT tables 1311, 1320
MISC1 attribute 1972
miscellaneous attributes 342
Missing Bill of Material Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1416
Missing Bill of Material reports
fields in 1416
formatting 1524
generating 1456
missing catalog assignments 1334
Missing Level/Sequence Assignments
dialog box 1476
Missing Level/Sequence Assignments
reports
about 1468
fields in 1379
formatting 1492
generating 1476
MNT files 197
Modify Line Reference Numbers dialog
box 1007
Modify/Fix/Unfix dialog box 1033
Module Box Dimensions dialog box 655
Module Layout dialog box 639
Module Specifications dialog box 664
modules
specification table 648
terminal information table 648
motion symbols 602603
motor control circuits
customizing 1940
wire numbers 1011
motor control symbols
1-phase 520
3-phase 521
DC motors 523
general 519
generators 524
illustrated 403
starters 525
tags in wire numbers 1994
motor starter symbols 525
motor symbol tags 1996
motors
1-phase 520
2116 | Index
3-phase 521
database 762, 764
DC motors 523
generators 524
starters 525
mount codes
copying 1628
mount code files 197
moving
attributes 849, 918
attributes to other layers 912913
catalog files 1312
circuits 778
components 849, 852
descriptions 918
ladders 1004
leaders with wire numbers 1037
pins 1191
text to other layers 913
wire numbers 10351037, 1041
mtext (multiline text)
editing 930
formatting wire annotations 1635
wire information 16301631
Multi-Connection Sequence Terminal
symbols 1076
multi-connection terminals
about 1076
editing 1076, 1080
multi-level terminal strips 1127
multi-level terminals 1098
multi-stack terminals 1098
multi-tier terminals 1098
Multiple Bill of Material Information
dialog box 808, 1332
multiple Bill of Materials 1332
multiple bus wiring 957, 1203
multiple cable markers 989, 1370
Multiple Cable Markers dialog box 989
Multiple Catalog Part Number
Assignments dialog box 808,
1333
multiple catalogs 1312, 1333
multiple clients
about 204
libraries 206
project setup 207
sharing icon menus 1923
title blocks 205
Vault setup 2070
multiple connection terminals 331
multiple libraries 309
multiple part numbers 1623
Multiple Wire Bus dialog box 957
multipole circuits 1982, 1987
multipole terminal block units 1343
N
Nameplate reports
about 1468
fields in 1383
formatting 1496
generating 1478
nameplates
about 353, 1648
creating 1649
inserting 1648
layers 280
reports 1383, 1468, 1478, 1496
stretchable 1649
surfing references 1229
naming conventions
attribute templates 2042
catalog tables 1311
circuit templates 1979
menus 1288
panel footprints 2040
schematic lookup files 832
symbols 294, 307, 2055
wire connections 2047
navigating through drawings 1232
NC contact state 858
neon pilot lights 408
network deployment 1923
new circuits 1967
new drawings 182
New Module dialog box 659
NEW_DWG value 678
next drawing command 1232
NO contact state 858
no wire numbering 10
Index | 2117
non-AutoCAD Electrical attributes 341
342
non-intelligent ladders 10061007
non-text graphic layers 280
normal wire numbers 1009
NULL contact values 861
O
OFF-delay timers 400
older versions of files 142
one-line circuits 9, 751, 754, 757
one-line symbols 312, 339
creating 2033
naming conventions 307
online help 3, 6
opening drawings 1232
opening tables 732
operating devices 601
Option - Tag Format Family Override
dialog box 812
Optional ENV File Assignment for Current
Project dialog box 292
Optional Script File Reference dialog
box 1353
orientation
connectors 1197, 1215
pin annotations 1343
terminal strips 1113
Orientation tab (Connector Selection
dialog box) 1215
Orientation tab (Insert Connector dialog
box) 1197
origin points 350
overriding
cross-reference settings 865, 867
868
tags 812, 2062
wire types 288
P
P&ID symbols
attributes 339
inserting 794, 1721
libraries 315
naming conventions 307
page breaks in reports 1361
Panel Balloon Setup dialog box 1645
Panel Bill of Material Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1372
Panel Bill of Materials dialog box 1471
Panel Component Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1377
Panel Component dialog box 1474
Panel Component Exception Data Fields
to Report dialog box 1374
Panel Component Exception dialog
box 1473
Panel Component Layers dialog box 280
panel component lists 845
Panel Components dialog box 845
Panel Drawing Configuration and Defaults
dialog box 1572
Panel Equipment In dialog box 1603
Panel Footprint dialog box 1600
Panel Footprint Lookup Database File
Editor dialog box 1639
panel footprints
attribute templates 1607
attributes 339, 1568
automatic updates 1574
catalog lookup tables 1320
configuration 1572
copying 1606
copying panel assemblies 1609
creating with Symbol Builder 2040
din rails 902903
editing 1609, 1613, 1619
extracting footprint lists 840842,
845847
inserting 1579, 1581, 1583, 1586,
1596
inserting from catalogs 15981600
inserting from equipment
lists 1601, 1603, 1605
inserting from icon menus 1587,
1591, 1595
inserting from vendor menus 1588,
1591
inserting manually 1595, 1598
inserting panel assemblies 1608
2118 | Index
inserting with spreadsheet
data 1580
layers 275
level assignments 1653, 1659, 1662
lookup files 197, 1576, 16381640,
1643
mapping 1576
naming conventions 307
reports 1468
sequencing assignments 1650, 1652
spacing 1587
symbols 353
wire information 16301631, 1633,
1635
Xdata 1569
panel layers
renaming 275, 279
settings 275
Panel Layout - Component Insert/Edit
dialog box 1613
Panel Layout - Terminal Insert/Edit dialog
box 1619
Panel Layout Data Export dialog
box 1547
Panel Layout List - Schematic Components
Insert dialog box 842
Panel Layout toolbar 96
panel layouts
about 1565
automatic updates 1574
configuration 1570, 1572
editing 1609, 1613, 1619
exporting data 15471548
footprint lookup files 1638
item number balloons 16441645
level assignments 1653, 1659, 1662
level/routing wire connections 1065
nameplates 353, 1648
naming conventions 307
relationships to schematic
drawings 1576
reports 1468
resequencing item number
balloons 1647
sequencing assignments 1650, 1652
surfing references 1229
tag lists 811
tagging 1697
templates 1607
tools 1566
wire annotation format 1574
Xdata 15681569
panel lists
inserting components from 840
842, 845
inserting terminals from 846847
Panel Missing Level/Sequence Assignments
Data Fields to Report dialog
box 1379
Panel Nameplate Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1383
Panel Nameplate dialog box 1478
panel reports
about 1348, 1468
automatic generation 1537
bill of materials reports 1372, 1471,
1486
component exception reports 1374,
1473, 1488
component reports 1377, 1474,
1490
generating 1361, 14681469
list of 1468
missing level/sequence assignments
reports 1379, 1476, 1492
nameplate reports 1383, 1478, 1496
terminal exception reports 1385,
1479, 1499
types of 1468
wire annotation exception
reports 1381, 1477, 1494
wire connection reports 1388,
1481, 1501
Panel Tag List dialog box 811
Panel Terminal Exception Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1385
Panel Terminal Exception dialog
box 1479
Panel Terminal List - Schematic Terminals
Insert dialog box 846
Panel Terminal Strip Graphical Report
Parameters dialog box 1663
Index | 2119
Panel Terminals Data Export dialog
box 1548
Panel Terminals dialog box 847
panel terminals lists 846
Panel Wire Annotation Exception Data
Fields to Report dialog
box 1381
Panel Wire Connection Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1388
Panel Wire Connection dialog box 1481
panels
about 1565
automatic updates 1574
configuration 1570, 1572
editing 1609, 1613, 1619
exporting data 15471548
footprint lookup files 1638
item number balloons 16441645
level assignments 1653, 1659, 1662
level/routing wire connections 1065
nameplates 353, 1648
naming conventions 307
panel assemblies 16071609
relationships to schematic
drawings 1576
reports 1468
resequencing item number
balloons 1647
schematic-to-panel terminal
relationships 1098
sequencing assignments 1650, 1652
surfing references 1229
tag lists 811
tagging 1697
templates 1607
tools 1566
wire annotation format 1574
Xdata 15681569
paralleled wires 772
parameters
drawing properties 255
wire annotations 1633, 1635
wire numbers 1029
wires 772
parametric connectors 331
parametric PLC modules 636, 638
parametric twisted pair symbols
naming conventions 307
schematic attributes 331
parent attributes 353
parent cable markers 970, 979, 983, 985,
987
parent location codes 931, 933
parent symbols
about 353
creating 2025
schematic attributes 331
TAG1 attribute 331
part catalogs 1311
part numbers
assigning 13261327
editing 1331
inserting 1331
multiple 808, 1623
multiple bill of materials 1332
sorting catalog databases by 1315
terminal catalog codes 1133
updating 933
Parts Catalog dialog box 1315
passing power 1710
pasting database tables 733
paths
file locations 197
libraries 309, 349
project files 202
signal paths 899
PC3 (plotter configuration files) 1235
PDS (Project Database Service) 1550
PEER_COILPINS field 1341, 1918
PEER_PINLIST field 1341, 1918
peer-to-peer relationships 1915
phase meter symbols 595
phases 1002
photo eye switch symbols 435
photoelectric emitter switch
symbols 569, 576
photoelectric emitter-receiver switch
symbols 576
photoelectric receiver switch
symbols 573, 576
photosensitive electronic symbols 622
2120 | Index
physical representation block
symbols 1576
Pick List for Panel Terminal Strip
Report/Graphical Report dialog
box 1663
pigtails 350
pilot lights
beacon light symbols 536, 538
general symbols 526
illustrated 406
LED symbols 534
master test pilot lights 408
neon pilot lights 408
push to test light symbols 531
standard light symbols 528
transformer light symbols 529
pin charts 1361
pin lists
about 1335
advanced techniques 1918
assignments 1343
editing 1336, 1339, 1341
pin numbers in use 1201
selecting 1337
special uses 1343
table structure 1339, 1341
type 4 pin combinations 1343
pin numbers
editing 1192
exporting for Cable & Harness 1561
in-use 817, 1201
point-to-point wiring 1182
schematic attributes 331
swapping 1191
tracking changes to 1241
Pin Numbers in Use dialog box 817
pin tools 361
PINLIST attribute 1335
PINLIST database 1339
PINLIST field 1341, 1918
PINLIST_TYPE attribute 1343
pins
adding to connectors 1189
annotations 1343
child components 820, 823
component data 801, 806
in-use numbers 817
inserting 1197
moving 1191
naming conventions 307
pin assignments 1918
pin charts 1361
pin lists 1201, 13351337, 1339,
1341
pin tools 361
PLC I/O points 672
PLC modules 643
point-to-point wiring 1182
reports 1361
schematic attributes 331
settings 1197
spacing 1199, 1208
swapping numbers 1191
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
symbols
inserting 794, 1721
libraries 315
naming conventions 307
symbol attributes 339
pitch 1113
PLC Component Connection Data Fields
to Report dialog box 1403
PLC database
about 648
advanced techniques 1939
CATEGORY field 148, 668
contents 636, 678
DESCRIPTION field 148, 668
editing 654
generating drawings 679680, 684,
688
migrating 142
Migration utility 148
PLC Database Migration utility 668
tables in 648
PLC Database File Editor dialog
box 654, 1939
PLC Database Migration utility 668
PLC I/O Address and Descriptions Data
Fields to Report dialog
box 1423
Index | 2121
PLC I/O Address and Descriptions
reports
about 1440
fields in 1423, 1546
formatting 1527
generating 1459
PLC I/O Address/Description Export dialog
box 1546
PLC I/O Component Connection
reports
about 1440
fields in 1403
formatting 1510
generating 1447
PLC I/O Connection Export dialog
box 1545
PLC I/O Header Information Export dialog
box 1545
PLC I/O modules
address and descriptions in
reports 1459, 1527
advanced techniques 1939
annotating points 670
AutoLISP routines 659
boxes 655, 662
component data in reports 1403
copying 649
creating 659
data fields in reports 1423
database 648, 678, 1939
editing 643, 664
editing symbols 669, 672
exporting address/description
data 1546
exporting header data 1545
exporting I/O connection data 1545
exporting Unity Pro data 701702
full units 636
generating 636
generating drawings 679680, 684,
688
I/O points 669, 672
importing Unity Pro data 694695,
700
inserting 640
inserting AutoCAD blocks 659
inserting I/O points 669
line properties 655
migration utility 148, 668
module data 678
naming conventions 307
parametric symbols 636
PLC modules used so far in
reports 1428, 1463, 1534
prompts 665
reports 1440
RSLogix data 688691
splitting 849, 853854
spreadsheet format 678
stand-alone points 669, 672
stretching 849, 852
styles 674
symbol illustrations 410
symbol schematic attributes 331
symbols 331, 539
terminals 650, 657, 661
tracking changes to 1241
wire numbers 1017
PLC I/O Wire Numbers dialog box 1017
PLC Modules Used So Far Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1428
PLC Modules Used So Far reports
about 1440
fields in 1428
formatting 1534
generating 1463
PLC Parametric Selection dialog box 638
PLC Selection dialog box 654
PLCIO files 669
plotter configuration files (PC3) 1235
plotting 1233
plug connectors
inserting 1197, 1208
plug/jack connector pin
symbols 307
reports 1361, 1410, 1440, 1452,
1517
plug/receptacle combinations 1197,
1208
pneumatic components 794, 1711
PNG files 1247
point-to-point schematics 1182
2122 | Index
point-to-point wiring tools
bending wires 1202
connector tools 1182
importing connector data 1217
importing data 1206, 1208
multiple buses 1203
splices 1226
post-processing reports 1361
Power Check tools 105, 17081710
power distribution blocks 416, 545
power factor meter symbols 595
power feed circuits 745, 747, 750751,
754, 757
power receptacles 450, 624
power source symbols 617
Power Source/Load Report dialog
box 1710
power sources
reports 1710
symbols 17081710
power switches 487
prefixes on signal arrows 1050
pressure switches 429, 560
pressure/current converter symbols 595
previewing drawings 156
previous drawing command 1232
previous releases
migrating custom settings 144
migrating files 142
printing reports 1361
Project Database Service (PDS) 1550
Project Database Table Data - Project
Drawing Files Update dialog
box 211
project files
about 150
contents 202
settings in 218
project label files 197
Project Manager
about 150, 167
Copy Project dialog box 169
creating projects 152
Define Layers dialog box 278
Drawing List Display Configuration
dialog box 185, 188
Drawing List Report dialog box 207
Properties dialog box 221
Select Drawings to Process dialog
box 212
switching projects 157
Task List dialog box 209
Project Settings tab (Properties dialog
box) 221, 2062
Project Zip dialog box 203
project-related files 197
Project-wide Schematic Terminal
Renumber dialog box 1108
project-wide tools
batch plotting 1233
marking changes 1241
moving between drawings 1232
Project-Wide Utilities dialog
box 1236
publishing to the Web 1247, 1249
renumbering ladders 1238
scripts 1237
surfing 1229
title blocks 1253
translating descriptions 1244
updating and retagging 1240
Project-Wide Update or Retag dialog
box 1240
Project-Wide Utilities dialog box 1236
projects
about 150
adding drawings 152
alternate environment settings 292
archiving 202
auditing 1726, 1728, 1730, 1733
1734
client setup 207
collaborative design 171
comparing settings 256257
configuring for drawing
standards 2062, 2064
converting promis.e projects 1681
copying 153
copying catalog information 1326,
1331
creating 152
cross-references 865
Index | 2123
database files 211
database table data 211
deleting 203204
deleting drawings 156
descriptions 202
file formats 202
fixed component tags 927928
icon menu files 1300
managing drawings in 156
master files 171
multiple clients 204206
previewing 156
project files 202
Project Manager 167
project-related files 197
project-wide utilities 1236
properties 218
recently opened 150
related files 197
resizing all text 923
saving settings 256257
saving to web sites 1247, 1249
script files 1237
surfing 1229
switching 157
task lists 209
terminal lists 1088
Vault and 171, 2070
versions of 2070
zipping 202
promis.e conversion 16781679, 1681
promis.e Conversion dialog box 1679
prompts
missing 372
PLC modules 665
Prompts at Module Insertion Time dialog
box 665
propagation flow or signal symbols 604
properties
about 218
circuit icons 1296
command icons 1293
component icons 1291
copying 1100
din rails 902
drawings 218
icons 1272
imported Inventor data 1206, 1208
line entities 902
mapping for export to Cable &
Harness 1561
menus 1288
project-wide changes 1240
projects 218
submenus 1298
templates 261
terminals 1088, 1095, 1127, 1175
1177, 1179
wire numbers 1017
X zones 250
X-Y grid 252
Properties - Circuit dialog box 1296
Properties - Command dialog box 1293
Properties - Component dialog box 1291
Properties - Main Menu dialog box 1288
Properties - Submenu dialog box 1298
Properties dialog box
Components tab 225
configuring for IEC standard 2062
Cross-References tab 232
Drawing Format tab 235
Project Settings tab 221
Styles tab 233
Wire Numbers tab 230
proximity switches
capacitive switch symbols 564
illustrated 435
inductive switch symbols 562
magnetic switch symbols 567
photoelectric emitter switch
symbols 569, 576
photoelectric emitter-receiver switch
symbols 576
photoelectric receiver switch
symbols 573, 576
touch switch symbols 581
ultrasonic switch symbols 578
Publish to Web - Temporary Folder for
Build dialog box 1247
publishing
drawing files as HTML 1247
options 1249
2124 | Index
pull cord switch symbols 435, 588
purging unused items 1728
push buttons 378, 466467
push to test light symbols 531
pyrometer symbols 595
Q
qualifying symbols
effect symbols 605
energy flow symbols 604
fault symbols 607
linear direction of force or
motion 602
mechanical controls symbols 611
612, 614
operating devices 601
propagation flow or signal
symbols 604
radiation symbols 606
rotative direction of force or
motion 603
winding symbols 610
quick relay coil symbols 514
R
radiation symbols 606
RATING field 1330
ratings
child components 820, 823
component data 801, 806
entering values 856857
PLC I/O points 672
ratings defaults files 197
terminals 1088
tools 361
updating 933
Ratings Defaults dialog box 857
RC network symbols 622
reactors 492
real time error checking files 197
Reassign Terminal dialog box 1151
reassigning terminals 1151
Rebuild Database File dialog box 211
rebuilding databases 211
rebuilding terminal strips 1144, 1170
receptacle connectors 1197, 1208
recording wattmeter symbols 595
records
adding 736, 830
catalog structure 1324
editing 736, 830, 833
editing footprint lookup files 1640,
1643
editing in catalogs 1318
schematic lookup files 833, 835
terminal properties 1175, 1179
user data 904905
Ref Des (tags) 801
referencing
arrow symbols 454, 628
existing circuits 776
format settings 235, 249
WD_M block attributes 270
refreshing terminal strips 1144, 1170
relationships 10981099
relays
counter relay symbols 512
current protection relay
symbols 510
general symbols 507, 514
illustrated 394, 398
relays with suppression symbols 508
sensing lack of phase 514
time delay relay symbols 517
voltage protection relay
symbols 512
relays with suppression symbols 508
Remove Component Override dialog
box 868
removing
components 849850
database tables 733
drawings 156
jumpers 1160
location mark symbols 935
marker blocks 1972
pins from connectors 1190
projects 203204
sequencing 1650
title blocks 1258
Index | 2125
tracking deleted objects 1241
wire gaps 997
wire numbers 1048
Rename Panel Layers dialog box 279
Rename Schematic Layers dialog
box 279
renaming
attributes 925
layers 275, 279
menus 1288
Renumber Ladders dialog box 1008
Renumber Terminal Strip dialog
box 1152
renumbering
ladders 1003, 1008
terminal strips 1152
terminals 11071108
reordering drawings 156
repairing wire gaps 1730
replaceable parameters 255
replacing
blocks using spreadsheet data 1704
1705
text 914917
WD_M blocks 272
wire number text 10251026
Report Format File Setup - Missing
Level/Sequence Assignments
dialog box 1492
Report Format File Setup - Panel Bill of
Material dialog box 1486
Report Format File Setup - Panel
Component dialog box 1490
Report Format File Setup - Panel
Component Exception dialog
box 1488
Report Format File Setup - Panel
Nameplate dialog box 1496
Report Format File Setup - Panel Terminal
Exception dialog box 1499
Report Format File Setup - Panel Wire
Connection dialog box 1501
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Bill
of Material dialog box 1503
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Cable
From/To dialog box 1505
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Cable
Summary dialog box 1508
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Component dialog box 1521
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Component Wire List dialog
box 1512
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Connector Details dialog
box 1514
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Connector Plug dialog
box 1517
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Connector Summary dialog
box 1519
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Missing Bill of Material dialog
box 1524
Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC
I/O Address and Descriptions
dialog box 1527
Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC
I/O Component Connection
dialog box 1510
Report Format File Setup - Schematic PLC
Modules Used So Far dialog
box 1534
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Terminal Numbers dialog
box 1529
Report Format File Setup - Schematic
Terminal Plan dialog box 1532
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire
From/To dialog box 1525
Report Format File Setup - Schematic Wire
Label dialog box 1537
Report Format File Setup - Wire
Annotation Exception dialog
box 1494
report format files 14821483
reports
about 1348
automatic 15371538, 1540
change-tracking reports 1243
conduit markers 16741675
2126 | Index
conduit routing reports 1676
cross-references 859
drawing lists 207
editing 1354
exception/error reports 859
exporting for Cable &
Harness 1561, 15631564
filtering 1348
format files 14821483
from/to reports 1065
generating 1361, 1441
grouping 1537
inserting in drawings 1361
missing catalog assignments 1334
panel reports 14681469
power check reports 1710
printing 1361
resizing 1361
running 15371538, 1540
saving 1361
saving to script files 1353
schematic reports 14401441
settings 1361
settings lists 258259
sorting 1361
stand-alone reference code
reports 1057
surfing 860
table setup 1352
terminal pick lists 1663
terminal strip tables 1119, 1663
types of 1440
updating configurations 261
wildcard characters 1348
wire signal reports 1057
Resequence Panel Item Numbers dialog
box 1647
resequencing
item number balloons 16461647
terminal numbers 11071108
resistors 448, 622
resizing
ladders 1003
reports 1361
text 923924, 940
wire numbers 1046
wires 960
Retag Components dialog box 929
retagging
components 929
project-wide changes 1240
reusing circuits 787
Reverse/Flip Component dialog box 855
reversing
components 854855
connectors 1184, 1186
reviewing drawing sets 1242
RGF files 1537
ribbon
about 7, 106
Conduit Marker tools 104
Conversion tools 103
customizing 108
displaying and organizing 106
Extra Library tools 105
Main Electrical tools 81, 92
Panel Layout tools 96
Power Check tools 105
tool palettes and 108
right angle bends 961
rolling back projects 2070
rotating
attributes 919
connectors 11841185
terminal strips 1113
wire numbers 1036, 1046
rotating beacon light symbols 538
rotative direction symbols 603
routing
copying 1653
displaying 1650
editing 1652
removing 1650
wire conduit routing data in
reports 1434
routing reports 1434, 1676
rows
report tables 1352
row styles 1161
RSLogix
exporting PLC spreadsheets 688
691
Index | 2127
importing files 197
RSLogix 500 Import Change Module dialog
box 691
RSLogix 500 Import dialog box 690
ruling (terminal strips) 1113
rungs
inserting 1005
spacing 1002, 1004, 1007
running
automatic reports 1537
reports 1348, 1538, 1540
scripts 1237
S
sandbox guidelines 2070
Save Circuit to Icon Menu dialog
box 787
Save Symbol dialog box 371
saving
circuits 780, 787
custom settings 144
DWF files 1249
project settings 256257
reports 1361
symbols 369, 371
web formats 1247, 1249
scale
conduit markers 1671
format settings 235, 249
PLC modules 638
text 940
Schematic Bill of Material dialog
box 1444
Schematic Cable From/To dialog
box 1446
Schematic Cable Summary dialog
box 1445
Schematic Component dialog box 828,
1455
Schematic Component Wire List dialog
box 1449
Schematic Components List Panel Layout
Insert dialog box 1581
Schematic Components or Terminals
dialog box 1586
Schematic Connector Details dialog
box 1450
Schematic Connector Plug dialog
box 1452
Schematic Connector Summary dialog
box 1453
Schematic Database File Editor 834835
schematic diagrams
attributes 331
auditing 1726, 1728, 1730, 1733
1734
automatic updates 1574
generating from PLC I/O
modules 679680, 684, 688
inserting panel footprints 1581,
1586
inserting terminals 1583, 1586
ladder diagrams 1182, 1576
layers 275
panel component spreadsheet
data 15791580
point-to-point 1182
relationship to panel layouts 1576
reports 1468
showing links 1701
tagging 1696
wire connections 1065
Schematic Equipment In dialog box 840
schematic layers
renaming 275, 279
settings 275
Schematic Layout Wire Connection
Annotation dialog box 1635
schematic lookup files
about 832
editing 833835
inserting components 840
location 197
Schematic Missing Bill of Material dialog
box 1456
Schematic PLC I/O Address and
Descriptions dialog box 1459
Schematic PLC I/O Component
Connection dialog box 1447
Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far dialog
box 1463
2128 | Index
schematic reports
about 1348, 1440
automatic generation 1537
bill of materials reports 1390, 1444,
1503
cable from/to reports 1398, 1446,
1505
cable label reports 1399
cable summary reports 1392, 1445,
1508
component reports 1415, 1455,
1521
connection sequencing reports 1065
connector data 1408
connector details reports 1450, 1514
connector plug reports 1410, 1452,
1517
connector summary reports 1412,
1453, 1519
cross-reference data 1435, 1437
generating 1361, 1440
list of 1440
location codes in from/to
reports 1466
missing bill of material
reports 1416, 1456, 1524
PLC connection reports 1403, 1423,
1447, 1510
PLC I/O address and descriptions
reports 1459, 1527
PLC modules used so far
reports 1428, 1463, 1534
terminal numbers reports 1425,
1460, 1529
terminal plan reports 1431, 1461,
1532
types of 1440
wire conduit routing data 1434
wire from/to reports 1421, 1457,
1525
wire label reports 1432, 1464, 1537
wire list reports 1405, 1449, 1512
schematic symbols
attributes 331
child symbols 353
inserting 794
parent symbols 353
terminal symbols 353
Schematic Terminal Numbers dialog
box 1460
Schematic Terminal Plan dialog
box 1461
Schematic Terminals List Panel Layout
Insert dialog box 1583
Schematic Wire From/To dialog
box 1457
Schematic Wire Label dialog box 1464
Schematic Wire Numbers Panel Wiring
Diagram dialog box 1633
schematic-to-panel terminal
relationships 1098
schematic-to-schematic terminal
relationships 1098
schematics
attributes 331
auditing 1726, 1728, 1730, 1733
1734
automatic updates 1574
generating from PLC I/O
modules 679680, 684, 688
inserting panel footprints
with 1581, 1586
inserting terminals with 1583, 1586
ladder diagrams 1182, 1576
layers 275
panel component spreadsheet
data 15791580
point-to-point 1182
relationship to panel layouts 1576
reports 1468
showing links 1701
tagging 1696
wire connections 1065
scooting
components 849, 851
connectors 1182
wire numbers 1035
wires 849, 851, 1182
SCR symbols 622
scratch databases 211
Script File Options Reference dialog
box 1353
Index | 2129
scripts
adding icons for 1280
batch plotting 1235
project-wide scripts 1237
saving reports to script files 1353
search paths
file locations 197
libraries 309
searching
finding wire number text 1025
1026
terminal properties database 1175
text 914917
sections in report tables 1352
Select Circuit dialog box 761, 764
Select Description from AutoCAD Electrical
Language Table dialog box 815
816
Select Description Text Format dialog
box 816
Select Drawings to Process dialog
box 212
Select Load dialog box 764
Select Motor dialog box 762
Select Pin List Table dialog box 1337
Select Row Cell Styles dialog box 1161
Select Symbol/Objects dialog box 355
Select Terminal Information dialog
box 657
Select Terminal Properties Table dialog
box 1176
Select Terminals to Jumper dialog
box 1104
Select Xdata to Change to a Block Attribute
dialog box 1569
selector switches 383, 387, 471, 476, 478
sensors 595
sequence assignments
missing 1379, 1468, 1476, 1492
reports 1468, 1476, 1492
sequencing
about 1065
displaying 1067, 1650
editing 1067, 1073, 1652
removing 1650
resequencing item numbers 1647
tee markers 10691070
sequential codes 1332
SET files
about 1482
defining 1483
missing level/sequence assignments
reports 1492
panel bill of materials reports 1486
panel component exception
reports 1488
panel component reports 1490
panel nameplate reports 1496
panel terminal exception
reports 1499
panel wire annotation exception
reports 1494
panel wire connection reports 1501
schematic bill of material
reports 1503
schematic cable from/to
reports 1505
schematic cable summary
reports 1508
schematic component reports 1521
schematic component wire list
reports 1512
schematic connector details
reports 1514
schematic connector plug
reports 1517
schematic connector summary
reports 1519
schematic missing bill of material
reports 1524
schematic PLC I/O address and
descriptions reports 1527
schematic PLC I/O component
connection reports 1510
schematic PLC used so far
reports 1534
schematic terminal numbers
reports 1529
schematic terminal plan
reports 1532
schematic wire from/to reports 1525
schematic wire label reports 1537
2130 | Index
Set Pass Power dialog box 1710
Set Power Source/Load Value dialog
box 1709
Set Wire Type dialog box 292
Settings dialog box 838, 1605
Settings List Utility
about 258
configuration updates 261
editing reports 259
Setup Title Block Update dialog
box 1257
shapes 1595
sharing
files 1923
Vault guidelines 2070
sheets
project-wide changes 1240
settings 238
shields (cable) 996
Show Link tool 1701
shunt symbols 622
Signal - Source Code dialog box 1053
signal arrow symbols
about 1049
inserting 1051, 1053
naming conventions 307
prefixes 1050
project-wide changes 1236
styles 1050, 1054, 1056
Signal Code dialog box 898
signals
arrows 307, 1049
destination 898899
fanning markers 10611063
following 898899
project-wide changes 1240
schematic symbol attributes 331
source 898899
symbol naming conventions 307
symbols 604
updating 895
single pole double throw switches 439
single receptacle symbols 450, 624
single side connectors 421, 425
siren symbols 617
size
connectors 1197, 1208
text size 923924, 940
wires 772773
Size tab (Connector Selection dialog
box) 1215
Size tab (Insert Connector dialog
box) 1197
SKIP value 678
solenoids 440, 589
sorting
database tables 736
sorting reports 1361
source arrows 1687
source codes
source code lists 1057
tracking changes to 1241
source cross-reference symbols 859, 894
895
source markers
adding 1059
advanced techniques 1930
fanning 1058
layers 10591061, 1063
styles 10591061
source wire signal symbols 307, 331,
10491050, 1053, 1687
SPACER value 678
spacers 1199, 1208
spacing
buses 957, 1988
fixed spacing 1184
inserted items 1587
ladders 1000, 1002
pins 1199, 1208
PLC database information 648
PLC modules 639, 654, 657
rungs 1004, 1007
Spacing for Component or Footprint
Insertion dialog box 1587
spare connectors 421, 425
spare terminal strips 1154
spare terminals 1127, 1154
spare wires 1672
Special Explode dialog box 1694
special wire numbers 1011
Index | 2131
splice symbols
exporting data for Cable &
Harness 1561
illustrated 444, 629
importing occurrences from
Inventor 1206, 1208
inserting 1226
naming conventions 307
schematic attributes 331
Split Block dialog box 854
Split Connector dialog box 854
splitting
blocks 849, 853854
components 849, 853854
connectors 849, 853854, 1188
tag names 308
terminal tables 1119
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O utility 148, 197,
668, 684
Spreadsheet to PLC I/O Utility Setup dialog
box 688
spreadsheets
din rails 902
exporting component data 1543
exporting data to 1542, 1544
exporting panel layout data 1547
exporting PLC data 15451546
exporting terminal data 15481549
importing connector data 1217
importing data from 1542
mapping to blocks 17041705
PLC database content 678
reports 1348
RSLogix data 689691
structure 1217
updating drawings with data 1550
squeezing
reports 1361
text 923
Stand-Alone Destination Cross-Reference
Symbol dialog box 894
stand-alone I/O points 669
Stand-Alone Source Cross-Reference
Symbol dialog box 894
stand-alone symbols
cross-reference symbols 452, 626,
887888, 894895
inserting 794
naming conventions 307
PLC 669
schematic attributes 331
TAG1 attribute 331
standard light symbols 528
standards 731, 738, 1979, 2062, 2064
stretching
components 849, 852
connectors 1187
nameplates 1649
text 923
wires 960, 2017
Style Box Dimensions dialog box 662
styles
attribute text 921
drawing properties 218
fanning markers 10591062
PLC database information 648
PLC modules 638, 662, 674
project properties 218
project-wide changes 1236
settings 233, 247
signal arrows 1050
sorting catalog databases by 1315
table row styles 1161
WD_M block attributes 270
Styles tab (Drawing Properties dialog
box) 247
Styles tab (Properties dialog box) 233,
2062
subcatalog entries 1361
submenus
creating 1288
editing 1304
properties 1298
support files 1923
suppressor symbols 444
Surf dialog box 1231
surfing
codes 1231
continuing surf sessions 1229
cross-reference reports 860
2132 | Index
references in drawing sets 1229
web pages 1249
Swap Block/Update Block/Library Swap
dialog box 346
swapping
blocks 343344, 346347, 349
libraries 347
NO/NC state 858
pin numbers 1191
terminal strip text 1651
wire numbers 1037
switches
component data 801
symbols 435, 588
switching
blocks 343344, 346347, 349
contact states 858
drawing standards 2064
pin numbers 1191
terminal strip text 1651
wire numbers 1037
wire types 288, 290
Symbol Audit dialog box 372
Symbol Builder
about 353, 2018
attributes 357, 361, 2042
auditing symbols 372
configuring symbols 356
converting non-Electrical
objects 2034
converting text to attributes 367
368
creating footprints 2040
creating symbols 353, 355
editing symbols 362
inserting symbols 362
link line attributes 366
one-line symbols 2033
parent symbols 2025
saving symbols 369, 371
templates 2042
terminal symbols 2029
wire connections 363, 365, 2047
Symbol Builder Attribute Editor 361
Symbol Configuration dialog box 356
symbol libraries 309
Symbol Library Attribute Text/Scale Resize
dialog box 940
symbol mapping
cross-references 876, 879
editing tables 882
Symbol Preview window 1275
symbols
adding to icon menus 1270, 2055
advanced techniques 2018
attributes 356, 361
auditing 369, 372
changing appearance 341
converting non-Electrical
blocks 1682, 1684, 2034
COPYTAG attribute 340
creating 350, 353, 355
cross-references 859, 887888, 894
895
customizing icon menus 1270,
1272, 1275
default libraries 309310
editing attributes 361, 939940
family types 307
layers and 341
location mark symbols 935, 937
multiple libraries 309
naming conventions 294, 307
one line symbols 339
one-line symbols 2033
parent symbols 2025
predefined annotations 342
saving 369, 371
schematic attributes 331, 353
splitting tag names 308
substituting 340
surfing 1229
swapping blocks 343344, 346347,
349
Symbol Builder 353, 2018
TAG1 attribute 331
TAG2 attribute 332
types 353
updating blocks 343344, 346347,
349
WD_M blocks 270
Index | 2133
synchronizing files during
migration 144
synchronoscope symbols 595
T
Table Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog
box 879
Table Generation Setup dialog box 1352
tables (cross-references)
cross-reference data 866
editing 882
graphical formats 871, 873, 876
report fields 1437
table formats 879
updating 883
tables (database)
catalog tables 1311
copying 733
deleting 733
editing 736
footprint lookup files 1638
opening 732
pin lists 13361337, 1339, 1341
PLC database tables 648
schematic lookup files 834835
scratch databases 211
terminal properties database 1175
1177, 1179
user data 904905
tables (reports)
breaking into sections 1348
setup 1352
tables (terminal strips)
fields in 1164
generating 1164, 1170
inserting 1119, 1165
layout 1144
row styles 1161
settings 1146
tabular terminal layout 1144
tachometer symbols 595
tachometric dynamo symbols 595
Tag Panel tools 1697
Tag Schematic tools 1696
tag strips 1115
TAG1 attribute 331
TAG1_PARTX 308
TAG2 attribute 332
TAG2_PARTX 308
tagging non-Electrical-aware
objects 1692, 1694, 1696
1697, 1700
tags
cable markers 979, 983, 985, 987
cables 993
child components 820, 823
circuits 2003
codes for replaceable
parameters 255
components 801, 806
conduits 1666, 1671
copying attributes 340
cross-references and 859
duplicate 1726, 1728, 17331734
exporting for Cable & Harness 1561
fixed component tags 927928
in-use 810811
motor symbol tags 1996
motor symbols 1994
multi-connection sequences 1080
order settings 235, 249
overriding 812, 2062
panel drawings 811
parameters 1029
PLC database information 678
PLC I/O points 672
PLC modules 643
project-wide changes 1236, 1240
retagging components 916, 929
splitting names 308
terminals 1088
tracking changes to 1241
WD_M block attributes 270
wire tags 1009, 1013, 1015
Tags in Use dialog box 810
target attributes 16301631
Task List dialog box 209
tees
connection symbols 10691070
export mapping 1561
temperature switches 429, 560
2134 | Index
templates
attribute templates 353, 2042
creating 261
ladders and 1000
panel layouts 1607
PLC-generated drawings 688
reports 1348
Symbol Builder 2042
wire connection templates 363
Terminal Block Properties dialog
box 1095
Terminal Block Settings dialog box 661
terminal blocks 1095, 1586
terminal boxes 1939
Terminal Data Export dialog box 1549
Terminal Exception reports
about 1468
formatting 1499
generating 1479
terminal numbers
renumbering 11071108
reports 1425, 1440, 1460, 1529
Terminal Numbers Data Fields to Report
dialog box 1425
Terminal Numbers reports
about 1440
fields in 1425
formatting 1529
generating 1460
Terminal Plan Data Fields to Report dialog
box 1431
Terminal Plan reports
about 1440
fields in 1431
formatting 1532
generating 1461
internal and external codes 1361
Terminal Properties Database Editor
about 1175
Edit dialog box 1177
Edit Record dialog box 1179
editing properties 1175
Select Terminal Properties Table dialog
box 1176
terminal row styles 1161
Terminal Strip Definition dialog
box 1122
Terminal Strip Editor
about 1115
accessories 1155
Cable Information tab 1137
Catalog Code Assignment tab 1133
columns and rows 1144
Edit Terminal dialog box 1150
inserting terminal strip tables 1119
inserting terminal strips 1116
installation codes 1157
jumper charts 1120
Layout Preview tab dialog box 1144
location codes 1156
previewing terminal strips 1144
selecting terminal strips 1116
spare terminals 1154
Terminal Strip Definition dialog
box 1122
Terminal Strip Selection dialog
box 1121
Terminal Strip tab 1127
Terminal Strip Table dialog
box 1164
wire constraints 1127
Terminal Strip Representation - Setup
dialog box 1113
Terminal Strip Representation dialog
box 1112
Terminal Strip Selection dialog box 1121
Terminal Strip tab (Terminal Strip
Editor) 1127
Terminal Strip Table Data Fields to Include
dialog box 1164
Terminal Strip Table dialog box 1164
Terminal Strip Table Generator
generating tables 1164
inserting terminal strip tables 1119
settings 1170
Terminal Strip Table Settings dialog
box 1146
Terminal Strip Table Settings dialog
box 1146
terminal strips
about 1110
Index | 2135
accessories 1155
annotations 1113
associating 1158
catalog codes 1133
defining 1122
displaying 1112
drawing shapes 1595
editing 1110, 1127, 1150
graphical layout 1144
inserting 1116, 1654
inserting reports as 1361
inserting tables 1165
installation codes 1157
jumper assignments 1119
jumper charts 1120, 1144
level assignments 1653, 1659, 1662
location codes 1156
multi-level 1127
parameters 1663
pick lists 1663
previewing layout 1144
reassigning terminals 1151
renumbering 1152
reports 1663
row styles 1161
selecting 1116, 1121
sequencing assignments 1650,
16521653
settings 1113
spare terminals 1154
swapping text 1651
table fields 1164
table rows 1161
tables 1119, 1144, 1146, 1164
1165, 1170
terminal associations 1158
Terminal Strip Editor 1115
terminals
about 353
accessories 1155
annotations 1113
assigning types 1939
associations 1088, 1092, 1098
1099, 1127, 1158
attributes 331, 339, 1939
breaking associations 1098, 1100
cable information 1137
connections 1110
copying properties 1100
customized symbols 2029
device box symbols 451, 625
direct-to-terminal wire
connections 1065
displaying associations 1098
editing 654, 1088, 1095, 1150,
1609, 1613, 1619
editing blocks 1939
editing database 1175
exceptions in reports 1385
exporting data 15481549
inserting 1081, 1088, 1586
inserting from panel lists 840841,
846847
inserting terminal reports as
strips 1361
jumper charts 1120
jumpers 11011102, 1104, 1106,
1127
level assignments 1653
listing 1127
marking 1110
multi-connection 1076, 1080
multi-level terminals 1098
multi-stack terminals 1098
multi-tier terminals 1098
multipole terminal block units 1343
naming conventions 307
panel footprint spreadsheet
data 15791580
panel terminal spreadsheet
lists 1583
parameters 1663
pick lists 1663
pin lists 13351337, 1339, 1341
PLC database information 648
PLC modules 650, 657, 661
previewing layout 1144
project lists 1088
properties 1088, 1095, 1127
properties database 11751177,
1179
reassigning 1151
2136 | Index
relationships 1098
reports 1440, 1461, 1468, 1479,
1499, 1532, 1663
sequencing assignments 1650, 1652
spacing 1587
spare 1127, 1154
surfing 1229
symbols 350, 414, 543, 1081
tags 1088
terminal grid 654
terminal numbers 11071108,
1425, 1460, 1529
terminal plan reports 1431, 1461,
1532
Terminal Strip Editor 1115
terminal strip tables 1119
terminal strips 1110, 11121113,
1654, 1659
text 916917
tracking changes to pin
numbers 1241
types of 353, 1081, 1088
Unity Pro data 700
TERMPROPS tables 1175
testing
circuits 1978
text
annotation files 813
converting non-Electrical
objects 2034
converting to attributes 367368,
1685
converting to entities 1692, 1694,
16961697, 1700
converting to wire numbers 1686
cross-references 870
descriptions 816, 918
editing 914917
finding 914917, 10251026
justification 920921
layers 913
library symbols 939940
multi-line 930
project-wide changes 1236
replacing 914917, 10251026
report tables 1352
resizing 940
size 923924
styles 921
swapping wire text 1651
terminal strips 1113
terminals 916917
text constants 1259
title blocks 1256, 1259
tracking changes to 1241
translating descriptions 1244
wire annotations 1574, 16301631
wire numbers 10251026
Text Cross-Reference Format Setup dialog
box 870
text files
external component lists 197
importing annotations from 813
text styles 921
TEXTVALUES 1324
thermal effect symbols 605
thermocouple symbols 442, 595
thermometer symbols 595
time delay relays 398, 517
timers 398, 400
Title Block Setup (User-Defined) dialog
box 1259
Title Block Setup dialog box 1258
title blocks
about 1253
adding 1258
attributes 1253
AutoLISP expressions 1259
client-specific 204205
embedded information in 1261
labels 205
LINEx labels 1262
linking information to 1261
mapping 1262
mapping AutoLISP values to 1266
multiple title blocks 1253
project-wide updates 1240, 1253
removing 1258
settings 1253
text constants 1259
updating 1253, 1256
updating options 12571259
Index | 2137
wildcard characters 1253
titles
report tables 1352
web pages 1249
Toggle Installation Codes dialog
box 1157
Toggle Location Codes dialog box 1156
toggle switch symbols 435
toggling
installation codes 1157
location codes 1156
tee markers 1070
wire numbers 1041
tool palettes
ribbon and 108
toolbars
Conduit Marker 104
Conversion 103
Extra Libraries 105
Main Electrical 81, 92
Panel Layout 96
Power Check 105
Ribbon interface 7
touch switch symbols 581
trace mode
auditing drawings 1728
repairing drawings 1730
tracking changes 12411242
transformer light symbols 529
transformers 390, 497498, 503
translating descriptions 1244
Trim Wire dialog box 959
trimming wires 958959, 1985
troubleshooting
auditing drawings 1726, 1728,
1730, 17331734
real-time error checking 1726,
1728, 1730, 17331734
wire numbers 1010
zooming extents 958
turns 961
twisted pair symbols
naming conventions 307
schematic attributes 331
twisted pair cable symbols 449, 623
TXT files
external component lists 197
importing annotations from 813
TYPE field 1330
Type tab (Connector Selection dialog
box) 1215
Type tab (Insert Connector dialog
box) 1197
U
ultrasonic switch symbols 578
unavailable files 213
unfixed component tags 928
unfixed wire numbers 1033
units of measurement 1332
Unity Pro
exporting PLC data 694695, 700
importing PLC data 701702
Unity Pro Export dialog box 702
Unity Pro Import dialog box 700
unlinking symbols 1702
Update Block - Path/Filename dialog
box 349
Update Configuration Changes
dialog 261
Update Drawings per Spreadsheet Data
dialog box 1550
Update Title Block dialog box 1256
Update Wire Signal and Stand-Alone
Cross-Reference dialog box 895
updating
annotations 888
blocks 343344, 346347, 349
cable markers 993
child location codes 931, 933
cross-reference tables 883
drawings 212
drawings with imported data 1542
IEC tags 208
older versions of files 142
project-wide changes 1240
stand-alone cross-reference
symbols 895
task lists 209
terminal strips 1144
2138 | Index
title blocks 1253, 12561259
WD_M blocks 272
wire signals 895
User-Defined Attribute List dialog
box 1554
user-defined attributes 15501551, 1554
user-defined symbols 307
users
multiple users 1923
user data in project databases 904
905
Vault capabilities 2070
utilities
Setting List Utility 258259, 261
zip utility 202
V
valves 442
variable resistors 448, 622
varistor symbols 622
varmeter symbols 595
Vault
advanced techniques 2070
collaborative design and 171
vendor icon menus 15871588, 1591
Vendor Menu Selection dialog box 1588
Vendor Panel Footprint dialog box 1591
verifying changes 1241
versions of projects 2070
vertical ribbon 106
vertical wire numbers 1046
VIA drawings 1688, 1690
View/Edit Panel Component Connection
Sequence dialog box 1652
volt meters 442
voltage drops 772
voltage protection relay symbols 512
voltmetric commutator switch
symbols 588
VPJ files 1690
W
WBlocked circuits 781, 788
wd_fam.dat files 197
wd_lang1.mdb files 1245
WD_M blocks
about 270
codes for replaceable
parameters 255
copying attributes to 272
default blocks 271
defaults in 270
inserting 273
missing attributes 272
new drawings 182
overrides 865
replacing 271272
saving project settings 256257
updating 272
WD_PNLM blocks
configuration information 1570
copying attributes to 272
inserting 273
WD_SLB code 1270
WD_TB attribute 1257, 1261
WD_ZIP utility 202
wd.env files 142, 197, 202, 292
WDA files 1550
WDBLKNAM attribute 1311, 1324
WDD files 197, 814
wddinrl.xls file 902
WDF files 197
WDI files 197, 684
WDL files 197, 1262
WDN files 197, 1726
WDP files
about 150
contents 202
settings in 218
WDR files 197, 856857
WDT files 197, 1257, 1262
WDTYPE attribute 339
WDW files 197, 962, 1673
WDX files 197
WDXX blocks 937
web pages
linking catalogs to 1324
options 1249
saving projects as 1247, 1249
WEBLINK assignments 1324
Index | 2139
whistle symbols 617
width
ladders 1002
symbols 350
terminal strips 1113
wildcard characters
reports 1348
title blocks 1253
winding symbols 610
Wire Annotation Exception dialog
box 1477
Wire Annotation Exception reports
about 1468
formatting 1494
generating 1477
wire arrow symbols 307, 331, 454, 628
wire colors
encoding 1027, 1029
wire color files 197
Wire Conduit Routing Data Fields to
Report dialog box 1434
Wire Connection reports
about 1468
formatting 1501
generating 1481
wire connection styles 2047
wire connections
annotations 16301631
converting lines to 1701
customizing 2047
inserting 363, 365
limits on 941
styles 2047
tools 361
wire crossings 1184, 1197, 1199, 1208
wire dot symbols 307
Wire From/To Data Fields to Report dialog
box 1421
Wire From/To reports
about 1440
fields in 1421
formatting 1525
generating 1457
wire gaps
about 997
repairing 1730
wire grids 772
Wire It tab (Connector Selection dialog
box) 1215
wire jumpers 906907
Wire Jumpers dialog box 907
Wire Label Data Fields to Report dialog
box 1432
Wire Label reports
about 1440
display settings 1361
fields in 1432
formatting 1537
generating 1464
wire label symbols
in-line wire label symbols 544
reports 1432, 1440, 1464, 1537
schematic attributes 331
wire layers 288, 1236
color and gauge information 1027,
1029
defining 948
valid layers 287
wire lists
exporting for Cable & Harness 1561
importing 1208
reports 1405, 1449, 1512
wire loss 772
wire markers 964
wire networks
about 941
connection reports 1065
wire number layers 278
wire numbers
3-phase 1011, 1016
about 1009
adding to footprints 1630
automatically inserting 1012
codes for replaceable
parameters 255
colors 1027, 1029
configuring for export 1563
converting text to 1686
copying 1038
displaying 1009, 1048
displaying wires 1010
drawing properties 1017, 1041
2140 | Index
duplicate 1726, 1728, 17331734
editing 10301031, 1033
erasing 1048
extra copies of 1038
finding 10251026
fixed 10301031, 1033
flipping 1040
formats 2005
gauge and 1027, 1029
hiding 1048
in-line 1040
incrementing 1045
inserting 1017
layers 278, 1009
leaders 962, 1037
mirroring 1040
motor circuits 1011
motor symbol tags in 1994
moving 10351037
naming conventions 307
no wire numbering 10
order settings 235, 249
parameters 1029
PLC tags 1017
position 1017
predefined 2010
project-wide 1031
project-wide properties 1236
replacing text 10251026
repositioning leader text 1037
resizing 1046
rotating 1036, 1046
schematic attributes 331
schematic wire information 1633,
1635
settings 244
surfing 1229
swapping 1037
tags 1009
toggling position 1041
tracking changes to 1241
troubleshooting 1010
types of 1009
unfixed 1033
WD_M block attributes 270
wire tags 1013, 1015
Wire Numbers tab (Drawing properties
dialog box) 244
Wire Numbers tab (Properties dialog
box) 230
wire shields 996
Wire Signal or Stand-Alone Reference
Report dialog box 1057
wire signal symbols
arrows 10491050, 1053
attributes 331
naming conventions 307
project-wide changes 1236, 1240
Wire Size Lookup dialog box 772773
Wire Tagging (project-wide) dialog
box 1015
Wire Tagging dialog box 1013
wire tags
formats 1009
inserting 1013, 1015
wire tees 958959, 1069
wire types
changing 288, 290
defining 1991
grid 287
setting default 292
wire ways
generating spreadsheet records 902
inserting labels 1671
Wire/Conduit Routing Report dialog
box 1676
wires
3-phase wires 956957
about 941
angled 955
annotations 1381, 1468, 1477,
1494, 1574, 16301631,
1633, 1635
arrow symbols 454, 1049
bending 961
cable markers 969
colors 962963, 1027, 1029
conduit information 1671
conduit routing data in reports 1434
connection report data fields 1388
connection templates 363
connection tools 361
Index | 2141
constraints 1115
converting lines to 1692, 1694,
16961697, 1700
creating 287
de-rating factors 772
displaying 1010
displaying connections 1110
editing 287
exporting connection data 1545
extracting 989, 993
fanning markers 10581063
from/to reports 1065, 1421
gaps 997, 1730
gauge 962, 1027, 1029
importing occurrences from
Inventor 1206, 1208
in-line components 678
in-line markers 964
in-line wire label symbols 544
in-line wire numbers 1040
inserting 955958, 1182
interconnecting components 958
labels 962963
ladders 999, 1002
layers 281282, 288, 948, 962963,
1027, 1029, 1236
loads 772
multi-connection sequencing 1076,
1080
multiple buses 1203
multiple wire buses 956957
numbering 230
paralleled 772
pigtails 350
point-to-point tools 1182
replacing 1730
reports 1440, 1449, 1457, 1468,
1481, 1501, 1512, 1525
resizing 772773
routing reports 1676
schematic attributes 331
scooting 849, 851
sequencing 1065, 1067, 1073
signal reports 1057
spacing 1988
spare wires 1672
splices 1226
stand-alone reference reports 1057
stretching 960, 2017
switching types 288, 953
tags 1013, 1015
tee markers 10691070
terminals 1110
tracing 1730
trimming 958959, 1985
troubleshooting 1010
unique IDs 1563
wire crossings 1184, 1197, 1199,
1208
wire grids 772
wire labels 1432, 1464, 1537
wire lists 1208, 1405, 1561
wire loss 772
wire numbers 1009
wire types 287288, 290, 292, 1991
zooming extents and 958
WO_CBLWIRES table 994
workflows
Circuit Builder 705, 1940
one-line symbols 2033
parent symbols 2025
pin lists 1918
PLC modules 1939
source and destination
markers 1930
terminal jumpers 1102
terminal symbols 2029
workgroups
collaborative design 171
Vault setup 2070
workspaces 8, 2070
WW1 files 1673
X
X Zone grid 250
X Zone Setup dialog box 250
X-Y grid 252
X-Y Grid Setup dialog box 252
Xdata
about 1568
converting to attributes 1569
2142 | Index
editing 17351736
power checks and 1708
Symbol Builder attribute
templates 2042
Xdata Editor dialog box 1736
XHW files 694, 700
XLS files
din rails 902
exporting component data 1543
exporting panel layout data 1547
exporting PLC data 15451546
exporting spreadsheet data 1542,
1544
exporting terminal data 15481549
importing connector data 1217
importing spreadsheet data 1542
mapping to blocks 17041705
PLC database content 678
reports 1348
RSLogix data 689691
structure 1217
updating drawings with data 1550
XML files
importing connector data 1217
importing data from
Inventor 1206, 1208
Unity Pro data 694, 700702
XSY files 694, 700702
Z
zener diode symbols 448, 622
zip utility 202
zooming in or out 958
Index | 2143